diff options
| author | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2008-03-07 19:18:57 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2008-03-07 19:18:57 +0000 |
| commit | 65df837d29600b7980f1e49aa2bcee6da454bae0 (patch) | |
| tree | dbd621ac42ed498c32fc49fb0bbe77753f1c32c1 /Master | |
| parent | b253317283f1d4cbf2a8c292bf3814b714e43ab3 (diff) | |
glossaries update, including makeglossaries.bat in bin/win32 (4mar08)
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@6879 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master')
48 files changed, 12841 insertions, 2725 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/scripts/makeglossaries.bat b/Master/bin/win32/makeglossaries.bat index 64a6a20750c..64a6a20750c 100755 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/scripts/makeglossaries.bat +++ b/Master/bin/win32/makeglossaries.bat diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/CHANGES b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/CHANGES new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c54ec6c055a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/CHANGES @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ +glossaries change log: + +v1.11 (2 March 2008): + * Fixed error in manual (glossary style is set using \glossarystyle + not \setglossarystyle). + + * Changed the way the package is archived to make it compatible + with TeX Live. + + * Improved error handling of makeglossaries and added --version + and --help options. + +v1.1 (22 Feb 2008): + + * New package options: + + - numberline: + inserts \numberline{} in \addcontentsline when used with + the toc option. + + - numberedsection: + puts glossaries in numbered chapters/sections + + - translate: + translate=false option prevents glossaries package from + using pre-supplied translations. + + - description: + changes definition of \newacronym to allow a description + + - footnote: + changes definition of \newacronym to use a footnote on + first use + + - smallcaps: + changes definition of \newacronym to set acronyms in + small capitals + + - dua: + changes definition of \newacronym to always expand + acronyms + + * Added \setglossarysection + - changes the section type used by the glossaries + + * Added listdotted glossary style. + + * No longer uses xspace package; uses amsgen instead. + + * Added \glsname, \glsdesc, \glssymbol, \glsfirst, \glstext, + \glsplural and \glsfirstplural. + + * Added support for translator package. + +v1.08 (13 Oct 2007): + * Added multilingual support + * Fixed bug in listgroup and altlistgroup styles so that + \glsgroupheading uses \glsgetgrouptitle to get the group title + instead of displaying the label + * Fixed typo in error message text when the description key + is missing to \newglossaryentry. + +v1.07 (13 Sep 2007): + * Fixed bug causing incorrect page number for entries in the + first paragraph of a page. + +v1.06 (21 Aug 2007): + * Changed the license text + +v1.05 (10 Aug 2007): + * Changed the default value of the sort key to just use the + name key + * Added \@mkboth to \glossarysection + +v1.04 (3 Aug 2007): + * Added \glstextformat + +v1.03 (4 July 2007): + * Added \glspostdescription + +v1.02 (25 May 2007): + * Added overview section in the documentation + +v1.01 (17 May 2007): + * Added number range facility (equivalent to makeindex's |( and |) + formatting commands.) + * Added a space after \delimN and \delimR in the ist file. + +v1.0 (16 May 2007): Initial release diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/INSTALL b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/INSTALL new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..054c8ab7a25 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/INSTALL @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ +INSTALLATION
+
+If you have downloaded the glossaries package using the TeX Directory
+Structure (TDS), that is you have downloaded an archive containing
+doc, tex, scripts and source directories, you need to follow the
+"Installing from TDS" instructions below.
+
+If you have downloaded the following files:
+
+glossaries.dtx
+glossaries.ins
+makeglossaries
+makeglossaries.bat
+
+You need to follow the "Installing from DTX and INS" instructions
+below.
+
+For further information on installing LaTeX packages see:
+
+http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=installthings
+
+INSTALLING FROM TDS
+===================
+
+Files in tex and doc directories should go in the
+corresponding TEXMF directories (for example, /usr/share/texmf-local/
+or C:\localtexmf\). The scripts/glossaries/ directory
+contains the Perl script makeglossaries and the batch file
+makeglossaries.bat which should go somewhere on your operating system's
+PATH. (Both files are required for Windows, but only the Perl script is
+required for other operating systems.)
+
+*Remember to refresh TeX's database*
+
+A minimal example file called minimalgls.tex is provided for testing
+and debugging purposes and can be found in the package documentation
+samples directory (doc/latex/glossaries/samples/). To test your
+installation do:
+
+latex minimalgls
+makeglossaries minimalgls
+latex minimalgls
+
+The LaTeX2HTML style file, glossaries.perl, is located in
+source/latex/glossaries and should go in the LaTeX2HTML styles
+directory.
+
+INSTALLING FROM DTX AND INS
+===========================
+
+Run LaTeX on glossaries.ins to generate the package style files,
+sample files and LaTeX2HTML style file:
+
+latex glossaries.ins
+
+To create the package documentation (glossaries.pdf):
+
+pdflatex glossaries.dtx
+makeindex -s gind.ist glossaries
+makeindex -s gglo.ist -o glossaries.gls glossaries.glo
+pdflatex glossaries.dtx
+pdflatex glossaries.dtx
+
+If TEXMF denotes the base directory of your local TeX installation (e.g.
+/usr/share/texmf-local/ or C:\localtexmf\) then create the following
+directories (if they don't already exist):
+
+TEXMF/doc/latex/glossaries
+TEXMF/doc/latex/glossaries/samples
+TEXMF/tex/latex/glossaries
+TEXMF/tex/latex/glossaries/base
+TEXMF/tex/latex/glossaries/styles
+TEXMF/tex/latex/glossaries/dict
+
+Move the sample files (*.tex) to TEXMF/doc/latex/glossaries/sample/
+
+Move the documentation (*.pdf) to TEXMF/doc/latex/glossaries/
+
+Move glossaries.sty to TEXMF/tex/latex/glossaries/base/
+
+Move the other style files (*.sty) to TEXMF/tex/latex/glossaries/styles/
+
+Move the dictionary files (*.dic) to TEXMF/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/
+
+Move makeglossaries to somewhere on your path, e.g. /usr/bin/. You
+may need to edit the first line of makeglossaries if perl is
+located somewhere other than /usr/bin/.
+
+If you are a Windows user, you will also need to move makeglossaries.bat
+to the same location as makeglossaries, but you will need to have
+Perl installed to be able to use makeglossaries. (It is possible
+to use makeindex directly if you don't have Perl installed. See
+the manual, glossaries.pdf, for details.)
+
+*Remember to refresh TeX's database*
+
+A minimal example file called minimalgls.tex is provided for testing
+and debugging purposes. This file is created along with all the other
+sample files when you run glossaries.ins through LaTeX. To test your
+installation do:
+
+latex minimalgls
+makeglossaries minimalgls
+latex minimalgls
+
+If you want to use the glossaries package with LaTeX2HTML:
+move glossaries.perl to the LaTeX2HTML styles directory.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/README index 4e57293dab8..a03181fb5f6 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/README +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/README @@ -1,42 +1,42 @@ -LaTeX Package : glossaries v 1.08 - -Last Modified : 13 October 2007 - -Author : Nicola Talbot - -This package is provided to assist generating glossaries. -The package supports acronyms and multiple glossaries. -New entries are defined to have a name and description (and -optionally an associated symbol.) Plural forms can also be -specified. New glossary styles can be defined, and preambles -and postambles can be specified. There is provision for loading -a database of terms, only terms used in the text will be added -to the relevant glossary. - -*This package replaces the glossary package which is now obsolete.* - -The package is supplied using the TeX Directory Structure (TDS). -Files in texmf directory should go in the corresponding -$LOCALTEXMF directories. The scripts directory contains the Perl -script makeglossaries and the batch file makeglossaries.bat -which should go somewhere on your operating system's PATH. (Both -files are required for Windows, only the Perl script is -required for other operating systems.) - -*Remember to refresh TeX's database* - -This package comes with a LaTeX2HTML style file glossaries.perl. -This is located in latex2html/styles and should be placed in -the relevant LaTeX2HTML styles directory, but note that -glossaries.perl only supplies a sub-set of the commands provided -by glossary.sty, so some commands may not be implemented, or -may be implemented in a different way. - -The package and documentation source code is also supplied as a -dtx and ins file located in texmf/source. - -This material is subject to the LaTeX Project Public License. -See http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/licenses.lppl.html for the details of that license. - -http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/ - +LaTeX Package : glossaries v 1.11
+
+Last Modified : 2 March 2008
+
+Author : Nicola Talbot
+
+This package is provided to assist generating glossaries.
+The package supports acronyms and multiple glossaries.
+New entries are defined to have a name and description (and
+optionally an associated symbol.) Plural forms can also be
+specified. New glossary styles can be defined, and preambles
+and postambles can be specified. There is provision for loading
+a database of terms, only terms used in the text will be added
+to the relevant glossary.
+
+*This package replaces the glossary package which is now obsolete.*
+
+INSTALLATION
+
+See INSTALL file for installation instructions.
+
+REQUIREMENTS
+
+The glossaries package requires at least version 2.5f (2006/11/18) of
+the xkeyval package.
+
+LaTeX2HTML
+
+This package comes with a LaTeX2HTML style file glossaries.perl
+which should be placed in the relevant LaTeX2HTML styles directory, but
+note that glossaries.perl only supplies a sub-set of the commands
+provided by glossaries.sty, so some commands may not be implemented or
+may be implemented in a different way.
+
+LICENCE
+
+This material is subject to the LaTeX Project Public License.
+See http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/licenses.lppl.html
+for the details of that license.
+
+Author's home page: http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/CHANGES b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/CHANGES deleted file mode 100644 index 4f3111053bc..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/CHANGES +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ -glossaries change log: - -v1.08 (13 Oct 2007): - * Added multilingual support - * Fixed bug in listgroup and altlistgroup styles so that - \glsgroupheading uses \glsgetgrouptitle to get the group title - instead of displaying the label - * Fixed typo in error message text when the description key - is missing to \newglossaryentry. - -v1.07 (13 Sep 2007): - * Fixed bug causing incorrect page number for entries in the - first paragraph of a page. - -v1.06 (21 Aug 2007): - * Changed the license text - -v1.05 (10 Aug 2007): - * Changed the default value of the sort key to just use the - name key - * Added \@mkboth to \glossarysection - -v1.04 (3 Aug 2007): - * Added \glstextformat - -v1.03 (4 July 2007): - * Added \glspostdescription - -v1.02 (25 May 2007): - * Added overview section in the documentation - -v1.01 (17 May 2007): - * Added number range facility (equivalent to makeindex's |( and |) - formatting commands.) - * Added a space after \delimN and \delimR in the ist file. - -v1.0 (16 May 2007): Initial release diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/glossaries.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/glossaries.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f43e59e629d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/glossaries.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/glossary2glossaries.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/glossary2glossaries.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index fd9d18c7c63..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/glossary2glossaries.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries-manual.html b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries-manual.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d442c01dab1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries-manual.html @@ -0,0 +1,3270 @@ +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2 Final//EN"> + +<!--Converted with LaTeX2HTML 2002 (1.67) +original version by: Nikos Drakos, CBLU, University of Leeds +* revised and updated by: Marcus Hennecke, Ross Moore, Herb Swan +* with significant contributions from: + Jens Lippmann, Marek Rouchal, Martin Wilck and others --> +<HTML> +<HEAD> +<TITLE>glossaries.sty v 1.11: LaTeX2e Package to Assist Generating Glossaries</TITLE> +<META NAME="description" CONTENT="glossaries.sty v 1.11: LaTeX2e Package to Assist Generating Glossaries"> +<META NAME="keywords" CONTENT="glossaries-manual"> +<META NAME="resource-type" CONTENT="document"> +<META NAME="distribution" CONTENT="global"> + +<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1"> +<META NAME="Generator" CONTENT="LaTeX2HTML v2002"> +<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Style-Type" CONTENT="text/css"> + + +</HEAD> + +<BODY > +<A NAME="top"></A> + +<P> + +<P> + + <H1 ALIGN="CENTER">glossaries.sty v 1.11: LaTeX2e Package to Assist Generating Glossaries</H1> +<P ALIGN="CENTER"><STRONG>Nicola L.C. Talbot +<BR> +<BR> +School of Computing Sciences +<BR> +University of East Anglia +<BR> +Norwich. Norfolk +<BR> +NR4 7TJ. United Kingdom. +<BR><TT><A NAME="tex2html1" +HREF="http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/">http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/</A></TT></STRONG></P> +<P ALIGN="CENTER"><STRONG>2nd March 2008</STRONG></P> +<BR> + +<H2><A NAME="SECTION00010000000000000000"> +Contents</A> +</H2> +<!--Table of Contents--> + +<UL> +<LI><A NAME="tex2html34" + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00020000000000000000">Introduction</A> +<UL> +<LI><A NAME="tex2html35" + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00021000000000000000">Generating the associated glossary files</A> +<LI><A NAME="tex2html36" + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00022000000000000000">Troubleshooting</A> +</UL> +<BR> +<LI><A NAME="tex2html37" + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00030000000000000000">A Quick Guide For The Impatient</A> +<LI><A NAME="tex2html38" + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00040000000000000000">Overview</A> +<UL> +<LI><A NAME="tex2html39" + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00041000000000000000">Package Options</A> +<LI><A NAME="tex2html40" + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00042000000000000000">Defining Glossary Entries</A> +<LI><A NAME="tex2html41" + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00043000000000000000">Number lists</A> +<LI><A NAME="tex2html42" + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00044000000000000000">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +<LI><A NAME="tex2html43" + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00045000000000000000">Adding an entry to the glossary without generating text</A> +<LI><A NAME="tex2html44" + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00046000000000000000">Displaying a glossary</A> +<LI><A NAME="tex2html45" + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00047000000000000000">Defining New Glossaries</A> +<LI><A NAME="tex2html46" + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00048000000000000000">Acronyms</A> +<LI><A NAME="tex2html47" + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00049000000000000000">Unsetting and resetting entry flags</A> +<LI><A NAME="tex2html48" + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION000410000000000000000">Glossary Styles</A> +<LI><A NAME="tex2html49" + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION000411000000000000000">Defining your own glossary style</A> +</UL> +<BR> +<LI><A NAME="tex2html50" + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00050000000000000000">Index</A> +</UL> +<!--End of Table of Contents--> +<P> + +<H1><A NAME="SECTION00020000000000000000"> +Introduction</A> +</H1> + +<P> +The <TT>glossaries</TT> package is provided to assist generating +glossaries. It has a certain amount of flexibility, allowing the user +to customize the format of the glossary and define multiple glossaries. +It also supports acronyms and glossary styles that include +symbols (in addition to a name and description) for glossary +entries. There is provision for loading a database of glossary terms +where only those terms used in the text are added to the glossary. +This package replaces the <TT>glossary</TT><A NAME="1800"></A> package which is now +obsolete. + +<P> +As from version 1.08, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package now has +limited multi-lingual support, thanks to all the people who have sent +me the relevant translations either via email or via comp.text.tex. +However you must load <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="1804"></A> <I>before</I> +<TT>glossaries</TT> to enable this. +As from version 1.1, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package also supports +Till Tantau's <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="1810"></A> package provided it is loaded +before the <TT>glossaries</TT> package. This makes it easier to change +the default translations or add new dictionaries. +If you don't want to use the predefined translations, you can use the +package option <TT>translate=false</TT><A NAME="1821"></A> and supply your own translations. + +<P> +This documentation is structured as follows: <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:quick">A Quick Guide For The Impatient</A> is for +people who want a few quick pointers of how to get started, +without having to read through lengthy descriptions, +and <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:overview">Overview</A> gives an overview of available commands +and their syntax. +<P> +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> + +<P> + +<H2><A NAME="SECTION00021000000000000000"></A> +<A NAME="sec:makeglossaries"></A> +<BR> +Generating the associated glossary files +</H2> + +<P> +The <TT>glossaries</TT> package comes with the Perl script +<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="1827"></A> which will run <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="1830"></A> on +all the glossary files using a customized <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="1833"></A> +<TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="1836"></A> style file (which is created by <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="1838"></A>). +The relevant extensions are obtained from the +auxiliary file, so you should only pass the basename as the +argument. For example, if your document is called +<TT>myfile.tex</TT>, do: +<PRE> +latex myfile +makeglossaries myfile +latex myfile +</PRE> +You may need to explicitly load <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="1841"></A> into +Perl: +<PRE> +perl makeglossaries myfile +</PRE> +There is a batch file called <TT>makeglossaries.bat</TT> which +does this for Windows users. + +<P> +If you don't have Perl installed, you will have to run +<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="1844"></A> for each glossary type you have defined. +For example, if you have used the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="1852"></A> package option +then you will have both a main glossary as well as a list of acronyms, so you +will need to do (assuming your document is called <TT>myfile.tex</TT>): +<PRE> +makeindex -s myfile.ist -t myfile.glg -o myfile.gls myfile.glo +makeindex -s myfile.ist -t myfile.alg -o myfile.acr myfile.acn +</PRE> +This requires remembering all extensions for each of the glossaries +defined in your document, so where possible you should use +<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="1856"></A> instead to reduce the possibility of error. +Don't pass all the glossary files in a single call to +<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="1859"></A> or it will merge all your glossaries into a +single glossary. + +<P> +If any problems occur, remember to check the transcript files +(e.g. <TT>.glg</TT><A NAME="1862"></A> or <TT>.alg</TT><A NAME="1864"></A>) for messages. +<P> +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> + +<P> + +<H2><A NAME="SECTION00022000000000000000"> +Troubleshooting</A> +</H2> + +<P> +The glossaries package comes with a minimal file called +<TT>minimalgls.tex</TT> which can be used for testing. This +should be located in <TT>texmf/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/</TT>. Further +information on debugging LaTeX code is available at +<TT><A NAME="tex2html2" + HREF="http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/minexample/">http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/minexample/</A></TT>. + +<P> +There is a list of frequently asked questions for the +<TT>glossaries</TT> package available at +<TT><A NAME="tex2html3" + HREF="http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/packages/faq/glossariesfaq.html">http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/packages/faq/glossariesfaq.html</A></TT>. +<P> +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> + +<P> + +<H1><A NAME="SECTION00030000000000000000"></A> +<A NAME="sec:quick"></A> +<BR> +A Quick Guide For The Impatient +</H1> + +<P> +This section is for people who want a few quick pointers +of how to get started, without having to read through +lengthy descriptions. + +<P> + +<OL> +<LI>Load <TT>glossaries</TT> <I>after</I> <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="1874"></A>: +<PRE> +\usepackage{hyperref} +\usepackage{glossaries} +</PRE> +Similarly for the <TT>html</TT><A NAME="1877"></A> package: +<PRE> +\usepackage{html} +\usepackage{glossaries} +</PRE> + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>Always use <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="1880"></A> if you want the glossary +entries to be written to the glossary file: +<PRE> +\documentclass{article} +\usepackage{glossaries} +\makeglossaries +</PRE> +If you don't use <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="1883"></A>, your glossaries will +not appear in the document! + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>Use <TT>\printglossaries</TT><A NAME="1886"></A> to make your glossaries appear +in the document at that point. For example: +<PRE> +\maketitle +\printglossaries +\section{Introduction} +</PRE> +Note that only the glossary entries that have been used in the +document text will appear in the glossary. + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>When you have created your document, run LaTeX on it, +then the Perl script <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="1889"></A>, then run LaTeX on it again: +<PRE> +latex myfile +makeglossaries myfile +latex myfile +</PRE> +(You may need to run LaTeX again if you have used the <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="1897"></A> +package option.) +If you use Windows, there is a batch file called +<TT>makeglossaries.bat</TT> which you can use, but you will +still need Perl installed. + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>New glossaries can be defined using: +<P> +<TT>\newglossary</TT><A NAME="1901"></A><TT>[</TT><EM>log-ext</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>in-ext</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>out-ext</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>title</EM><TT>}</TT> +<P> +where <I>label</I> is an identifying label, +<I>in-ext</I> is the extension of the file to be created +by <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="1904"></A> (called by <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="1907"></A>), +<I>out-ext</I> is the extension of the file to be read by +<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="1910"></A> and <I>title</I> is the title for this +new glossary. The first optional argument <I>log-ext</I> specifies +the extension of the <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="1913"></A> transcript file. Example: +<PRE> +\newglossary[nlg]{notation}{not}{ntn}{Notation} +</PRE> +This glossary's label is <TT>notation</TT> and its title +will be Notation. If you use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="1916"></A>, the +<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="1919"></A> transcript will be written to a file with the +extension <TT>.nlg</TT><A NAME="1922"></A>. If <I>log-ext</I> is omitted, the extension +<TT>.glg</TT><A NAME="1924"></A> will be used. + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>Any new glossaries must be defined before +<TT>\makeglossaries</TT> +<PRE> +\documentclass{article} +\usepackage{glossaries} +\newglossary{notation}{not}{ntn}{Notation} +\makeglossaries +</PRE> + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>If you use the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="1931"></A> package option, the +<TT>glossaries</TT> package +will automatically create a new glossary type labelled +<TT>acronym</TT>: +<PRE> +\usepackage[acronym]{glossaries} +</PRE> + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>If your pages have a hyphen compositor (i.e. your page +numbers appear in the form 2-1), redefine <TT>\glscompositor</TT><A NAME="1936"></A> +<I>before</I> <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="1939"></A>: +<PRE> +\documentclass{article} +\usepackage{glossaries} +\renewcommand{\glscompositor}{-} +\makeglossaries +</PRE> + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>To add the glossaries to the table of contents use the +<TT>toc</TT><A NAME="1947"></A> package option: +<PRE> +\usepackage[toc]{glossaries} +</PRE> + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>Define a new entry with: +<P> +<TT>\newglossaryentry</TT><A NAME="1951"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>key-val list</EM><TT>}</TT> +<P> +The <I>key-val list</I> must at least contain a <TT>name</TT><A NAME="1954"></A> +key and a <TT>description</TT><A NAME="1957"></A> key. +For example: +<PRE> +\newglossaryentry{perl}{name=Perl, +description=A scripting language} +</PRE> +In this example, I have given the entry the label <TT>perl</TT>. +Whenever I want to use this entry, that is the label I need +to use to identify it. + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>If the entry name starts with an accented letter, you will +need to group the first letter (otherwise it will cause a +problem for <TT>\Gls</TT><A NAME="1960"></A> and <TT>\Glspl</TT><A NAME="1963"></A>): +<PRE> +\newglossaryentry{elite}{name={{\'e}lite}, +description={select group or class}} +</PRE> + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>If you have multiple glossaries, use the <TT>type</TT><A NAME="1966"></A> +key to specify in which glossary the entry belongs. For example: +<PRE> +\newglossary{languages}{lan}{lng}{Index of Languages} + +\makeglossaries + +\newglossaryentry{perl}{name=Perl, +description=A scripting language, +type=languages} +</PRE> +If <TT>type</TT><A NAME="1969"></A> is omitted, the default glossary is used. + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>Remember to group values that have a comma or equal sign. +For example: +<PRE> +\newglossaryentry{pagelist}{name=page list, +description={A list of individual pages or page ranges +(e.g.\ 1,2,4,7--9)}} +</PRE> + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>Plural forms are assumed to be the singular form with an +"s" appended, unless otherwise specified. To specify an +irregular plural, use the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="1972"></A> key. For example: +<PRE> +\newglossaryentry{matrix}{name=matrix, +description=rectangular array of quantities, +plural=matrices} +</PRE> + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>The way the term appears in the main text can be different +from the way the term appears in the glossary: +<PRE> +\newglossaryentry{matrix}{name=Matrix, +description=rectangular array of quantities, +text=matrix, +plural=matrices} +</PRE> +In this example, the entry name appears as "Matrix" in the +glossary, and either "matrix" or "matrices" in the text. + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>The way the term appears on first use can be different +to the way it appears subsequently: +<PRE> +\newglossaryentry{singmtx}{name=Singular Matrix, +description=A matrix with a zero determinant, +first=singular matrix (SM), +text=SM, +firstplural=singular matrices (SMs)} +</PRE> +In this example, the entry name appears as "Singular Matrix" in +the glossary, and in the text it appears as "singular matrix (SM)" +or "singular matrices (SMs)" the first time the entry is used, +and subsequently appears as "SM" or "SMs". + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>The quick and easy way to define an acronym is to use: +<P> +<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="1975"></A><TT>[</TT><EM>key-val list</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>abbrev</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>long</EM><TT>}</TT> +<P> +For example: +<PRE> +\newacronym{svm}{SVM}{support vector machine} +</PRE> +This is equivalent to: +<PRE> +\newglossaryentry{svm}{type=\acronymtype, +name={SVM}, +description={support vector machine}, +text={SVM}, +first={support vector machine (SVM)}, +plural={SVMs}, +firstplural={support vector machines (SVMs)}} +</PRE> +(The value of <TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="1978"></A> varies depending on whether +the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="1986"></A> package option is used or not. +The optional argument <I>key-val list</I> can be used to +override any of the <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT><A NAME="1990"></A> keys; for +example, if the acronym has an irregular plural.) + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>The font used to display the entry name in the glossary +is governed by <TT>\glsnamefont</TT><A NAME="1993"></A>. This can be redefined +as required. For example, to make the entry names appear +in a medium sans-serif font do: +<PRE> +\renewcommand{\glsnamefont}[1]{\textsf{\mdseries #1}} +</PRE> +Note that the list-like glossary styles defined in the +<TT>glossary-list</TT><A NAME="1996"></A> package place the entry name in +the optional argument to <TT>\item</TT><A NAME="1999"></A>, so they will +appear in bold, unless you redefine <TT>\glsnamefont</TT><A NAME="2002"></A> to counteract the +bold font. + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>In the document use <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="2005"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> +to use a predefined term (this will also enter the term into +the associated glossary output file). For example: +<PRE> +A \gls{singmtx} is a matrix with a zero determinant. +</PRE> + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>Other variations: + +<UL> +<LI><TT>\Gls</TT><A NAME="2008"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> : like <TT>\gls</TT>, +but with first letter in upper case +</LI> +<LI><TT>\GLS</TT><A NAME="2011"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> : like <TT>\gls</TT>, +but all upper case. +</LI> +<LI><TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="2014"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> : use plural +</LI> +<LI><TT>\Glspl</TT><A NAME="2017"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> : use plural with +first letter in upper case +</LI> +<LI><TT>\GLSpl</TT><A NAME="2020"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> : use plural but +all upper case +</LI> +<LI><TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="2023"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>link text</EM><TT>}</TT> : +use <I>link text</I> to link to the given entry in the glossary. +</LI> +</UL> +For example, the following will produce the plural form with +the first letter in uppercase: +<PRE> +\Glspl{singmtx} are matrices with a zero determinant. +</PRE> + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>Additional text can be appended to the link using the +end optional argument. For example, to form the possessive: +<PRE> +The \gls{singmtx}['s] dimensions \ldots +</PRE> + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>The format of the associated entry number can be +changed using the <TT>format</TT><A NAME="2026"></A> key in the optional argument. +Note that the value of the <TT>format</TT><A NAME="2029"></A> key should be the +name of a command <I>without</I> the initial backslash. For +example: +<PRE> +The primary definition of \glspl[format=textbf]{singmtx}. +</PRE> +In this example the relevant glossary entry will have the +page number in bold (since it uses <TT>\textbf</TT>) but +it will no longer have a hyperlink (if hyperlinks are enabled.) + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>The <TT>glossaries</TT> package provides commands to +change the font whilst ensuring that the number remains a +hyperlink. These are of the form <TT>\hyper</TT><I>xx</I> and +are equivalent to the standard font changing commands of the +form <TT>\text</TT><I>xx</I>, as well as <TT>\hyperemph</TT><A NAME="2033"></A> +(which uses <TT>\emph</TT><A NAME="2036"></A>.) For example: +<PRE> +The primary definition of \glspl[format=hyperbf]{singmtx}. +</PRE> + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>Don't use declarations in <TT>format</TT><A NAME="2039"></A> as this can +cause unpredictable results, as there is no guarantee that the effect +will be localised to the required text. + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>Entries can be added to the glossary without producing +any text using <TT>\glsadd</TT><A NAME="2042"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> or +<TT>\glsaddall</TT><A NAME="2045"></A>. These commands also taken an optional +argument where you can specify the format. For example +<PRE> +\glsadd[format=hyperbf]{singmtx} +</PRE> +will add a line to the +glossary file for the specified term, but will not produce +any text where the command occurs. + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>A number range can be entered using <code>format=(</code> and +<code>format=)</code> to mark the beginning and ending of the +range<A NAME="tex2html4" + HREF="#foot370"><SUP>1</SUP></A>. For example: +<PRE> + \glsadd[format=(]{singmtx} + This is a very long section all about \glspl{singmtx}. + + % lots of text omitted + + \glsadd[format=)]{singmtx} +</PRE> +This is equivalent to <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2048"></A>'s <code>|(</code> and <code>|)</code> +formats. + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>You can combine the range markers with a formatting command +(again without the preceding backslash). For example: +<PRE> + This is the start of a very long section all + about \glspl[format=(hyperbf]{singmtx}. + + % lots of text omitted + + This is the end a very long section all about + \glspl[format=)hyperbf]{singmtx}. +</PRE> + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>Only those terms that have actually been used in the +document will be placed in the glossary. If you have defined +a term that doesn't appear in the document, then it means +you haven't used it in the text (either via <TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="2051"></A> +or <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="2054"></A> and related commands, or via <TT>\glsadd</TT><A NAME="2057"></A> +or <TT>\glsaddall</TT><A NAME="2060"></A>.) + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>To change the sorting order, use the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="2063"></A> key. +For example: +<PRE> +\newglossaryentry{universal}{name={\ensuremath{\mathcal{U}}}, +description=The universal set, +sort=U} +</PRE> + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>You don't need to escape <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2066"></A>'s special characters: +<PRE> +\newglossaryentry{quote}{name={"}, +description={Double quote character}} + +\newglossaryentry{exclam}{name={!}, +description={Exclamation mark}} + +\newacronym{rna}{RNA}{ribonukleins\"aure} +</PRE> + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>Associated symbols can also be specified, but whether the +symbol appears in the glossary depends on the glossary style. +For example: +<PRE> +\newglossaryentry{metre}{name={metre}, +description={A metric measurement of length}, +symbol={m}} +</PRE> +The predefined glossary styles that display the entry symbol +are: <TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="2069"></A>, <TT>long4colheader</TT><A NAME="2071"></A>, +<TT>long4colborder</TT><A NAME="2073"></A>, <TT>long4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="2075"></A>, +<TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="2077"></A>, <TT>super4colheader</TT><A NAME="2079"></A>, +<TT>super4colborder</TT><A NAME="2081"></A> and <TT>super4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="2083"></A>. +All the other styles supplied by this package ignore the associated +symbol. + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>Glossary styles can be set using the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="2090"></A> +package option. For example: +<PRE> +\usepackage[style=long3col]{glossaries} +</PRE> +or using <TT>\glossarystyle</TT><A NAME="2094"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>style</EM><TT>}</TT>. For example: +<PRE> +\glossarystyle{altlist} +</PRE> +The predefined glossary styles provided by the <TT>glossaries</TT> +bundle are listed in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:styles">Glossary Styles</A>. + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>The list of numbers associated with each glossary entry +can be suppressed using the package option <TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="2103"></A>: +<PRE> +\usepackage[nonumberlist]{glossaries} +</PRE> + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>By default, the glossaries will appear in an unnumbered +chapter if chapters are defined, otherwise in an unnumbered +section. This can be changed using the <TT>section</TT><A NAME="2112"></A> package +option. For example, to make the glossaries appear in an unnumbered +section, even if chapters are defined, do: +<PRE> +\usepackage[section]{glossaries} +</PRE> +Other sectional units can also be specified as +<TT>section</TT><A NAME="2121"></A>=<I>value</I>. For example, to make the glossaries +appear in unnumbered subsections: +<PRE> +\usepackage[section=subsection]{glossaries} +</PRE> + +<P> +</LI> +</OL> +<P> +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> + +<P> + +<H1><A NAME="SECTION00040000000000000000"></A><A NAME="sec:overview"></A> +<BR> +Overview +</H1> + +<P> + +<H2><A NAME="SECTION00041000000000000000"> +Package Options</A> +</H2> + +<P> +The <TT>glossaries</TT> package options are as follows: +<DL> +<DT><STRONG><TT>toc</TT><A NAME="2134"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>Add the glossaries to the table of contents. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>numberline</TT><A NAME="2143"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>When used with <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="2152"></A>, this will +add <TT>\numberline</TT><code>{}</code> in the final argument of +<TT>\addcontentsline</TT>. This will align the table of contents entry +with the numbered section titles. Note that this option has no +effect if the <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="2161"></A> option is omitted. If <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="2170"></A> is +used without <TT>numberline</TT><A NAME="2179"></A>, the title will be aligned with +the section numbers rather than the section titles. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="2188"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>Make a separate glossary for acronyms. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>section</TT><A NAME="2197"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>This is a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> option. Its +value should be the name of a sectional unit (e.g. chapter). +This will make the glossaries appear in the named sectional unit, +otherwise each glossary will appear in a chapter, if chapters +exists, otherwise in a section. Unnumbered sectional units will be used +by default. Example: +<PRE> +\usepackage[section=subsection]{glossaries} +</PRE> +You can omit the value if you want to use sections, i.e. <PRE> +\usepackage[section]{glossaries} +</PRE> +is equivalent to +<PRE> +\usepackage[section=section]{glossaries} +</PRE> +You can change this value later in the document using +<TT>\setglossarysection</TT><A NAME="2201"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>type</EM><TT>}</TT>. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>numberedsection</TT><A NAME="2209"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>The glossaries are placed in unnumbered sectional units by default, +but this can be changed using <TT>numberedsection</TT><A NAME="2218"></A>. This option can take +three possible values: <TT>false</TT><A NAME="2222"></A> (no +number, i.e. use starred form), <TT>nolabel</TT><A NAME="2224"></A> +(numbered, i.e. unstarred form, but not labelled) and +<TT>autolabel</TT><A NAME="2226"></A> (numbered with automatic +labelling). If <TT>numberedsection=autolabel</TT><A NAME="2235"></A> is used, each +glossary is given a label that matches the glossary type, so the +main (default) glossary is labelled <TT>main</TT>, the list of +acronyms is labelled <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="tex2html5" + HREF="#foot1670"><SUP>2</SUP></A> and additional glossaries are labelled +using the value specified in the first mandatory argument to +<TT>\newglossary</TT>. For example, if you load <TT>glossaries</TT> +using: +<PRE> +\usepackage[section,numberedsection=autolabel]{glossaries} +</PRE> +then each glossary will appear in a numbered section, and can +be referenced using something like: +<PRE> +The main glossary is in section~\ref{main} and the list of +acronyms is in section~\ref{acronym}. +</PRE> +If you can't decide whether to have the acronyms in the main +glossary or a separate list of acronyms, you can use +<TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="2247"></A> which is set to <TT>main</TT> if the +<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="2255"></A> option is not used and is set to <TT>acronym</TT> +if the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="2264"></A> option is used. For example: +<PRE> +The list of acronyms is in section~\ref{\acronymtype}. +</PRE> + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>style</TT><A NAME="2273"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>This is a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> option. Its +value should be the name of the glossary style to use. Predefined +glossary styles are listed <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:styles">later</A>. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="2282"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>This option will suppress the +associated number lists<A NAME="2285"></A> in the glossaries (see also +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:numberlists">Number Lists</A>.) + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>counter</TT><A NAME="2292"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>This is a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> option. The +value should be the name of the default counter to use in the number +lists<A NAME="2295"></A>. + +<P> +<A NAME="sanitize"></A> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>sanitize</TT><A NAME="2302"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>This is a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> option whose +value is also a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> list. By default, the +<TT>glossaries</TT> package sanitizes the values of the +<TT>name</TT><A NAME="2307"></A>, <TT>description</TT><A NAME="2310"></A> and <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="2313"></A> keys used +when defining a new glossary entry. This may lead to unexpected results +if you try to display these values within the document text. This +sanitization can be switched off using the <TT>sanitize</TT><A NAME="2321"></A> package +option. For example, to switch off the sanitization for the +<TT>description</TT><A NAME="2325"></A> and <TT>name</TT><A NAME="2328"></A> keys, but not for the +<TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="2331"></A> key, do: +<PRE> +\usepackage[sanitize={name=false,description=false,% +symbol=true}]{glossaries} +</PRE> + +<P> +<B>Note</B>: this sanitization only applies to the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="2334"></A>, +<TT>description</TT><A NAME="2337"></A> and <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="2340"></A> keys. It doesn't apply +to any of the other keys (except the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="2343"></A> key which is +always sanitized) so fragile commands contained in the value of +the other keys must always be protected using <TT>\protect</TT>. +Since the value of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="2346"></A> key is obtained from the +<TT>name</TT><A NAME="2349"></A> key, you will still need to protect fragile commands +in the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="2352"></A> key if you don't use the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="2355"></A> key. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>babel</TT><A NAME="2363"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>This is a boolean key and is for use when +the <TT>glossaries</TT> package is used in conjunction with the +<TT>babel</TT><A NAME="2368"></A> package. The default is <TT>babel=true</TT><A NAME="2378"></A>, which +adds the glossary translations to <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="2380"></A>'s captions. If +you don't like the translations provided by the <TT>glossaries</TT> +package, you can set <TT>babel=false</TT><A NAME="2391"></A> and provide your own +translations. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>description</TT><A NAME="2398"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>This option changes the definition of +<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="2402"></A> to allow a description. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A> +for further details. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="2410"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>This option changes the definition of +<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="2414"></A> and the way that acronyms are displayed. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A> +for further details. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="2422"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>This option changes the definition of +<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="2426"></A> and the way that acronyms are displayed. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A> +for further details. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>dua</TT><A NAME="2434"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>This option changes the definition of +<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="2438"></A> so that acronyms are always expanded. +See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A> +for further details. + +<P> +</DD> +</DL> +<P> +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> + +<P> + +<H2><A NAME="SECTION00042000000000000000"></A> +<A NAME="sec:newglosentry"></A> +<BR> +Defining Glossary Entries +</H2> + +<P> +All glossary entries that are used in a document must be defined in +the preamble. Only those entries that occur in the document +(using any of the commands described in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glslink">Links to Glossary Entries</A> and +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsadd">Adding an entry to the glossary without generating text</A>) will appear in the glossary. Each time an entry +is used in this way, a line is added to an associated glossary +(<TT>.glo</TT><A NAME="2444"></A>) file, which then needs to be converted into a +corresponding <TT>.gls</TT><A NAME="2446"></A> file which contains the typeset glossary +which is input by <TT>\printglossary</TT><A NAME="2448"></A> or +<TT>\printglossaries</TT><A NAME="2451"></A>. The Perl script <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2454"></A> +can be used to call <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2457"></A>, using a customised +<TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="2460"></A> style file, for each of the glossaries that are defined +in the document. Note that there should be no need for you to +explicitly edit or input any of these external files. + +<P> +The command <TT>\makeglossaries</TT> must be placed in the preamble in +order to create the customised <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2462"></A> <TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="2465"></A> +style file and to ensure that glossary entries are written to the +appropriate output file. If you omit <TT>\makeglossaries</TT> none of the +glossaries will be created. Note that if your page numbers use a +hyphen compositor, you must set this by redefining +<TT>\glscompositor</TT> <I>before</I> +using <TT>\makeglossaries</TT>: +<PRE> +\renewcommand*{\glscompositor}{-} +</PRE> +(The default value of <TT>\glscompositor</TT> is a full stop.) + +<P> +New glossary entries are defined using the command: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\newglossaryentry{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>key-val list</EM><TT>}</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +The first +argument, <I>label</I>, must be a unique label with which to identify +this entry. The second argument, <I>key-val list</I>, is a +<I>key</I>=<I>value</I> list that supplies the relevant information +about this entry. There are two required fields: <TT>name</TT><A NAME="2467"></A> and +<TT>description</TT><A NAME="2470"></A>. Available fields are listed below: + +<P> +<DL> +<DT><STRONG><TT>name</TT><A NAME="2473"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>The name of the entry (as it will appear in the +glossary). + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>description</TT><A NAME="2476"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>A brief description of this term (to +appear in the glossary). + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>text</TT><A NAME="2479"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>How this entry will appear in the document text +when using <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="2482"></A> (or one of its uppercase variants). If this +field is omitted, the value of the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="2485"></A> key is used. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>first</TT><A NAME="2488"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>How the entry will appear in the document text +the first time it is used with <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="2491"></A> (or one of its uppercase +variants). If this field is omitted, the value of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="2494"></A> +key is used. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>plural</TT><A NAME="2497"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>How the entry will appear in the document text +when using <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="2500"></A> (or one of its uppercase variants). +If this field is omitted, the value is obtained by appending an +"s" to the value of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="2503"></A> field. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="2506"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>How the entry will appear in the document +text the first time it is used with <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="2509"></A> (or one of +its uppercase variants). If this field is omitted, the value is +obtained by appending an "s" to the value of the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="2512"></A> +field. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="2515"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>This field is provided to allow the user to +specify an associated symbol, but most glossary styles ignore +this value. If omitted, the value is set to <TT>\relax</TT>. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>sort</TT><A NAME="2518"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>This value indicates how <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2521"></A> +should sort this entry. If omitted, the value is given by the +<TT>name</TT><A NAME="2524"></A> field. This value is equivalent to +<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2527"></A>'s "actual" character (which is usually the +at-sign @ although the <TT>glossaries</TT> package uses a different +symbol). + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>type</TT><A NAME="2531"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>This is the glossary type to which this entry +belongs. If omitted, the default glossary is assumed +(<TT>type=main</TT>). The list of acronyms type is given by +<TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="2534"></A> which will either be <TT>main</TT> or +<TT>acronym</TT>, depending on whether the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="2542"></A> package +option was used. +</DD> +</DL> +Note that if the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="2546"></A> key (or the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="2549"></A> key, if the +<TT>text</TT><A NAME="2552"></A> key is omitted) starts with an accented letter, +you must group the accented letter, otherwise it will cause a +problem for <TT>\Gls</TT> and <TT>\Glspl</TT>. For example: +<PRE> +\newglossaryentry{elite}{name={{\'e}lite}, +description={select group or class}} +</PRE> +(Likewise for the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="2555"></A>, <TT>first</TT><A NAME="2558"></A> and +<TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="2561"></A> keys.) + +<P> +You can store all your glossary entry definitions in another +file, and use: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\loadglsentries[</TT><EM>type</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>filename</EM><TT>}</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +where <I>filename</I> is the name of the file containing all the +<TT>\newglossaryentry</TT> commands. The optional argument +<I>type</I> is the name of the glossary to which those entries +should belong, for those entries where the <TT>type</TT><A NAME="2564"></A> key has +been omitted. Note that only those entries that have been used +in the text will appear in the relevant glossaries. +<P> +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> + +<P> + +<H2><A NAME="SECTION00043000000000000000"></A> +<A NAME="sec:numberlists"></A> +<BR> +Number lists +</H2> + +<P> +Each entry in the glossary has an associated <I>number list</I><A NAME="2570"></A>. +By default, +these numbers refer to the pages on which that entry has been used +(using any of the commands described in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glslink">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +and <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsadd">Adding an entry to the glossary without generating text</A>). The number list can be suppressed using +the <TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="2577"></A> package option, or an alternative counter +can be set as the default using the <TT>counter</TT><A NAME="2586"></A> package option. +<P> +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> + +<P> + +<H2><A NAME="SECTION00044000000000000000"></A> +<A NAME="sec:glslink"></A> +<BR> +Links to Glossary Entries +</H2> + +<P> +Once you have defined a glossary entry using +<TT>\newglossaryentry</TT><A NAME="2593"></A>, you can refer to that entry in the +document using one of the commands listed in this section. The +text which appears at that point in the document when using +one of these commands is referred to as the +<I>link text</I><A NAME="2596"></A> (even if there are no hyperlinks). + +<P> +The way the link text<A NAME="2597"></A> is displayed +depends on <TT>\glstextformat{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}</TT>. +For example, to make all link text<A NAME="2598"></A> appear in a sans-serif +font, do: +<PRE> +\renewcommand*{\glstextformat}[1]{\textsf{#1}} +</PRE> + +<P> +The command: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\glslink[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +will place <I>text</I> in the document at that point and add +a line into the associated glossary file for the glossary entry +given by <I>label</I>. If hyperlinks are supported, <I>text</I> +will be a hyperlink to the relevant line in the glossary. The +optional argument <I>options</I> must be a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> +list which can take any of the following keys: + +<P> +<DL> +<DT><STRONG><TT>format</TT><A NAME="2600"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>This specifies how to format the +associated number for this entry in the glossary. This value is +equivalent to the <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2603"></A> encap value, and (as with +<TT>\index</TT>) the value needs to be the name of a command <I>without</I> +the initial backslash. As with <TT>\index</TT>, the characters <code>(</code> and +<code>)</code> can also be used to specify the beginning and ending of a +number range. Again as with <TT>\index</TT>, the command should be the name +of a command which takes an argument (which will be the associated +number). Be careful not to use a declaration (such as <TT>\bfseries</TT>) +instead of a text block command (such as <TT>\textbf</TT>) as the effect is +not guaranteed to be localised. If you want to apply more than one +style to a given entry (e.g. <B>bold</B> and <I>italic</I>) you will +need to create a command that applies both formats, e.g. +<PRE> +\newcommand*{\textbfem}[1]{\textbf{\emph{#1}}} +</PRE> +and use that command. + +<P> +If you are using hyperlinks and you want to change the font of the +hyperlink, don't use <TT>\hyperpage</TT> (provided by the <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="2606"></A> +package) as the numbers may not refer to a page number. +Instead, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package provides the following +number formats: +<DIV ALIGN="CENTER"> +<TABLE CELLPADDING=3> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hyperrm</TT></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT">The number is a serif hyperlink to the relevant part of the +document</TD> +</TR> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hypersf</TT></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT">The number is a sans-serif hyperlink to the relevant part +of the document</TD> +</TR> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hypertt</TT></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT">The number is a monospaced hyperlink to the relevant part +of the document</TD> +</TR> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hyperbf</TT></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT">The number is a bold hyperlink to the relevant part of the +document</TD> +</TR> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hypermd</TT></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT">The number is a medium weight hyperlink to the relevant +part of the document</TD> +</TR> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hyperit</TT></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT">The number is an italic hyperlink to the relevant +part of the document</TD> +</TR> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hypersl</TT></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT">The number is a slanted hyperlink to the relevant +part of the document</TD> +</TR> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hyperup</TT></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT">The number is an upright hyperlink to the relevant +part of the document</TD> +</TR> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hypersc</TT></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT">The number is a small caps hyperlink to the relevant +part of the document</TD> +</TR> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hyperemph</TT></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT">The number is an emphasized hyperlink to the relevant +part of the document</TD> +</TR> +</TABLE> + +</DIV> +Note that if the <TT>\hyperlink</TT> command hasn't been defined, +the <TT>hyper</TT><I>xx</I> formats are equivalent to the +analogous <TT>\text</TT><I>xx</I> font commands. If you want to +make a new format, you will need to define a command which takes +one argument and use that; for example, if you want the associated +number in the glossary to be in a bold sans-serif font, you can define a +command called, say, <TT>\hyperbsf</TT>: +<PRE> +\newcommand{\hyperbsf}[1]{\textbf{\hypersf{#1}}} +</PRE> +and then use <TT>hyperbsf</TT> as the value for the <TT>format</TT><A NAME="2610"></A> +key. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>counter</TT><A NAME="2613"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>This specifies which counter +to use for the associated number for this glossary entry. (See also +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:numberlists">Number Lists</A>.) + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>hyper</TT><A NAME="2616"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>This is a boolean key which can +be used to enable/disable the hyperlink to the relevant entry +in the glossary. (Note that setting <TT>hyper=true</TT> will have no +effect if <TT>\hyperlink</TT> has not been defined.) The default +value is <TT>hyper=true</TT>. + +<P> +</DD> +</DL> + +There is also a starred version: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\glslink*[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +which is equivalent to <TT>\glslink</TT>, except it sets +<TT>hyper=false</TT>. + +<P> +The command: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\gls[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +is the same as <TT>\glslink</TT>, except that the link text<A NAME="2618"></A> +is determined from the values of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="2620"></A> and +<TT>first</TT><A NAME="2623"></A> keys supplied when the entry was defined using +<TT>\newglossaryentry</TT><A NAME="2626"></A>. There are two uppercase variants: +<BR> +<BR> +<TT>\Gls[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +and +<BR> +<BR> +<TT>\GLS[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +which make the first letter of the link or all the link text +uppercase, respectively. + +<P> +The final optional argument <I>insert</I>, allows you to insert +some additional text into the link text. By default, this will +append <I>insert</I> at the end of the link text. The first optional +argument <I>options</I> is the same as the optional argument to +<TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="2629"></A>. As with <TT>\glslink</TT>, these commands also have +a starred version that disable the hyperlink. + +<P> +There are also analogous plural forms: +<BR> +<BR> +<TT>\glspl[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +<TT>\Glspl[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +<TT>\GLSpl[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +These determine the link text from the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="2632"></A> and +<TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="2635"></A> keys supplied when the entry was first +defined. As before, these commands also have +a starred version that disable the hyperlink. + +<P> +The command: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\glstext[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +is similar to <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="2638"></A> except that it always uses the value +of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="2641"></A> key and does not mark the entry as +having been used. + +<P> +There are also analogous commands: +<BR> +<BR> +<TT>\Glstext[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +<TT>\GLStext[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable +the hyperlink. + +<P> +The command: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\glsfirst[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +is similar to <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="2644"></A> except that it always uses the value +of the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="2647"></A> key and does not mark the entry as +having been used. + +<P> +There are also analogous commands: +<BR> +<BR> +<TT>\Glsfirst[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +<TT>\GLSfirst[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable +the hyperlink. + +<P> +The command: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\glsplural[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +is similar to <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="2650"></A> except that it always uses the value +of the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="2653"></A> key and does not mark the entry as +having been used. + +<P> +There are also analogous commands: +<BR> +<BR> +<TT>\Glsplural[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +<TT>\GLSplural[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable +the hyperlink. + +<P> +The command: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\glsfirstplural[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +is similar to <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="2656"></A> except that it always uses the value +of the <TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="2659"></A> key and does not mark the entry as +having been used. + +<P> +There are also analogous commands: +<BR> +<BR> +<TT>\Glsfirstplural[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +<TT>\GLSfirstplural[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable +the hyperlink. + +<P> +The command: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\glsname[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +is similar to <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="2662"></A> except that it always uses the value +of the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="2665"></A> key and does not mark the entry as +having been used. Note: if you want to use this command and the +<TT>name</TT><A NAME="2668"></A> key contains commands, you will have to disable the +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sanitize">sanitization</A> +of the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="2671"></A> key and protect fragile commands. + +<P> +There are also analogous commands: +<BR> +<BR> +<TT>\Glsname[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +<TT>\GLSname[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable +the hyperlink. + +<P> +The command: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\glssymbol[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +is similar to <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="2674"></A> except that it always uses the value +of the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="2677"></A> key and does not mark the entry as +having been used. Note: if you want to use this command and the +<TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="2680"></A> key contains commands, you will have to disable the +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sanitize">sanitization</A> +of the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="2683"></A> key and protect fragile commands. + +<P> +There are also analogous commands: +<BR> +<BR> +<TT>\Glssymbol[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +<TT>\GLSsymbol[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable +the hyperlink. + +<P> +The command: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\glsdesc[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +is similar to <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="2686"></A> except that it always uses the value +of the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="2689"></A> key and does not mark the entry as +having been used. Note: if you want to use this command and the +<TT>description</TT><A NAME="2692"></A> key contains commands, you will have to disable the +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sanitize">sanitization</A> +of the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="2695"></A> key and protect fragile commands. + +<P> +There are also analogous commands: +<BR> +<BR> +<TT>\Glsdesc[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +<TT>\GLSdesc[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable +the hyperlink. + +<P> + +<P> +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> + +<P> + +<H3><A NAME="SECTION00044100000000000000"></A> +<A NAME="sec:glsdisplay"></A> +<BR> +Changing the format of the link text +</H3> + +<P> +The format of the link text<A NAME="2700"></A> for <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="2702"></A>, <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="2705"></A> +and their uppercase variants is governed by two commands: +<TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT>, which is used the +first time a glossary entry is used in the text and +<TT>\glsdisplay</TT>, which is used subsequently. +Both commands take four arguments: the first is either the singular or +plural form given by the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="2708"></A>, <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="2711"></A>, +<TT>first</TT><A NAME="2714"></A> or <TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="2717"></A> keys (used when the term was +defined) depending on context; the second argument is the term's +description (as supplied by the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="2720"></A> key); the third +argument is the symbol associated with the term (as supplied by the +<TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="2723"></A> key) and the fourth argument is the additional text +supplied in the final optional argument to <TT>\gls</TT> or +<TT>\glspl</TT> (or their uppercase variants). The default definitions +of <TT>\glsdisplay</TT> and <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT> simply +print the first argument immediately followed by the fourth argument. +The remaining arguments are ignored. + +<P> +For example, suppose you want a glossary of measurements and +units, you can use the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="2726"></A> key to store the unit: +<PRE> +\newglossaryentry{distance}{name=distance, +description={The length between two points}, +symbol={km}} +</PRE> +and now suppose you want <code>\gls{distance}</code> to produce +"distance (km)" on first use, then you can redefine +<TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT> as follows: +<PRE> +\renewcommand{\glsdisplayfirst}[4]{#1#4 (#3)} +</PRE> +Note that the additional text is placed after <code>#1</code>, so +<code>\gls{distance}['s]</code> will produce "distance's (km)" +rather than "distance (km)'s" which looks a bit odd (even though +it may be in the context of "the distance (km) is measured between +the two points" -- but in this instance it may be better not to +use a contraction). + +<P> +Note also that all of the link text<A NAME="2728"></A> will be formatted according +to <TT>\glstextformat</TT><A NAME="2730"></A> (described earlier). So if you do, say: +<PRE> +\renewcommand{\glstextformat}[1]{\textbf{#1}} +\renewcommand{\glsdisplayfirst}[4]{#1#4 (#3)} +</PRE> +then <code>\gls{distance}</code> will produce "<B>distance (km)</B>". + +<P> +If you have multiple glossaries, changing <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT> and +<TT>\glsdisplay</TT> will change the way entries for all of the +glossaries appear when using commands <TT>\gls</TT>, <TT>\glspl</TT> and their +uppercase variants. If you only +want the change to affect entries for a given glossary, then you need +to use <TT>\defglsdisplay</TT> and +<TT>\defglsdisplayfirst</TT> instead +of redefining <TT>\glsdisplay</TT> and <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT>. + +<P> +Both <TT>\defglsdisplay</TT> and <TT>\defglsdisplayfirst</TT> take two arguments: +the first (which is optional) is the glossary name<A NAME="tex2html6" + HREF="#foot1718"><SUP>3</SUP></A> and the second is how the term should be +displayed when it is invoked using commands <TT>\gls</TT>, +<TT>\glspl</TT> and their uppercase variants. This is similar to the way <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT> was +redefined above. + +<P> +For example, suppose you have created a new glossary called +<TT>notation</TT> and you want to change the way the entry is +displayed on first use so that it includes the symbol, you can +do: +<PRE> +\defglsdisplayfirst[notation]{#1#4 (denoted #3)} +</PRE> +Now suppose you have defined an entry as follows: +<PRE> +\newglossaryentry{set}{type=notation, +name=set, +description={A collection of objects}, +symbol={$S$}, +} +</PRE> +The first time you reference this entry using <TT>\gls</TT> it +will be displayed as: "set (denoted <I>S</I>)" +(similarly for <TT>\glspl</TT> and the uppercase variants). + +<P> +Remember that if you use the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="2737"></A> key, you need to use a +glossary style that displays the symbol, as many of the styles ignore +it. In addition, if you want either the description or symbol to appear +in the link text<A NAME="2739"></A>, you will have to disable the +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sanitize">sanitization</A> +of these keys and protect fragile commands. +<P> +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> + +<P> + +<H3><A NAME="SECTION00044200000000000000"> +Enabling and disabling hyperlinks to glossary entries</A> +</H3> + +<P> +If you load the <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="2744"></A> or <TT>html</TT><A NAME="2747"></A> packages prior to +loading the <TT>glossaries</TT> package, commands such as <TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="2751"></A> +and <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="2754"></A>, described above, will automatically have hyperlinks +to the relevant glossary entry, unless the <TT>hyper</TT><A NAME="2757"></A> +option has been set to <TT>false</TT>. You can disable or enable links using: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\glsdisablehyper</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +and +<BR> +<BR><TT>\glsenablehyper</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +respectively. The effect can be localised by placing the commands +within a group. Note that you should only use <TT>\glsenablehyper</TT> +if the commands <TT>\hyperlink</TT><A NAME="2760"></A> and <TT>\hypertarget</TT><A NAME="2763"></A> have been +defined (for example, by the <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="2766"></A> package). + +<P> + +<H2><A NAME="SECTION00045000000000000000"></A> +<A NAME="sec:glsadd"></A> +<BR> +Adding an entry to the glossary without generating text +</H2> + +<P> +It is possible to add a line in the glossary file without +generating any text at that point in the document using: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\glsadd[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +This is similar to <TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="2769"></A>, only it doesn't produce +any text (so therefore, there is no <TT>hyper</TT><A NAME="2772"></A> key +available in <I>options</I> but all the other options that can +be used with <TT>\glslink</TT> can be passed to <TT>\glsadd</TT>). + +<P> +To add all entries that have been defined, use: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\glsaddall[</TT><EM>glossary list</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +If there are multiple glossaries, you can specify to add only +those entries which belong to the glossaries listed in +<I>glossary list</I> (which must be a comma separated list of +glossary names). For example: +<PRE> +\glsaddall[notation] +</PRE> +will add all the entries that have been defined for the glossary +labelled "notation". +<P> +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> + +<P> + +<H2><A NAME="SECTION00046000000000000000"> +Displaying a glossary</A> +</H2> + +<P> +The command <TT>\printglossaries</TT> will display all the +defined glossaries. Note that no glossaries will appear until +you have either used the Perl script <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2778"></A> +or have directly used <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2781"></A> (as described in +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:makeglossaries">Generating the Associated Glossary Files</A>). If the glossary still +does not appear after you re-LaTeX your document, check +the <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2784"></A> log files to see if there is a problem. +Remember that you also need to use the command <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2787"></A> in +the preamble to enable the glossaries. + +<P> +An individual glossary is displayed using: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\printglossary[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +where <I>options</I> is a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> list of options. +The following keys are available: +<DL> +<DT><STRONG><TT>type</TT><A NAME="2790"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>The value of this key +specifies which glossary to print. If omitted, the default +glossary is assumed. For example, to print the list of acronyms: +<PRE> +\printglossary[type=\acronymtype] +</PRE> + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>title</TT><A NAME="2793"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>This is the glossary's +title (overriding the title specified when the glossary was +defined). + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>toctitle</TT><A NAME="2796"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>This is the title +to use for the table of contents (if the <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="2804"></A> package +option has been used). If omitted, the glossary title is used. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>style</TT><A NAME="2808"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>This specifies which +glossary style to use for this glossary, overriding the effect +of the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="2816"></A> option or <TT>\glossarystyle</TT><A NAME="2820"></A>. +</DD> +</DL> + +<P> +Information can be added to the start of the glossary by redefining +<TT>\glossarypreamble</TT>. For example: +<PRE> +\renewcommand{\glossarypreamble}{Numbers in italic indicate +primary definitions.} +</PRE> +This needs to be done before the glossary is displayed using +<TT>\printglossaries</TT> or <TT>\printglossary</TT>. Note that if you +want a different preamble for each glossary, you will need to +use a separate <TT>\printglossary</TT> for each glossary and change +the definition of <TT>\glossarypreamble</TT> between each glossary. +For example: +<PRE> +\renewcommand{\glossarypreamble}{Numbers in italic indicate +primary definitions.} +\printglossary +\renewcommand{\glossarypreamble}{} +\printglossary[type=acronym] +</PRE> +Alternatively, you can do something like: +<PRE> +\renewcommand{\glossarypreamble}{Numbers in italic indicate +primary definitions.\gdef\glossarypreamble{}} +\printglossaries +</PRE> +which will print the preamble text for the first glossary and +change the preamble to do nothing for subsequent glossaries. +(Note that <TT>\gdef</TT> is required as the glossary is placed within +a group.) + +<P> +There is an analogous command +called <TT>\glossarypostamble</TT> which is placed at the end of each +glossary. +<P> +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> + +<P> + +<H3><A NAME="SECTION00046100000000000000"></A> +<A NAME="sec:glsnamefont"></A> +<BR> +Changing the way the entry name appears in the glossary +</H3> + +<P> +Within each glossary, each entry name is +formatted according to <TT>\glsnamefont</TT> which takes one argument: the +entry name. This command is always used regardless of the glossary +style. By default, <TT>\glsnamefont</TT> simply displays its argument in +whatever the surrounding font happens to be. This means that in the +list styles the name will appear in bold, since the name is placed in +the optional argument of <TT>\item</TT>, whereas in the tabular styles the +name will appear in the normal font. + +<P> +For example, suppose you want all the entry names to appear in +medium weight small caps, then you can do: +<PRE> +\renewcommand{\glsnamefont}[1]{\textsc{\mdseries #1}} +</PRE> + +<P> +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> + +<P> + +<H2><A NAME="SECTION00047000000000000000"> +Defining New Glossaries</A> +</H2> + +<P> +A new glossary can be defined using: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\newglossary[</TT><EM>log-ext</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>name</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>in-ext</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>out-ext</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>title</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>counter</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +where <I>name</I> is label to assign to this glossary. The arguments +<I>in-ext</I> and <I>out-ext</I> specify the extensions to give to the +input and output files for that glossary, <I>title</I> is the default +title for this new glossary and the final optional argument +<I>counter</I> specifies which counter to use for the associated number +lists<A NAME="2828"></A> (see also <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:numberlists">Number Lists</A>.) The +first optional argument specifies the extension for the +<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2830"></A> transcript file (this information is only used by +<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2833"></A> which picks up the information from the +auxiliary file.) + +<P> +Note that the main (default) glossary is automatically created as: +<PRE> +\newglossary{main}{gls}{glo}{\glossaryname} +</PRE> +so it can be identified by the label <TT>main</TT>. Using the +<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="2841"></A> package option is equivalent to: +<PRE> +\newglossary[alg]{acronym}{acr}{acn}{\acronymname} +</PRE> +so it can be identified by the label <TT>acronym</TT>. If you are +not sure whether the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="2850"></A> option has been used, you +can identify the list of acronyms by the command +<TT>\acronymtype</TT> which is set to +<TT>acronym</TT>, if the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="2859"></A> option has been used, +otherwise it is set to <TT>main</TT>. +<P> +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> + +<P> + +<H2><A NAME="SECTION00048000000000000000"></A> +<A NAME="sec:acronyms"></A> +<BR> +Acronyms +</H2> + +<P> +As you may have noticed in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:newglosentry">Defining Glossary Entries</A>, when you +specify a new entry, you can specify alternate text to use when +the term is first used in the document. This provides a useful +means to define acronyms. The <TT>glossaries</TT> package defines +the command: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\newacronym[</TT><EM>key-val list</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>long</EM><TT>}</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +This is equivalent to: +<P> +<TT> +<TT>\newglossaryentry</TT></TT> <TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{type=<TT>\acronymtype</TT>, +<BR> +name=</TT> <TT>{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}, +<BR> +description=</TT> <TT>{</TT><EM>long</EM><TT>}, +<BR> +text=</TT> <TT>{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}, +<BR> +first={</TT> <I>long</I><TT> (</TT> <I>abbrv</I><TT>)}, +<BR> +plural={</TT> <I>abbrv</I><TT>s}, +<BR> +firstplural={</TT> <I>long</I><TT>s (</TT> <I>abbrv</I><TT>s)}, +<BR></TT> <I>key-val list</I><TT>}</TT> +<P> +As mentioned in the previous section, the command <TT>\acronymtype</TT> is +the name of the glossary in which the acronyms should appear. If the +<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="2872"></A> package option has been used, this will be +<TT>acronym</TT>, otherwise it will be <TT>main</TT>. The acronyms can +then be used in exactly the same way as any other glossary entry. +For example, the following defines the acronym IDN: +<PRE> +\newacronym{idn}{IDN}{identification number} +</PRE> +This is equivalent to: +<PRE> +\newglossaryentry{idn}{type=\acronymtype, +name={IDN}, +description={identification number}, +text={IDN}, +first={identification number (IDN)}, +plural={IDNs}, +firstplural={identification numbers (IDNs)}} +</PRE> +so <code>\gls{idn}</code> will produce "identification number (IDN)" on +first use and "IDN" on subsequent uses. + +<P> +The <TT>glossaries</TT> package has options that change the +definition of <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="2877"></A> for common acronym formats. These +options also change the way the link text is displayed for the +acronyms. + +<P> +Table <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:acronymsettings">1</A> lists the package options and +how the keys are used to store <I>long</I> (the long form) and +<I>abbrv</I> (the short form). Note that the <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="2885"></A> +option redefines <TT>\acronymfont</TT><A NAME="2889"></A> so that it sets its argument +in small captials otherwise <TT>\acronymfont</TT> simply displays its +argument in the surrounding font. Note also that if none of +the package options <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="2897"></A>, <TT>description</TT><A NAME="2906"></A> +or <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="2915"></A> are used, <TT>\acronymfont</TT> is not used, so +changing the definition of <TT>\acronymfont</TT> will have no effect +under such circumstances. + +<P> +<BR><P></P> +<DIV ALIGN="CENTER"> + +<A NAME="tab:acronymsettings"></A> +<DIV ALIGN="CENTER"> +<A NAME="1161"></A> +<TABLE CELLPADDING=3> +<CAPTION><STRONG>Table 1:</STRONG> +Package options governing acronyms and how the information +is stored in the glossary keys</CAPTION> +<TR><TH ALIGN="LEFT"><B>Package Option </B></TH> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>first</TT><A NAME="2919"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>text</TT><A NAME="2922"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>description</TT><A NAME="2925"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="2928"></A></TD> +</TR> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>description</TT><A NAME="2936"></A>,<TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="2945"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT">user supplied</TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> +</TR> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>description</TT><A NAME="2954"></A>,<TT>dua</TT><A NAME="2963"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT">user supplied</TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> +</TR> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>description</TT><A NAME="2972"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT">user supplied</TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> +</TR> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="2981"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD> +</TR> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="2990"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> +</TR> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>dua</TT><A NAME="2999"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> +</TR> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT">None of the above</TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I> (<I>abbrv</I>)</TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD> +</TR> +</TABLE> +</DIV> +</DIV> +<BR> + +<P> +Each of the package options <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="3008"></A>, <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="3017"></A> +and <TT>description</TT><A NAME="3026"></A> use <TT>\defglsdisplay</TT><A NAME="3030"></A> and +<TT>\defglsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="3033"></A> (described <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsdisplay">earlier</A>) +to change the way the link text is displayed. + +<P> +<DL> +<DT><STRONG><TT>description</TT><A NAME="3041"></A>,<TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="3050"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD> +When these two options are used together, the first use displays +the entry as: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\acronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT><I>insert</I><TT>\footnote{</TT><EM>long</EM><TT>}</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +while subsequent use displays the entry as: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\acronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT><I>insert</I> +<BR> +<BR> +where <I>insert</I> indicates the text supplied in the final +optional argument to <TT>\gls</TT>, <TT>\glspl</TT> or their uppercase +variants. + +<P> +Note also that when these two package options are used (in the +given order), the <TT>glossaries</TT> package additionally implements the +<TT>sanitize</TT><A NAME="3060"></A> option using +<A NAME="3069"></A><A NAME="3076"></A><code>sanitize={description=false,symbol=false}</code>, so +remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>dua</STRONG></DT> +<DD> +The <TT>dua</TT><A NAME="3083"></A> package option always displays the expanded +form and so may not be used with <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="3092"></A> or +<TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="3101"></A>. Both first use and subsequent use displays the +entry in the form: +<BR> +<BR><I>long</I><I>insert</I> +<BR> +<BR> +If the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="3110"></A> option is also used, the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="3114"></A> +key is set to the long form, otherwise the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="3117"></A> key is +set to the short form and the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="3120"></A> key is set to +the long form. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>description</TT><A NAME="3128"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD> +This option displays the entry on first use as: +<BR> +<BR><I>long</I><I>insert</I> (<TT>\acronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT>) +<BR> +<BR> +while subsequent use displays the entry as: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\acronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT><I>insert</I> +<BR> +<BR> +Note also that if this package option is used, the <TT>glossaries</TT> +package additionally implements the option +<A NAME="3138"></A><code>sanitize={symbol=false}</code>, so +remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="3145"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD> +This option displays the entry on first use as: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\acronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT><I>insert</I><TT>\footnote{</TT><EM>long</EM><TT>}</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +while subsequent use displays the entry as: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\acronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT><I>insert</I> + +<P> +Note also that if this package option is used, the <TT>glossaries</TT> +package additionally implements the option +<A NAME="3155"></A><code>sanitize={description=false}</code>, so +remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="3162"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD> +If neither the <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="3171"></A> nor <TT>description</TT><A NAME="3180"></A> options +have been set, this option displays the entry on first use as: +<BR> +<BR><I>long</I><I>insert</I> (<TT>\acronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT>) +<BR> +<BR> +while subsequent use displays the entry as: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\acronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT><I>insert</I> +<BR> +<BR> +where <TT>\acronymfont</TT> is set to <TT>\textsc</TT>. + +<P> +Note also that if this package option is used, the <TT>glossaries</TT> +package additionally implements the option +<A NAME="3190"></A><code>sanitize={symbol=false}</code>, so +remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>None of the above</STRONG></DT> +<DD> +If none of the package options <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="3197"></A>, <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="3206"></A> +or <TT>description</TT><A NAME="3215"></A> are used, then on first use the entry is +displayed as: +<BR> +<BR><I>long</I> (<I>abbrv</I>)<I>insert</I> +<BR> +<BR> +while subsequent use displays the entry as: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\acronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT><I>insert</I> +<BR> +<BR><I>abbrv</I><I>insert</I> +</DD> +</DL> + +<P> +Recall from <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glslink">earlier</A> +that you can access the values of individual keys using commands +like <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="3219"></A>, so it is possible to use these commands to +print just the long form or just the abbreviation without affecting +the flag that determines whether the entry has been used. However +the keys that store the long and short form vary depending on +the acronym style, so the <TT>glossaries</TT> package provides +commands that are set according to the package options. These are +as follows: +<BR> +<BR> +<P> + +<TT>\acrshort[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<TT>\ACRshort[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<TT>\ACRshort[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +Print the abbreviated version with a hyperlink (if necessary) to the +relevant entry in the glossary. This is usually equivalent to +<TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="3223"></A> (or its uppercase variants) but may additionally +put the link text within the argument to <TT>\acronymfont</TT><A NAME="3226"></A>. +<BR> +<BR> +<P> + +<TT>\acrlong[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<TT>\ACRlong[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<TT>\ACRlong[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +Print the long version with a hyperlink (if necessary) to the +relevant entry in the glossary. This is may be equivalent to +<TT>\glsdesc</TT><A NAME="3229"></A>, <TT>\glssymbol</TT><A NAME="3232"></A> or <TT>\glsfirst</TT><A NAME="3235"></A> (or their uppercase +variants), depending on package options. +<BR> +<BR> +<P> + +<TT>\acrfull[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<TT>\ACRfull[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<TT>\ACRfull[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +Print the long version followed by the abbreviation in brackets +with a hyperlink (if necessary) to the +relevant entry in the glossary. + +<P> +Note that if you change the definition of <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="3238"></A>, you +may additionally need to change the above commands as well as +the changing way the text is displayed using <TT>\defglsdisplay</TT><A NAME="3241"></A> +and <TT>\defglsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="3244"></A>. + +<P> + +<P> +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> + +<P> + +<H2><A NAME="SECTION00049000000000000000"> +Unsetting and resetting entry flags</A> +</H2> + +<P> +When using commands such as <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="3250"></A> it is possible that you may want +to use the value given by the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="3253"></A> key, even though you have +already used the glossary entry. Conversely, you may want to use the +value given by the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="3256"></A> key, even though you haven't used the +glossary entry. The former can be achieved by one of the following +commands: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\glsreset{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> +<BR><TT>\glslocalreset{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +while the latter can be achieved by one of the following commands: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\glsunset{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> +<BR><TT>\glslocalunset{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +You can determine whether an entry has been used using: +<BR> +<BR> +<TT>\ifglsused{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>true part</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>false part</EM><TT>}</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +where <I>label</I> is the label of the required entry. If the +entry has been used, <I>true part</I> will be done, otherwise +<I>false part</I> will be done. + +<P> +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> + +<P> + +<H2><A NAME="SECTION000410000000000000000"></A> +<A NAME="sec:styles"></A> +<BR> +Glossary Styles +</H2> +The <TT>glossaries</TT> package comes with some pre-defined +glossary styles. These are as follows: +<DL> +<DT><STRONG>list</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>list</TT><A NAME="3263"></A> style uses the <TT>description</TT> +environment. The entry name is placed in the optional argument +of the <TT>\item</TT> command (so it will appear in bold by +default). The description follows, and then the associated number +list for that entry. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>listgroup</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>listgroup</TT><A NAME="3266"></A> style is like +<TT>list</TT><A NAME="3268"></A> but the glossary groups have headings. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>listhypergroup</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="3270"></A> style is like +<TT>listgroup</TT><A NAME="3272"></A> but has a set of links to the glossary +groups. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>altlist</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>altlist</TT><A NAME="3274"></A> style is like <TT>list</TT><A NAME="3276"></A> +but the description is placed on the following line. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>altlistgroup</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>altlistgroup</TT><A NAME="3278"></A> style is like +<TT>altlist</TT><A NAME="3280"></A> but the glossary groups have headings. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>altlisthypergroup</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>altlisthypergroup</TT><A NAME="3282"></A> style is like +<TT>altlistgroup</TT><A NAME="3284"></A> but has a set of links to the glossary +groups. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>listdotted</STRONG></DT> +<DD>This style uses the <TT>description</TT> +environment. Each entry starts with <code>\item[]</code>, followed by the +name followed by a dotted line, followed by the description. Note that +this style ignores both the number list<A NAME="3286"></A> and the symbol. The +length <TT>\glslistdottedwidth</TT> +governs where the description should start.<A NAME="tex2html8" + HREF="#foot1409"><SUP>4</SUP></A> +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>long</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>long</TT><A NAME="3288"></A> style uses the <TT>longtable</TT> +environment (defined by the <TT>longtable</TT><A NAME="3291"></A> package). It has two +columns: the first column contains the entry's name and the second +column contains the description followed by the number list<A NAME="3293"></A>. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>longborder</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>longborder</TT><A NAME="3295"></A> style is like +<TT>long</TT><A NAME="3297"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>longheader</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>longheader</TT><A NAME="3299"></A> style is like +<TT>long</TT><A NAME="3301"></A> but has a header row. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>longheaderborder</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>longheaderborder</TT><A NAME="3303"></A> style is +like <TT>longheader</TT><A NAME="3305"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines +around it. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>long3col</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="3307"></A> style is like +<TT>long</TT><A NAME="3309"></A> but has three columns. The first column contains +the entry's name, the second column contains the description +and the third column contains the number list<A NAME="3310"></A>. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>long3colborder</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>long3colborder</TT><A NAME="3312"></A> style is like +the <TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="3314"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical +lines around it. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>long3colheader</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>long3colheader</TT><A NAME="3316"></A> style is like +<TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="3318"></A> but has a header row. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>long3colheaderborder</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>long3colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="3320"></A> style is +like <TT>long3colheader</TT><A NAME="3322"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines +around it. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>long4col</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="3324"></A> style is like +<TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="3326"></A> but has an additional column in which the +entry's associated symbol appears. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>long4colborder</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>long4colborder</TT><A NAME="3328"></A> style is like +the <TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="3330"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical +lines around it. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>long4colheader</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>long4colheader</TT><A NAME="3332"></A> style is like +<TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="3334"></A> but has a header row. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>long4colheaderborder</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>long4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="3336"></A> style is +like <TT>long4colheader</TT><A NAME="3338"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines +around it. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>super</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>super</TT><A NAME="3340"></A> style uses the <TT>supertabular</TT> +environment (defined by the <TT>supertabular</TT><A NAME="3343"></A> package). It has two +columns: the first column contains the entry's name and the second +column contains the description followed by the number list<A NAME="3345"></A>. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>superborder</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>superborder</TT><A NAME="3347"></A> style is like +<TT>super</TT><A NAME="3349"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>superheader</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>superheader</TT><A NAME="3351"></A> style is like +<TT>super</TT><A NAME="3353"></A> but has a header row. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>superheaderborder</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>superheaderborder</TT><A NAME="3355"></A> style is +like <TT>superheader</TT><A NAME="3357"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines +around it. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>super3col</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>super3col</TT><A NAME="3359"></A> style is like +<TT>super</TT><A NAME="3361"></A> but has three columns. The first column contains +the entry's name, the second column contains the description +and the third column contains the <A NAME="3362"></A>. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>super3colborder</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>super3colborder</TT><A NAME="3364"></A> style is like +the <TT>super3col</TT><A NAME="3366"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical +lines around it. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>super3colheader</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>super3colheader</TT><A NAME="3368"></A> style is like +<TT>super3col</TT><A NAME="3370"></A> but has a header row. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>super3colheaderborder</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>super3colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="3372"></A> style +is like <TT>super3colheader</TT><A NAME="3374"></A> but has horizontal and vertical +lines around it. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>super4col</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="3376"></A> style is like +<TT>super3col</TT><A NAME="3378"></A> but has an additional column in which the +entry's associated symbol appears. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>super4colborder</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>super4colborder</TT><A NAME="3380"></A> style is like +the <TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="3382"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical +lines around it. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>super4colheader</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>super4colheader</TT><A NAME="3384"></A> style is like +<TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="3386"></A> but has a header row. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG>super4colheaderborder</STRONG></DT> +<DD>The <TT>super4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="3388"></A> style +is like <TT>super4colheader</TT><A NAME="3390"></A> but has horizontal and vertical +lines around it. + +<P> +</DD> +</DL> + +<P> +The glossary style can be set using the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="3397"></A> package option +or using the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="3401"></A> key in the optional +argument to <TT>\printglossary</TT><A NAME="3404"></A> or using the command: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\glossarystyle{</TT><EM>style-name</EM><TT>}</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +<P> +All the styles except for the three- and four-column styles and the +<TT>listdotted</TT><A NAME="3407"></A> style use the command +<TT>\glspostdescription</TT> after the +description. This simply displays a full stop by default. To eliminate +this full stop (or replace it with something else, say a comma), you +will need to redefine <TT>\glspostdescription</TT> before the glossary is +displayed. +<P> +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> + +<P> + +<H2><A NAME="SECTION000411000000000000000"> +Defining your own glossary style</A> +</H2> + +<P> +If the predefined styles don't fit your requirements, you can +define your own style using: +<BR> +<BR><TT>\newglossarystyle{</TT><EM>name</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>definitions</EM><TT>}</TT> +<BR> +<BR> +where <I>name</I> is the name of the new glossary style (to be +used in <TT>\glossarystyle</TT>). The second argument <I>definitions</I>, +needs to redefine all of the following: + +<P> +<DL> +<DT></DT> +<DD> +<TT>theglossary</TT> +<P> +This environment defines how the main body of the glossary should +be typeset. Note that this does not include the section heading, +the glossary preamble (defined by <TT>\glossarypreamble</TT>) or the +glossary postamble (defined by <TT>\glossarypostamble</TT>.) For example, +the <TT>list</TT><A NAME="3413"></A> style uses the <TT>description</TT> environment, +so the <TT>theglossary</TT> environment is simply redefined to begin +and end the <TT>description</TT> environment. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT></DT> +<DD> +<TT>\glossaryheader</TT> +<P> +This macro indicates what to do at the start of the main body +of the glossary. Note that this is not the same as +<TT>\glossarypreamble</TT>, which should not be affected by changes in +the glossary style. The <TT>list</TT><A NAME="3418"></A> glossary style redefines +<TT>\glossaryheader</TT> to do nothing, whereas the <TT>longheader</TT><A NAME="3420"></A> +glossary style redefines <TT>\glossaryheader</TT> to do a header row. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT></DT> +<DD> +<TT>\glsgroupheading{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> +<P> +This macro indicates what to do at the start of each logical block +within the main body of the glossary. The glossary is sub-divided into +twenty-eight logical blocks that are determined by the first character +of the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="3422"></A> key (or <TT>name</TT><A NAME="3425"></A> key if the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="3428"></A> +key is omitted). The sub-divisions are in the following order: symbols, +numbers, A, ..., Z. Note that the argument to <TT>\glsgroupheading</TT> +is a label <I>not</I> the group title. The group title can be obtained +via <TT>\glsgetgrouptitle{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>, and a navigation hypertarget can +be created using <TT>\glsnavhypertarget{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>. Most of the +predefined glossary styles redefine <TT>\glsgroupheading</TT> to simply +ignore its argument. The <TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="3431"></A> style redefines +<TT>\glsgroupheading</TT> as follows: +<PRE> +\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{% +\item[\glsnavhypertarget{##1}{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}]} +</PRE> +See also <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT> below. (Note that command definitions within +<TT>\newglossarystyle</TT> must use <code>##1</code> etc instead of <code>#1</code> etc.) + +<P> +</DD> +<DT></DT> +<DD> +<TT>\glsgroupskip</TT> +<P> +This macro determines what to do after one logical group but before +the header for the next logical group. The <TT>list</TT><A NAME="3433"></A> glossary +style simply redefines <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT> to be <TT>\indexspace</TT>. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT></DT> +<DD> +<TT>\glossaryentryfield{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>formatted +name</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>description</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>symbol</EM><TT>}</TT> +<TT>{</TT><EM>number list</EM><TT>}</TT> +<P> +This macro indicates what to do for a given glossary entry. +Note that <I>formatted name</I> will always be in the form +<TT>\glsnamefont{</TT><EM>name</EM><TT>}</TT>. This allows the user to set a given +font for the entry name, regardless of the glossary style used. +Note that <I>label</I> is the label used when the glossary entry +was defined via either <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT> or <TT>\newacronym</TT>. +Each time you use a glossary entry it creates a +link<A NAME="tex2html9" + HREF="#foot1752"><SUP>5</SUP></A> +using <TT>\@glslink{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}</TT> with the label +<TT>glo:</TT><I>label</I>. Your +new glossary style must therefore redefine <TT>\glossaryentryfield</TT> +so that it uses <TT>\@glstarget</TT><code>{</code><TT>glo:</TT><I>label</I><code>}</code><TT>{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}</TT> +to ensure the hyperlinks function correctly.<A NAME="tex2html10" + HREF="#foot1753"><SUP>6</SUP></A> For example, the +<TT>list</TT><A NAME="3435"></A> style defines <TT>\glossaryentryfield</TT> as follows: +<PRE> +\renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{% +\item[\@glstarget{glo:##1}{##2}] ##3\glspostdescription\space ##5} +</PRE> + +<P> +Note also that <I>number list</I> will always be of the form +<BR> +<BR><TT>\glossaryentrynumbers</TT>{<TT>\relax</TT> +<BR><TT>\setentrycounter{</TT><EM>counter name</EM><TT>}\glsnumberformat{</TT><EM>number(s)</EM><TT>}</TT>} +<BR> +<BR> +where <I>number(s)</I> +may contain <TT>\delimN</TT> (to delimit individual numbers) and/or +<TT>\delimR</TT> (to indicate a range of numbers). There may be +multiple occurrences of +<TT>\setentrycounter{</TT><EM>counter name</EM><TT>}\glsnumberformat{</TT><EM>number(s)</EM><TT>}</TT>, but note +that the entire number list is enclosed within the argument +to <TT>\glossaryentrynumbers</TT><A NAME="3437"></A>. The user can redefine this to change +the way the entire number list is formatted, regardless of +the glossary style. However the most common use of +<TT>\glossaryentrynumbers</TT> is to provide a means of suppressing the +number list altogether. (In fact, the <TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="3445"></A> option +redefines <TT>\glossaryentrynumbers</TT> to ignore its argument.) +Therefore, when you define a new glossary style, you don't need +to worry about whether the user has specified the +<TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="3454"></A> package option. +</DD> +</DL> +<P> +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> + +<P> + +<H3><A NAME="SECTION000411100000000000000"> +Example: creating a completely new style</A> +</H3> + +<P> +If you want a completely new style, you will need to redefine all +of the commands and environment listed above. You also need to +take care when using internal commands (commands whose name +contain the @ symbol). These should either be used in a <TT>.sty</TT> +file or must be placed within <TT>\makeatletter</TT> and <TT>\makeatother</TT>. + +<P> +For example, suppose you want each entry to start with a bullet point. +This means that the glossary should be placed in the <TT>itemize</TT> +environment, so <TT>theglossary</TT> should start and end that +environment. Let's also suppose that you don't want anything between +the glossary groups (so <TT>\glsgroupheading</TT> and <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT> +should do nothing) and suppose you don't want anything to appear +immediately after <code>\begin{theglossary}</code> (so <TT>\glossaryheader</TT> +should do nothing). In addition, let's suppose the symbol should +appear in brackets after the name, followed by the description and +last of all the number list<A NAME="3462"></A> should appear within square brackets +at the end. Then you can create this new glossary style, called, say, +<TT>mylist</TT>, as follows: +<PRE> + \newglossarystyle{mylist}{% + % put the glossary in the itemize environment: + \renewenvironment{theglossary}{\begin{itemize}}{\end{itemize}}% + % have nothing after \begin{theglossary}: + \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}% + % have nothing between glossary groups: + \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}% + \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{}% + % set how each entry should appear: + \renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{% + \item % bullet point + \@glstarget{glo:##1}{##2}% the entry name + \space (##4)% the symbol in brackets + \space ##3% the description + \space [##5]% the number list in square brackets + }% + } +</PRE> + +<P> +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> + +<P> + +<H3><A NAME="SECTION000411200000000000000"> +Example: creating a new glossary style based on an +existing style</A> +</H3> + +<P> +If you want to define a new style that is a slightly modified +version of an existing style, you can use <TT>\glossarystyle</TT> +within the second argument of <TT>\newglossarystyle</TT> followed by +whatever alterations you require. For example, suppose you want +a style like the <TT>list</TT><A NAME="3467"></A> style but you don't want the extra +vertical space created by <TT>\indexspace</TT> between groups, then you +can create a new glossary style called, say, <TT>mylist</TT> as +follows: +<PRE> +\newglossarystyle{mylist}{% +\glossarystyle{list}% base this style on the list style +\renewcommand{\glsgroupskip}{}% make nothing happen between groups +} +</PRE> + +<P> +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> + +<P> + +<P> +<BR> + +<H2><A NAME="SECTION00050000000000000000"> +Index</A> +</H2><DL COMPACT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\acronymfont</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2889">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3226">Acronyms</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\acronymtype</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1978">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2247">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2534">Defining Glossary Entries</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>babel</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1804">Introduction</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2368">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2380">Package Options</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\defglsdisplay</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3030">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3241">Acronyms</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\defglsdisplayfirst</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3033">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3244">Acronyms</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\emph</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2036">A Quick Guide For</A> +<DT><STRONG>file types</STRONG> +<DD><DL COMPACT> +<DT><STRONG>.alg</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1864">Generating the associated glossary</A> +<DT><STRONG>.glg</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1862">Generating the associated glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1924">A Quick Guide For</A> +<DT><STRONG>.glo</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2444">Defining Glossary Entries</A> +<DT><STRONG>.gls</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2446">Defining Glossary Entries</A> +<DT><STRONG>.ist</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1836">Generating the associated glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2460">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2465">Defining Glossary Entries</A> +<DT><STRONG>.nlg</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1922">A Quick Guide For</A> +</DL> +<DT><STRONG><TT>glossary</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1800">Introduction</A> +<DT><STRONG>glossary styles</STRONG> +<DD><DL COMPACT> +<DT><STRONG>altlist</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3274">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3280">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>altlistgroup</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3278">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3284">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>altlisthypergroup</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3282">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>list</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3263">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3268">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3276">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3413">Defining your own glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3418">Defining your own glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3433">Defining your own glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3435">Defining your own glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3467">Example: creating a new</A> +<DT><STRONG>listdotted</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3407">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>listgroup</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3266">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3272">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>listhypergroup</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3270">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3431">Defining your own glossary</A> +<DT><STRONG>long</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3288">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3297">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3301">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3309">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>long3col</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3307">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3314">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3318">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3326">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>long3colborder</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3312">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>long3colheader</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3316">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3322">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>long3colheaderborder</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3320">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>long4col</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2069">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3324">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3330">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3334">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>long4colborder</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2073">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3328">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>long4colheader</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2071">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3332">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3338">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>long4colheaderborder</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2075">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3336">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>longborder</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3295">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>longheader</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3299">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3305">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3420">Defining your own glossary</A> +<DT><STRONG>longheaderborder</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3303">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>super</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3340">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3349">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3353">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3361">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>super3col</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3359">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3366">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3370">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3378">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>super3colborder</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3364">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>super3colheader</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3368">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3374">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>super3colheaderborder</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3372">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>super4col</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2077">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3376">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3382">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3386">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>super4colborder</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2081">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3380">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>super4colheader</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2079">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3384">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3390">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>super4colheaderborder</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2083">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3388">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>superborder</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3347">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>superheader</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3351">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3357">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>superheaderborder</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3355">Glossary Styles</A> +</DL> +<DT><STRONG><TT>glossary-list</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1996">A Quick Guide For</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\glossaryentrynumbers</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3437">Defining your own glossary</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\glossarystyle</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2094">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2820">Displaying a glossary</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\gls</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1960">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2005">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2008">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2011">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2054">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2482">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2491">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2638">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2644">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2650">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2656">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2662">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2674">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2686">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2702">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2754">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3250">Unsetting and resetting entry</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\glsadd</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2042">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2057">A Quick Guide For</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\glsaddall</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2045">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2060">A Quick Guide For</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\glscompositor</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1936">A Quick Guide For</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\glsdesc</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3229">Acronyms</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\glsfirst</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3235">Acronyms</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\glslink</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2023">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2051">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2629">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2751">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2769">Adding an entry to</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\glslink</TT> keys</STRONG> +<DD><DL COMPACT> +<DT><STRONG>counter</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2613">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +<DT><STRONG>format</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2026">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2029">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2039">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2600">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +<DT><STRONG>hyper</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2616">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2757">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2772">Adding an entry to</A> +</DL> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\glsnamefont</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1993">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2002">A Quick Guide For</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\glspl</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1963">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2014">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2017">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2020">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2500">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2509">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2705">Changing the format of</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\glssymbol</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3232">Acronyms</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\glstext</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3219">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3223">Acronyms</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\glstextformat</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2730">Changing the format of</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>html</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1877">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2747">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\hyperemph</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2033">A Quick Guide For</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\hyperlink</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2760">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>hyperref</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1874">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2606">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2744">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2766">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\hypertarget</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2763">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\item</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1999">A Quick Guide For</A> +<DT><STRONG>link text</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2596">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2597">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2598">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2618">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2700">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2728">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2739">Changing the format of</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>longtable</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3291">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>makeglossaries</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1827">Generating the associated glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1838">Generating the associated glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1841">Generating the associated glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1856">Generating the associated glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1880">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1883">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1889">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1907">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1916">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1939">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2454">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2778">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2787">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2833">Defining New Glossaries</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>makeindex</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1830">Generating the associated glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1833">Generating the associated glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1844">Generating the associated glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1859">Generating the associated glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1904">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1910">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1913">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1919">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2048">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2066">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2457">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2462">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2521">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2527">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2603">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2781">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2784">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2830">Defining New Glossaries</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\newacronym</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1975">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2402">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2414">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2426">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2438">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2877">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3238">Acronyms</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\newglossary</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1901">A Quick Guide For</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\newglossaryentry</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1951">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1990">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2593">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2626">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\newglossaryentry</TT> keys</STRONG> +<DD><DL COMPACT> +<DT><STRONG>description</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1957">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2310">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2325">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2337">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2476">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2470">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2689">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2692">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2695">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2720">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2925">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3120">Acronyms</A> +<DT><STRONG>first</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2488">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2512">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2558">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2623">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2647">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2714">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2919">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3253">Unsetting and resetting entry</A> +<DT><STRONG>firstplural</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2506">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2561">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2635">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2659">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2717">Changing the format of</A> +<DT><STRONG>format</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2610">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +<DT><STRONG>name</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1954">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2307">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2328">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2334">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2349">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2352">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2473">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2467">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2485">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2524">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2549">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2665">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2668">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2671">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3114">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3117">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3425">Defining your own glossary</A> +<DT><STRONG>plural</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1972">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2497">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2555">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2632">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2653">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2711">Changing the format of</A> +<DT><STRONG>sort</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2063">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2343">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2518">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3422">Defining your own glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3428">Defining your own glossary</A> +<DT><STRONG>symbol</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2313">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2331">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2340">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2515">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2677">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2680">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2683">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2723">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2726">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2737">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2928">Acronyms</A> +<DT><STRONG>text</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2346">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2355">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2479">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2494">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2503">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2546">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2552">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2620">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2641">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2708">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2922">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3256">Unsetting and resetting entry</A> +<DT><STRONG>type</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1966">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1969">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2531">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2564">Defining Glossary Entries</A> +</DL> +<DT><STRONG>number list</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2285">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2295">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2570">Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2828">Defining New Glossaries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3286">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3293">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3310">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3345">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3362">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3462">Example: creating a completely</A> +<DT><STRONG>package options</STRONG> +<DD><DL COMPACT> +<DT><STRONG>acronym</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1852">Generating the associated glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1854">Generating the associated glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1931">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1933">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1986">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1988">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2188">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2190">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2242">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2244">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2255">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2257">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2264">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2266">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2542">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2544">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2841">Defining New Glossaries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2843">Defining New Glossaries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2850">Defining New Glossaries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2852">Defining New Glossaries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2859">Defining New Glossaries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2861">Defining New Glossaries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2872">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2874">Acronyms</A> +<DT><STRONG>babel</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2363">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2365">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2376">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2389">Package Options</A> +<DD><DL COMPACT> +<DT><STRONG>false</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2391">Package Options</A> +<DT><STRONG>true</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2378">Package Options</A> +</DL> +<DT><STRONG>counter</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2292">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2294">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2586">Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2588">Number lists</A> +<DT><STRONG>description</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2398">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2400">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2906">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2908">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2936">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2938">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2954">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2956">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2972">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2974">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3026">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3028">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3041">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3043">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3110">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3112">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3128">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3130">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3180">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3182">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3215">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3217">Acronyms</A> +<DT><STRONG>dua</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2434">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2436">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2963">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2965">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2999">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3001">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3083">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3085">Acronyms</A> +<DT><STRONG>footnote</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2410">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2412">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2915">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2917">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2945">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2947">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2981">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2983">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3017">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3019">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3050">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3052">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3092">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3094">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3145">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3147">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3171">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3173">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3206">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3208">Acronyms</A> +<DT><STRONG>nonumberlist</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2103">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2105">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2282">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2284">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2577">Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2579">Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3445">Defining your own glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3447">Defining your own glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3454">Defining your own glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3456">Defining your own glossary</A> +<DT><STRONG>numberedsection</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2209">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2211">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2218">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2220">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2233">Package Options</A> +<DD><DL COMPACT> +<DT><STRONG>autolabel</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2235">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2226">Package Options</A> +<DT><STRONG>false</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2222">Package Options</A> +<DT><STRONG>nolabel</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2224">Package Options</A> +</DL> +<DT><STRONG>numberline</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2143">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2145">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2179">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2181">Package Options</A> +<DT><STRONG>sanitize</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2302">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2304">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2321">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2323">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3060">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3062">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3068">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3075">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3137">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3154">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3189">Acronyms</A> +<DD><DL COMPACT> +<DT><STRONG>description</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3069">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3155">Acronyms</A> +<DT><STRONG>symbol</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3076">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3138">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3190">Acronyms</A> +</DL> +<DT><STRONG>section</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2112">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2114">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2121">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2123">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2197">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2199">Package Options</A> +<DT><STRONG>smallcaps</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2422">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2424">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2885">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2887">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2897">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2899">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2990">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2992">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3008">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3010">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3101">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3103">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3162">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3164">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3197">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3199">Acronyms</A> +<DT><STRONG>style</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2090">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2092">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2273">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2275">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2816">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2818">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3397">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3399">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>toc</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1897">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1899">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1947">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1949">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2134">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2136">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2152">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2154">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2161">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2163">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2170">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2172">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2804">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2806">Displaying a glossary</A> +<DT><STRONG>translate</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1819">Introduction</A> +<DD><DL COMPACT> +<DT><STRONG>false</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1821">Introduction</A> +</DL> +</DL> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\printglossaries</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1886">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2451">Defining Glossary Entries</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\printglossary</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2448">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3404">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\printglossary</TT> keys</STRONG> +<DD><DL COMPACT> +<DT><STRONG>style</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2808">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3401">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>title</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2793">Displaying a glossary</A> +<DT><STRONG>toctitle</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2796">Displaying a glossary</A> +<DT><STRONG>type</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2790">Displaying a glossary</A> +</DL> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\setglossarysection</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2201">Package Options</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>supertabular</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3343">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>translator</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#1810">Introduction</A> + +</DL> +<P> +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> + +<P> +<BR><HR><H4>Footnotes</H4> +<DL> +<DT><A NAME="foot370">... +range</A><A + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html4"><SUP>1</SUP></A></DT> +<DD>This is new to version 1.01 + +</DD> +<DT><A NAME="foot1670">...acronym</A><A + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html5"><SUP>2</SUP></A></DT> +<DD>if the +<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="2242"></A> option is used, otherwise the list of +acronyms is the main glossary + +</DD> +<DT><A NAME="foot1718">... name</A><A + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html6"><SUP>3</SUP></A></DT> +<DD><TT>main</TT> for the main +(default) glossary, <TT>\acronymtype</TT> for the list of acronyms, or the +name supplied in the first mandatory argument to <TT>\newglossary</TT> for +additional glossaries. + +</DD> +<DT><A NAME="foot1409">... start.</A><A + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html8"><SUP>4</SUP></A></DT> +<DD>This style was +supplied by Axel Menzel. + +</DD> +<DT><A NAME="foot1752">... +link</A><A + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html9"><SUP>5</SUP></A></DT> +<DD>if the document doesn't have hyperlinks enabled +<TT>\@glslink</TT> ignores the label and simply typesets the text. + +</DD> +<DT><A NAME="foot1753">... correctly.</A><A + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html10"><SUP>6</SUP></A></DT> +<DD>again, if the +document doesn't support hyperlinks, <TT>\@glstarget</TT> will ignore +the label, and just typeset the text. + +</DD> +</DL> +<BR><HR> + +</BODY> +</HTML> diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries-manual.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries-manual.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9ede69d65e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries-manual.tex @@ -0,0 +1,1947 @@ +\documentclass[a4paper]{ltxdoc} +\usepackage{ifthen} +\usepackage{alltt} +\usepackage[colorlinks, + bookmarks, + hyperindex=false, + pdfauthor={Nicola L.C. Talbot}, + pdftitle={glossaries.sty: LaTeX2e Package to Assist Generating Glossaries}, + pdfkeywords={LaTeX,package,glossary,acronyms}]{hyperref} + + %hyperindex conflicts with doc + %(end up with |usage|hyperpage in indexentry) + %This unfortunately means that the changes section doesn't + %have active links, but at least it will keep makeindex happy. + +\usepackage{creatdtx} +\ifmakedtx{ +\renewcommand{\usage}[1]{\textit{\hyperpage{#1}}} +\renewcommand{\main}[1]{\hyperpage{#1}} +\newcommand{\see}[2]{\emph{see} #1} +\makeatletter +\def\index@prologue{\section*{Index}} +\makeatother +\RecordChanges +\PageIndex +\CheckSum{4357} +\CodelineNumbered +\newcommand*{\termdef}[1]{\emph{#1}\iterm{#1}} +\newcommand*{\term}[1]{#1\iterm{#1}} +\newcommand*{\iterm}[1]{\index{#1|main}} +\newcommand{\dq}[1]{``#1''} +} +{ +\usepackage{html} +\usepackage{makeidx} +\renewcommand{\LaTeX}{LaTeX} +\renewcommand{\LaTeXe}{LaTeX2e} +\newcommand*{\termdef}[1]{\emph{#1}\index{#1}} +\newcommand*{\term}[1]{#1\index{#1}} +\newcommand*{\iterm}[1]{\index{#1}} +\newcommand{\dq}[1]{"#1"} +} + + +\ifmakedtx{ +\newcommand*{\istkey}[1]{\texttt{#1}\index{makeindex=\texttt{makeindex}>#1=\texttt{#1}|hyperpage}} +\newcommand*{\ics}[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}\SpecialMainIndex{#1}} +\newcommand*{\appname}[1]{\texttt{#1}\index{#1=\texttt{#1}|hyperpage}} +\newcommand*{\mkidxspch}{\index{makeindex=\texttt{makeindex}>special characters|hyperpage}} +\newcommand*{\igloskey}[2][newglossaryentry]{\index{#1 options=\cs{#1} options>#2=\textsf{#2}|hyperpage}} +\newcommand*{\gloskey}[2][newglossaryentry]{\textsf{#2}\igloskey[#1]{#2}} +\newcommand*{\ipkgopt}[2][]{% +\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{% +\index{package options>#2=\textsf{#2}|hyperpage}}{% +\index{package options>#2=\textsf{#2}>#1=\textsf{#1}|hyperpage}}} +\newcommand*{\pkgopt}[2][]{% +\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{% +\textsf{#2}\index{package options>#2=\textsf{#2}|hyperpage}}{% +\textsf{#2=#1}\index{package options>#2=\textsf{#2}>#1=\textsf{#1}|hyperpage}}} +\newcommand*{\pkgoptval}[2]{\textsf{#1}\index{package options>#2=\textsf{#2}>#1=\textsf{#1}|hyperpage}} +\newcommand*{\glostyle}[1]{\textsf{#1}\index{glossary styles>#1|hyperpage}} +\newcommand*{\filetype}[1]{\texttt{#1}\index{file types>#1|hyperpage}} +\newcommand*{\sty}[1]{\textsf{#1}} +\newcommand*{\isty}[1]{\sty{#1}\index{#1 package=\sty{#1} package|hyperpage}} +\newcommand*{\envname}[1]{\textsf{#1}} +} +{ +\newcommand{\istkey}[1]{\texttt{#1}\index{makeindex key!#1}} +\newcommand{\ics}[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}\index{#1@\cs{#1}}} +\html{\newcommand{\SpecialMainIndex}[1]{\index{#1@\cs{#1}}}} +\newcommand{\appname}[1]{\texttt{#1}\index{#1@\texttt{#1}}} +\newcommand*{\mkidxspch}{\index{makeindex@\texttt{makeindex}!special characters|hyperpage}} +\newcommand{\gloskey}[2][newglossaryentry]{\texttt{#2}\index{#1 keys@\cs{#1} keys!#2}} +\newcommand{\ipkgopt}[2][]{% +\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{% +\index{package options!#2}}{% +\index{package options!#2!#1}}} +\newcommand{\pkgopt}[2][]{% +\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{% +\texttt{#2}\index{package options!#2}}{% +\texttt{#2=#1}\index{package options!#2!#1}}} +\newcommand{\pkgoptval}[2]{\texttt{#1}\index{package options!#2!#1}} +\newcommand{\glostyle}[1]{\texttt{#1}\index{glossary styles!#1}} +\newcommand{\filetype}[1]{\texttt{#1}\index{file types!#1}} +\newcommand{\sty}[1]{\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\isty}[1]{\sty{#1}\index{#1@\sty{#1}}} +\newcommand{\envname}[1]{\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\toTop}{\mbox{}\par\htmlref{Top}{top}} +} + +\begin{document}\ifmakedtx{}{\label{top}} +\MakeShortVerb{"} +\DeleteShortVerb{\|} + + \title{glossaries.sty v 1.11: \LaTeXe\ Package to Assist Generating Glossaries} + \author{Nicola L.C. Talbot\\[10pt] +School of Computing Sciences\\ +University of East Anglia\\ +Norwich. Norfolk\\ +NR4 7TJ. United Kingdom.\\ +\url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/}} + + \date{2nd March 2008} + \maketitle +\tableofcontents + + \section{Introduction} + + \changes{1.0}{2007 May 16}{Initial version} +The \sty{glossaries} package is provided to assist generating +glossaries. It has a certain amount of flexibility, allowing the user +to customize the format of the glossary and define multiple glossaries. +It also supports acronyms and glossary styles that include +symbols (in addition to a name and description) for glossary +entries. There is provision for loading a database of glossary terms +where only those terms used in the text are added to the glossary. +This package replaces the \isty{glossary} package which is now +obsolete. + +As from version 1.08, the \sty{glossaries} package now has +limited multi-lingual support, thanks to all the people who have sent +me the relevant translations either via email or via comp.text.tex. +However you must load \isty{babel} \emph{before} +\sty{glossaries} to enable this. \ifmakedtx{(See \autoref{sec:predefinednames} for the +predefined names used by the \sty{glossaries} package.)}{} +As from version 1.1, the \sty{glossaries} package also supports +Till~Tantau's \isty{translator} package provided it is loaded +before the \sty{glossaries} package. This makes it easier to change +the default translations or add new dictionaries. +If you don't want to use the predefined translations, you can use the +package option \pkgopt[false]{translate} and supply your own translations. + +This documentation is structured as follows: \ifmakedtx{\autoref{sec:quick}}{\htmlref{{A Quick Guide For The Impatient}}{sec:quick}} is for +people who want a few quick pointers of how to get started, +without having to read through lengthy descriptions, +\ifmakedtx{\autoref{sec:overview}}{and \htmlref{Overview}{sec:overview}} gives an overview of available commands +and their syntax\ifmakedtx{, \autoref{sec:code} contains the documented +source code for those who want to know more about how the +package works, and how to do more complicated things, such as +changing the way glossary entries appear}{}.\ifmakedtx{}{\toTop} + +\subsection{Generating the associated glossary files} +\label{sec:makeglossaries} + +The \sty{glossaries} package comes with the Perl script +\appname{makeglossaries} which will run \appname{makeindex} on +all the glossary files using a customized \appname{makeindex} +\filetype{.ist} style file (which is created by \ics{makeglossaries}). +The relevant extensions are obtained from the +auxiliary file, so you should only pass the basename as the +argument. For example, if your document is called +\texttt{myfile.tex}, do: +\begin{verbatim} +latex myfile +makeglossaries myfile +latex myfile +\end{verbatim} +You may need to explicitly load \appname{makeglossaries} into +Perl: +\begin{verbatim} +perl makeglossaries myfile +\end{verbatim} +There is a batch file called \texttt{makeglossaries.bat} which +does this for Windows users. + +If you don't have Perl installed, you will have to run +\appname{makeindex} for each glossary type you have defined. +For example, if you have used the \pkgopt{acronym} package option +then you will have both a main glossary as well as a list of acronyms, so you +will need to do (assuming your document is called \texttt{myfile.tex}): +\begin{verbatim} +makeindex -s myfile.ist -t myfile.glg -o myfile.gls myfile.glo +makeindex -s myfile.ist -t myfile.alg -o myfile.acr myfile.acn +\end{verbatim} +This requires remembering all extensions for each of the glossaries +defined in your document, so where possible you should use +\appname{makeglossaries} instead to reduce the possibility of error. +Don't pass all the glossary files in a single call to +\appname{makeindex} or it will merge all your glossaries into a +single glossary. + +If any problems occur, remember to check the transcript files +(e.g.\ \filetype{.glg} or \filetype{.alg}) for messages.\ifmakedtx{}{\toTop} + +\subsection{Troubleshooting} + +The glossaries package comes with a minimal file called +\texttt{minimalgls.tex} which can be used for testing. This +should be located in \texttt{texmf/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/}. Further +information on debugging \LaTeX\ code is available at +\url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/minexample/}. + +There is a list of frequently asked questions for the +\sty{glossaries} package available at +\url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/packages/faq/glossariesfaq.html}.\ifmakedtx{}{\toTop} + +\section{A Quick Guide For The Impatient} +\label{sec:quick} + +This section is for people who want a few quick pointers +of how to get started, without having to read through +lengthy descriptions. + +\begin{enumerate} +\item Load \sty{glossaries} \emph{after} \isty{hyperref}: +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage{hyperref} +\usepackage{glossaries} +\end{verbatim} +Similarly for the \isty{html} package: +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage{html} +\usepackage{glossaries} +\end{verbatim} + +\item Always use \ics{makeglossaries} if you want the glossary +entries to be written to the glossary file: +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass{article} +\usepackage{glossaries} +\makeglossaries +\end{verbatim} +If you don't use \ics{makeglossaries}, your glossaries will +not appear in the document! + +\item Use \ics{printglossaries} to make your glossaries appear +in the document at that point. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\maketitle +\printglossaries +\section{Introduction} +\end{verbatim} +Note that only the glossary entries that have been used in the +document text will appear in the glossary. + +\item When you have created your document, run \LaTeX\ on it, +then the Perl script \appname{makeglossaries}, then run \LaTeX\ +on it again: +\begin{verbatim} +latex myfile +makeglossaries myfile +latex myfile +\end{verbatim} +(You may need to run \LaTeX\ again if you have used the \pkgopt{toc} +package option.) +If you use Windows, there is a batch file called +\texttt{makeglossaries.bat} which you can use, but you will +still need Perl installed. + +\item New glossaries can be defined using:\par +\ics{newglossary}\oarg{log-ext}% +\marg{label}\marg{in-ext}\marg{out-ext}% +\marg{title}\par where \meta{label} is an identifying label, +\meta{in-ext} is the extension of the file to be created +by \appname{makeindex} (called by \appname{makeglossaries}), +\meta{out-ext} is the extension of the file to be read by +\appname{makeindex} and \meta{title} is the title for this +new glossary. The first optional argument \meta{log-ext} specifies +the extension of the \appname{makeindex} transcript file. Example: +\begin{verbatim} +\newglossary[nlg]{notation}{not}{ntn}{Notation} +\end{verbatim} +This glossary's label is \texttt{notation} and its title +will be Notation. If you use \appname{makeglossaries}, the +\appname{makeindex} transcript will be written to a file with the +extension \filetype{.nlg}. If \meta{log-ext} is omitted, the extension +\filetype{.glg} will be used. + +\item Any new glossaries must be defined before +\cs{makeglossaries} +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass{article} +\usepackage{glossaries} +\newglossary{notation}{not}{ntn}{Notation} +\makeglossaries +\end{verbatim} + +\item If you use the \pkgopt{acronym} package option, the +\sty{glossaries} package +will automatically create a new glossary type labelled +\texttt{acronym}: +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage[acronym]{glossaries} +\end{verbatim} + +\item If your pages have a hyphen compositor (i.e.\ your page +numbers appear in the form 2-1), redefine \ics{glscompositor} +\emph{before} \ics{makeglossaries}: +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass{article} +\usepackage{glossaries} +\renewcommand{\glscompositor}{-} +\makeglossaries +\end{verbatim} + +\item To add the glossaries to the table of contents use the +\pkgopt{toc} package option: +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage[toc]{glossaries} +\end{verbatim} + +\item Define a new entry with:\par +\ics{newglossaryentry}\marg{label}\marg{key-val list}\par +The \meta{key-val list} must at least contain a \gloskey{name} +key and a \gloskey{description} key. +For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\newglossaryentry{perl}{name=Perl, +description=A scripting language} +\end{verbatim} +In this example, I have given the entry the label \texttt{perl}. +Whenever I want to use this entry, that is the label I need +to use to identify it. + +\item If the entry name starts with an accented letter, you will +need to group the first letter (otherwise it will cause a +problem for \ics{Gls} and \ics{Glspl}): +\begin{verbatim} +\newglossaryentry{elite}{name={{\'e}lite}, +description={select group or class}} +\end{verbatim} + +\item If you have multiple glossaries, use the \gloskey{type} +key to specify in which glossary the entry belongs. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\newglossary{languages}{lan}{lng}{Index of Languages} + +\makeglossaries + +\newglossaryentry{perl}{name=Perl, +description=A scripting language, +type=languages} +\end{verbatim} +If \gloskey{type} is omitted, the default glossary is used. + +\item Remember to group values that have a comma or equal sign. +For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\newglossaryentry{pagelist}{name=page list, +description={A list of individual pages or page ranges +(e.g.\ 1,2,4,7--9)}} +\end{verbatim} + +\item Plural forms are assumed to be the singular form with an +\dq{s} appended, unless otherwise specified. To specify an +irregular plural, use the \gloskey{plural} key. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\newglossaryentry{matrix}{name=matrix, +description=rectangular array of quantities, +plural=matrices} +\end{verbatim} + +\item The way the term appears in the main text can be different +from the way the term appears in the glossary: +\begin{verbatim} +\newglossaryentry{matrix}{name=Matrix, +description=rectangular array of quantities, +text=matrix, +plural=matrices} +\end{verbatim} +In this example, the entry name appears as \dq{Matrix} in the +glossary, and either \dq{matrix} or \dq{matrices} in the text. + +\item The way the term appears on first use can be different +to the way it appears subsequently: +\begin{verbatim} +\newglossaryentry{singmtx}{name=Singular Matrix, +description=A matrix with a zero determinant, +first=singular matrix (SM), +text=SM, +firstplural=singular matrices (SMs)} +\end{verbatim} +In this example, the entry name appears as \dq{Singular Matrix} in +the glossary, and in the text it appears as \dq{singular matrix (SM)} +or \dq{singular matrices (SMs)} the first time the entry is used, +and subsequently appears as \dq{SM} or \dq{SMs}. + +\item The quick and easy way to define an acronym is to use:\par +\ics{newacronym}\oarg{key-val list}\marg{label}\marg{abbrev}% +\marg{long}\par +For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\newacronym{svm}{SVM}{support vector machine} +\end{verbatim} +This is equivalent to: +\begin{verbatim} +\newglossaryentry{svm}{type=\acronymtype, +name={SVM}, +description={support vector machine}, +text={SVM}, +first={support vector machine (SVM)}, +plural={SVMs}, +firstplural={support vector machines (SVMs)}} +\end{verbatim} +(The value of \ics{acronymtype} varies depending on whether +the \pkgopt{acronym} package option is used or not. +The optional argument \meta{key-val list} can be used to +override any of the \ics{newglossaryentry} keys; for +example, if the acronym has an irregular plural.) + +\item The font used to display the entry name in the glossary +is governed by \ics{glsnamefont}. This can be redefined +as required. For example, to make the entry names appear +in a medium sans-serif font do: +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand{\glsnamefont}[1]{\textsf{\mdseries #1}} +\end{verbatim} +Note that the list-like glossary styles defined in the +\isty{glossary-list} package place the entry name in +the optional argument to \ics{item}, so they will +appear in bold, unless you redefine \ics{glsnamefont} to counteract the +bold font. + +\item In the document use \ics{gls}\marg{label} +to use a predefined term (this will also enter the term into +the associated glossary output file). For example: +\begin{verbatim} +A \gls{singmtx} is a matrix with a zero determinant. +\end{verbatim} + +\item Other variations: +\begin{itemize} +\item \ics{Gls}\marg{label} : like \cs{gls}, +but with first letter in upper case +\item \ics{GLS}\marg{label} : like \cs{gls}, +but all upper case. +\item \ics{glspl}\marg{label} : use plural +\item \ics{Glspl}\marg{label} : use plural with +first letter in upper case +\item \ics{GLSpl}\marg{label} : use plural but +all upper case +\item \ics{glslink}\marg{label}\marg{link text} : +use \meta{link text} to link to the given entry in the glossary. +\end{itemize} +For example, the following will produce the plural form with +the first letter in uppercase: +\begin{verbatim} +\Glspl{singmtx} are matrices with a zero determinant. +\end{verbatim} + +\item Additional text can be appended to the link using the +end optional argument. For example, to form the possessive: +\begin{verbatim} +The \gls{singmtx}['s] dimensions \ldots +\end{verbatim} + +\item The format of the associated entry number can be +changed using the \gloskey[glslink]{format} key in the optional argument. +Note that the value of the \gloskey[glslink]{format} key should be the +name of a command \emph{without} the initial backslash. For +example: +\begin{verbatim} +The primary definition of \glspl[format=textbf]{singmtx}. +\end{verbatim} +In this example the relevant glossary entry will have the +page number in bold (since it uses \cs{textbf}) but +it will no longer have a hyperlink (if hyperlinks are enabled.) + +\item The \sty{glossaries} package provides commands to +change the font whilst ensuring that the number remains a +hyperlink. These are of the form \cs{hyper}\meta{xx} and +are equivalent to the standard font changing commands of the +form \cs{text}\meta{xx}, as well as \ics{hyperemph} +(which uses \ics{emph}.) For example: +\begin{verbatim} +The primary definition of \glspl[format=hyperbf]{singmtx}. +\end{verbatim} + +\item Don't use declarations in \gloskey[glslink]{format} as this can +cause unpredictable results, as there is no guarantee that the effect +will be localised to the required text. + +\item Entries can be added to the glossary without producing +any text using \ics{glsadd}\marg{label} or +\ics{glsaddall}. These commands also taken an optional +argument where you can specify the format. For example +\begin{verbatim} +\glsadd[format=hyperbf]{singmtx} +\end{verbatim} +will add a line to the +glossary file for the specified term, but will not produce +any text where the command occurs. + +\item A number range can be entered using \verb|format=(| and +\verb"format=)" to mark the beginning and ending of the +range\footnote{This is new to version 1.01}. For example: +\begin{verbatim} + \glsadd[format=(]{singmtx} + This is a very long section all about \glspl{singmtx}. + + % lots of text omitted + + \glsadd[format=)]{singmtx} +\end{verbatim} +This is equivalent to \appname{makeindex}'s \verb"|(" and \verb"|)" +formats. + +\item You can combine the range markers with a formatting command +(again without the preceding backslash). For example: +\begin{verbatim} + This is the start of a very long section all + about \glspl[format=(hyperbf]{singmtx}. + + % lots of text omitted + + This is the end a very long section all about + \glspl[format=)hyperbf]{singmtx}. +\end{verbatim} + +\item Only those terms that have actually been used in the +document will be placed in the glossary. If you have defined +a term that doesn't appear in the document, then it means +you haven't used it in the text (either via \ics{glslink} +or \ics{gls} and related commands, or via \ics{glsadd} +or \ics{glsaddall}.) + +\item To change the sorting order, use the \gloskey{sort} key. +For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\newglossaryentry{universal}{name={\ensuremath{\mathcal{U}}}, +description=The universal set, +sort=U} +\end{verbatim} + +\item You don't need to escape \appname{makeindex}'s special characters: +\begin{verbatim} +\newglossaryentry{quote}{name={"}, +description={Double quote character}} + +\newglossaryentry{exclam}{name={!}, +description={Exclamation mark}} + +\newacronym{rna}{RNA}{ribonukleins\"aure} +\end{verbatim} + +\item Associated symbols can also be specified, but whether the +symbol appears in the glossary depends on the glossary style. +For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\newglossaryentry{metre}{name={metre}, +description={A metric measurement of length}, +symbol={m}} +\end{verbatim} +The predefined glossary styles that display the entry symbol +are: \glostyle{long4col}, \glostyle{long4colheader}, +\glostyle{long4colborder}, \glostyle{long4colheaderborder}, +\glostyle{super4col}, \glostyle{super4colheader}, +\glostyle{super4colborder} and \glostyle{super4colheaderborder}. +All the other styles supplied by this package ignore the associated +symbol. + +\item Glossary styles can be set using the \pkgopt{style} +package option. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage[style=long3col]{glossaries} +\end{verbatim} +or using \ics{glossarystyle}\marg{style}. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\glossarystyle{altlist} +\end{verbatim} +The predefined glossary styles provided by the \sty{glossaries} +bundle are listed in \ifmakedtx{\autoref{sec:styles}}{\htmlref{{Glossary Styles}}{sec:styles}}. + +\item The list of numbers associated with each glossary entry +can be suppressed using the package option \pkgopt{nonumberlist}: +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage[nonumberlist]{glossaries} +\end{verbatim} + +\item By default, the glossaries will appear in an unnumbered +chapter if chapters are defined, otherwise in an unnumbered +section. This can be changed using the \pkgopt{section} package +option. For example, to make the glossaries appear in an unnumbered +section, even if chapters are defined, do: +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage[section]{glossaries} +\end{verbatim} +Other sectional units can also be specified as +\pkgopt{section}=\meta{value}. For example, to make the glossaries +appear in unnumbered subsections: +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage[section=subsection]{glossaries} +\end{verbatim} + +\end{enumerate}\ifmakedtx{}{\toTop} + +\section{Overview}\label{sec:overview} + \changes{1.02}{2007 May 25}{added overview section} + +\subsection{Package Options} + +The \sty{glossaries} package options are as follows: +\begin{description} +\item[\pkgopt{toc}] Add the glossaries to the table of contents. + +\item[\pkgopt{numberline}] When used with \pkgopt{toc}, this will +add \cs{numberline}\verb|{}| in the final argument of +\cs{addcontentsline}. This will align the table of contents entry +with the numbered section titles. Note that this option has no +effect if the \pkgopt{toc} option is omitted. If \pkgopt{toc} is +used without \pkgopt{numberline}, the title will be aligned with +the section numbers rather than the section titles. + +\item[\pkgopt{acronym}] Make a separate glossary for acronyms. + +\item[\pkgopt{section}] This is a \meta{key}=\meta{value} option. Its +value should be the name of a sectional unit (e.g.\ chapter). +This will make the glossaries appear in the named sectional unit, +otherwise each glossary will appear in a chapter, if chapters +exists, otherwise in a section. Unnumbered sectional units will be used +by default. Example: +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage[section=subsection]{glossaries} +\end{verbatim} +You can omit the value if you want to use sections, i.e.\ +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage[section]{glossaries} +\end{verbatim} +is equivalent to +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage[section=section]{glossaries} +\end{verbatim} +You can change this value later in the document using +\ics{setglossarysection}\marg{type}. + +\item[\pkgopt{numberedsection}] +The glossaries are placed in unnumbered sectional units by default, +but this can be changed using \pkgopt{numberedsection}. This option can take +three possible values: \pkgoptval{false}{numberedsection} (no +number, i.e.\ use starred form), \pkgoptval{nolabel}{numberedsection} +(numbered, i.e.\ unstarred form, but not labelled) and +\pkgoptval{autolabel}{numberedsection} (numbered with automatic +labelling). If \pkgopt[autolabel]{numberedsection} is used, each +glossary is given a label that matches the glossary type, so the +main (default) glossary is labelled \texttt{main}, the list of +acronyms is labelled \texttt{acronym}\footnote{if the +\pkgopt{acronym} option is used, otherwise the list of +acronyms is the main glossary} and additional glossaries are labelled +using the value specified in the first mandatory argument to +\cs{newglossary}. For example, if you load \sty{glossaries} +using: +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage[section,numberedsection=autolabel]{glossaries} +\end{verbatim} +then each glossary will appear in a numbered section, and can +be referenced using something like: +\begin{verbatim} +The main glossary is in section~\ref{main} and the list of +acronyms is in section~\ref{acronym}. +\end{verbatim} +If you can't decide whether to have the acronyms in the main +glossary or a separate list of acronyms, you can use +\ics{acronymtype} which is set to \texttt{main} if the +\pkgopt{acronym} option is not used and is set to \texttt{acronym} +if the \pkgopt{acronym} option is used. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +The list of acronyms is in section~\ref{\acronymtype}. +\end{verbatim} + +\item[\pkgopt{style}] This is a \meta{key}=\meta{value} option. Its +value should be the name of the glossary style to use. Predefined +glossary styles are listed \ifmakedtx{in \autoref{sec:styles}}{\htmlref{later}{sec:styles}}. + +\item[\pkgopt{nonumberlist}] This option will suppress the +associated number lists\iterm{number list} in the glossaries (see also +\ifmakedtx{\autoref{sec:numberlists}}{\htmlref{Number Lists}{sec:numberlists}}.) + +\item[\pkgopt{counter}] This is a \meta{key}=\meta{value} option. The +value should be the name of the default counter to use in the number +lists\iterm{number list}. + +\ifmakedtx{\hypertarget{sanitize}{}\relax}{\label{sanitize}} +\item[\pkgopt{sanitize}] This is a \meta{key}=\meta{value} option whose +value is also a \meta{key}=\meta{value} list. By default, the +\sty{glossaries} package sanitizes the values of the +\gloskey{name}, \gloskey{description} and \gloskey{symbol} keys used +when defining a new glossary entry. This may lead to unexpected results +if you try to display these values within the document text. This +sanitization can be switched off using the \pkgopt{sanitize} package +option. \ifmakedtx{(See \autoref{sec:pkgopt} and \autoref{sec:newentry} for +further details.)}{} For example, to switch off the sanitization for the +\gloskey{description} and \gloskey{name} keys, but not for the +\gloskey{symbol} key, do: +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage[sanitize={name=false,description=false,% +symbol=true}]{glossaries} +\end{verbatim} + +\textbf{Note}: this sanitization only applies to the \gloskey{name}, +\gloskey{description} and \gloskey{symbol} keys. It doesn't apply +to any of the other keys (except the \gloskey{sort} key which is +always sanitized) so fragile commands contained in the value of +the other keys must always be protected using \cs{protect}. +Since the value of the \gloskey{text} key is obtained from the +\gloskey{name} key, you will still need to protect fragile commands +in the \gloskey{name} key if you don't use the \gloskey{text} key. + +\item[\pkgopt{babel}] This is a boolean key and is for use when +the \sty{glossaries} package is used in conjunction with the +\isty{babel} package. The default is \pkgopt[true]{babel}, which +adds the glossary translations to \isty{babel}'s captions. If +you don't like the translations provided by the \sty{glossaries} +package, you can set \pkgopt[false]{babel} and provide your own +translations. + +\item[\pkgopt{description}] This option changes the definition of +\ics{newacronym} to allow a description. See \ifmakedtx{\autoref{sec:acronyms}}{\htmlref{later}{sec:acronyms}} +for further details. + +\item[\pkgopt{footnote}] This option changes the definition of +\ics{newacronym} and the way that acronyms are displayed. See \ifmakedtx{\autoref{sec:acronyms}}{\htmlref{later}{sec:acronyms}} +for further details. + +\item[\pkgopt{smallcaps}] This option changes the definition of +\ics{newacronym} and the way that acronyms are displayed. See \ifmakedtx{\autoref{sec:acronyms}}{\htmlref{later}{sec:acronyms}} +for further details. + +\item[\pkgopt{dua}] This option changes the definition of +\ics{newacronym} so that acronyms are always expanded. +See \ifmakedtx{\autoref{sec:acronyms}}{\htmlref{later}{sec:acronyms}} +for further details. + +\end{description}\ifmakedtx{}{\toTop} + +\subsection{Defining Glossary Entries} +\label{sec:newglosentry} + +All glossary entries that are used in a document must be defined in +the preamble. Only those entries that occur in the document +(using any of the commands described in \ifmakedtx{\autoref{sec:glslink}}{\htmlref{Links to Glossary Entries}{sec:glslink}} and +\ifmakedtx{\autoref{sec:glsadd}}{\htmlref{Adding an entry to the glossary without generating text}{sec:glsadd}}) will appear in the glossary. Each time an entry +is used in this way, a line is added to an associated glossary +(\filetype{.glo}) file, which then needs to be converted into a +corresponding \filetype{.gls} file which contains the typeset glossary +which is input by \ics{printglossary} or +\ics{printglossaries}. The Perl script \appname{makeglossaries} +can be used to call \appname{makeindex}, using a customised +\filetype{.ist} style file, for each of the glossaries that are defined +in the document. Note that there should be no need for you to +explicitly edit or input any of these external files. + +\DescribeMacro{\makeglossaries} +The command \cs{makeglossaries} must be placed in the preamble in +order to create the customised \appname{makeindex} \filetype{.ist} +style file and to ensure that glossary entries are written to the +appropriate output file. If you omit \cs{makeglossaries} none of the +glossaries will be created. Note that if your page numbers use a +hyphen compositor, you must set this by redefining +\DescribeMacro{\glscompositor}\cs{glscompositor} \emph{before} +using \cs{makeglossaries}: +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand*{\glscompositor}{-} +\end{verbatim} +(The default value of \cs{glscompositor} is a full stop.) + +\DescribeMacro{\newglossaryentry} +New glossary entries are defined using the command:\\[10pt] +\cs{newglossaryentry}\marg{label}\marg{key-val list}\\[10pt] The first +argument, \meta{label}, must be a unique label with which to identify +this entry. The second argument, \meta{key-val list}, is a +\meta{key}=\meta{value} list that supplies the relevant information +about this entry. There are two required fields: \gloskey{name} and +\gloskey{description}. Available fields are listed below: + +\begin{description} +\item[{\gloskey{name}}] The name of the entry (as it will appear in the +glossary). + +\item[{\gloskey{description}}] A brief description of this term (to +appear in the glossary). + +\item[{\gloskey{text}}] How this entry will appear in the document text +when using \ics{gls} (or one of its uppercase variants). If this +field is omitted, the value of the \gloskey{name} key is used. + +\item[{\gloskey{first}}] How the entry will appear in the document text +the first time it is used with \ics{gls} (or one of its uppercase +variants). If this field is omitted, the value of the \gloskey{text} +key is used. + +\item[{\gloskey{plural}}] How the entry will appear in the document text +when using \ics{glspl} (or one of its uppercase variants). +If this field is omitted, the value is obtained by appending an +\dq{s} to the value of the \gloskey{text} field. + +\item[{\gloskey{firstplural}}] How the entry will appear in the document +text the first time it is used with \ics{glspl} (or one of +its uppercase variants). If this field is omitted, the value is +obtained by appending an \dq{s} to the value of the \gloskey{first} +field. + +\item[{\gloskey{symbol}}] This field is provided to allow the user to +specify an associated symbol, but most glossary styles ignore +this value. If omitted, the value is set to \cs{relax}. + +\item[{\gloskey{sort}}] This value indicates how \appname{makeindex} +should sort this entry. If omitted, the value is given by the +\gloskey{name} field. This value is equivalent to +\appname{makeindex}'s \dq{actual} character (which is usually the +at-sign @ although the \sty{glossaries} package uses a different +symbol). + +\item[{\gloskey{type}}] This is the glossary type to which this entry +belongs. If omitted, the default glossary is assumed +(\texttt{type=main}). The list of acronyms type is given by +\ics{acronymtype} which will either be \texttt{main} or +\texttt{acronym}, depending on whether the \pkgopt{acronym} package +option was used. +\end{description} +Note that if the \gloskey{text} key (or the \gloskey{name} key, if the +\gloskey{text} key is omitted) starts with an accented letter, +you must group the accented letter, otherwise it will cause a +problem for \cs{Gls} and \cs{Glspl}. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\newglossaryentry{elite}{name={{\'e}lite}, +description={select group or class}} +\end{verbatim} +(Likewise for the \gloskey{plural}, \gloskey{first} and +\gloskey{firstplural} keys.) + +\DescribeMacro{\loadglsentries} +You can store all your glossary entry definitions in another +file, and use:\\[10pt] +\cs{loadglsentries}\oarg{type}\marg{filename}\\[10pt] +where \meta{filename} is the name of the file containing all the +\cs{newglossaryentry} commands. The optional argument +\meta{type} is the name of the glossary to which those entries +should belong, for those entries where the \gloskey{type} key has +been omitted. Note that only those entries that have been used +in the text will appear in the relevant glossaries.\ifmakedtx{}{\toTop} + +\subsection{Number lists} +\label{sec:numberlists} + +Each entry in the glossary has an associated \termdef{number list}. +By default, +these numbers refer to the pages on which that entry has been used +(using any of the commands described in \ifmakedtx{\autoref{sec:glslink}}{\htmlref{Links to Glossary Entries}{sec:glslink}} +and \ifmakedtx{\autoref{sec:glsadd}}{\htmlref{Adding an entry to the glossary without generating text}{sec:glsadd}}). The number list can be suppressed using +the \pkgopt{nonumberlist} package option, or an alternative counter +can be set as the default using the \pkgopt{counter} package option.\ifmakedtx{}{\toTop} + +\subsection{Links to Glossary Entries} +\label{sec:glslink} + +Once you have defined a glossary entry using +\ics{newglossaryentry}, you can refer to that entry in the +document using one of the commands listed in this section. The +text which appears at that point in the document when using +one of these commands is referred to as the +\termdef{link text} (even if there are no hyperlinks). + +The way the \term{link text} is displayed +depends on \DescribeMacro{\glstextformat}\cs{glstextformat}\marg{text}. +For example, to make all \term{link text} appear in a sans-serif +font, do: +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand*{\glstextformat}[1]{\textsf{#1}} +\end{verbatim} + +\DescribeMacro{\glslink} +The command:\\[10pt] +\cs{glslink}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\marg{text}\\[10pt] +will place \meta{text} in the document at that point and add +a line into the associated glossary file for the glossary entry +given by \meta{label}. If hyperlinks are supported, \meta{text} +will be a hyperlink to the relevant line in the glossary. The +optional argument \meta{options} must be a \meta{key}=\meta{value} +list which can take any of the following keys: + +\begin{description} +\item[{\gloskey[glslink]{format}}] This specifies how to format the +associated number for this entry in the glossary. This value is +equivalent to the \appname{makeindex} encap value, and (as with +\cs{index}) the value needs to be the name of a command \emph{without} +the initial backslash. As with \cs{index}, the characters \verb"(" and +\verb")" can also be used to specify the beginning and ending of a +number range. Again as with \cs{index}, the command should be the name +of a command which takes an argument (which will be the associated +number). Be careful not to use a declaration (such as \cs{bfseries}) +instead of a text block command (such as \cs{textbf}) as the effect is +not guaranteed to be localised. If you want to apply more than one +style to a given entry (e.g.\ \textbf{bold} and \emph{italic}) you will +need to create a command that applies both formats, e.g.\ +\begin{verbatim} +\newcommand*{\textbfem}[1]{\textbf{\emph{#1}}} +\end{verbatim} +and use that command. + +If you are using hyperlinks and you want to change the font of the +hyperlink, don't use \cs{hyperpage} (provided by the \isty{hyperref} +package) as the numbers may not refer to a page number. +Instead, the \sty{glossaries} package provides the following +number formats: +\begin{center} +\ifmakedtx{\begin{tabular}{@{\sffamily}lp{0.8\linewidth}} +hyperrm & The number is a serif hyperlink to the relevant part of the +document\\ +hypersf & The number is a sans-serif hyperlink to the relevant part +of the document\\ +hypertt & The number is a monospaced hyperlink to the relevant part +of the document\\ +hyperbf & The number is a bold hyperlink to the relevant part of the +document\\ +hypermd & The number is a medium weight hyperlink to the relevant +part of the document\\ +hyperit & The number is an italic hyperlink to the relevant +part of the document\\ +hypersl & The number is a slanted hyperlink to the relevant +part of the document\\ +hyperup & The number is an upright hyperlink to the relevant +part of the document\\ +hypersc & The number is a small caps hyperlink to the relevant +part of the document\\ +hyperemph & The number is an emphasized hyperlink to the relevant +part of the document +\end{tabular}}{\begin{tabular}{ll} +\texttt{hyperrm} & The number is a serif hyperlink to the relevant part of the +document\\ +\texttt{hypersf} & The number is a sans-serif hyperlink to the relevant part +of the document\\ +\texttt{hypertt} & The number is a monospaced hyperlink to the relevant part +of the document\\ +\texttt{hyperbf} & The number is a bold hyperlink to the relevant part of the +document\\ +\texttt{hypermd} & The number is a medium weight hyperlink to the relevant +part of the document\\ +\texttt{hyperit} & The number is an italic hyperlink to the relevant +part of the document\\ +\texttt{hypersl} & The number is a slanted hyperlink to the relevant +part of the document\\ +\texttt{hyperup} & The number is an upright hyperlink to the relevant +part of the document\\ +\texttt{hypersc} & The number is a small caps hyperlink to the relevant +part of the document\\ +\texttt{hyperemph} & The number is an emphasized hyperlink to the relevant +part of the document +\end{tabular}} +\end{center} +Note that if the \cs{hyperlink} command hasn't been defined, +the \texttt{hyper}\meta{xx} formats are equivalent to the +analogous \cs{text}\meta{xx} font commands. If you want to +make a new format, you will need to define a command which takes +one argument and use that; for example, if you want the associated +number in the glossary to be in a bold sans-serif font, you can define a +command called, say, \cs{hyperbsf}: +\begin{verbatim} +\newcommand{\hyperbsf}[1]{\textbf{\hypersf{#1}}} +\end{verbatim} +and then use \texttt{hyperbsf} as the value for the \gloskey{format} +key.\ifmakedtx{ (See also \autoref{sec:printglos}.)}{} + +\item[{\gloskey[glslink]{counter}}] This specifies which counter +to use for the associated number for this glossary entry. (See also +\ifmakedtx{\autoref{sec:numberlists}}{\htmlref{Number Lists}{sec:numberlists}}.) + +\item[{\gloskey[glslink]{hyper}}] This is a boolean key which can +be used to enable/disable the hyperlink to the relevant entry +in the glossary. (Note that setting \texttt{hyper=true} will have no +effect if \cs{hyperlink} has not been defined.) The default +value is \texttt{hyper=true}. + +\end{description} +\DescribeMacro{\glslink*} +There is also a starred version:\\[10pt] +\cs{glslink*}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\marg{text}\\[10pt] +which is equivalent to \cs{glslink}, except it sets +\texttt{hyper=false}. + +\DescribeMacro{\gls} +The command:\\[10pt] +\cs{gls}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +is the same as \cs{glslink}, except that the \term{link text} +is determined from the values of the \gloskey{text} and +\gloskey{first} keys supplied when the entry was defined using +\ics{newglossaryentry}. There are two uppercase variants:\\[10pt] +\DescribeMacro{\Gls} +\cs{Gls}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +and\\[10pt] +\DescribeMacro{\GLS} +\cs{GLS}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +which make the first letter of the link or all the link text +uppercase, respectively. + +The final optional argument \meta{insert}, allows you to insert +some additional text into the link text. By default, this will +append \meta{insert} at the end of the link text. The first optional +argument \meta{options} is the same as the optional argument to +\ics{glslink}. As with \cs{glslink}, these commands also have +a starred version that disable the hyperlink. + +There are also analogous plural forms:\\[10pt] +\DescribeMacro{\glspl} +\cs{glspl}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +\DescribeMacro{\Glspl} +\cs{Glspl}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +\DescribeMacro{\GLSpl} +\cs{GLSpl}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +These determine the link text from the \gloskey{plural} and +\gloskey{firstplural} keys supplied when the entry was first +defined. As before, these commands also have +a starred version that disable the hyperlink. + +\DescribeMacro{\glstext}The command:\\[10pt] +\cs{glstext}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +is similar to \ics{gls} except that it always uses the value +of the \gloskey{text} key and does not mark the entry as +having been used. + +There are also analogous commands:\\[10pt] +\DescribeMacro{\Glstext} +\cs{Glstext}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +\DescribeMacro{\GLStext} +\cs{GLStext}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable +the hyperlink. + +\DescribeMacro{\glsfirst}The command:\\[10pt] +\cs{glsfirst}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +is similar to \ics{gls} except that it always uses the value +of the \gloskey{first} key and does not mark the entry as +having been used. + +There are also analogous commands:\\[10pt] +\DescribeMacro{\Glsfirst} +\cs{Glsfirst}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +\DescribeMacro{\GLSfirst} +\cs{GLSfirst}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable +the hyperlink. + +\DescribeMacro{\glsplural}The command:\\[10pt] +\cs{glsplural}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +is similar to \ics{gls} except that it always uses the value +of the \gloskey{plural} key and does not mark the entry as +having been used. + +There are also analogous commands:\\[10pt] +\DescribeMacro{\Glsplural} +\cs{Glsplural}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +\DescribeMacro{\GLSplural} +\cs{GLSplural}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable +the hyperlink. + +\DescribeMacro{\glsfirstplural}The command:\\[10pt] +\cs{glsfirstplural}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +is similar to \ics{gls} except that it always uses the value +of the \gloskey{firstplural} key and does not mark the entry as +having been used. + +There are also analogous commands:\\[10pt] +\DescribeMacro{\Glsfirstplural} +\cs{Glsfirstplural}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +\DescribeMacro{\GLSfirstplural} +\cs{GLSfirstplural}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable +the hyperlink. + +\DescribeMacro{\glsname}The command:\\[10pt] +\cs{glsname}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +is similar to \ics{gls} except that it always uses the value +of the \gloskey{name} key and does not mark the entry as +having been used. Note: if you want to use this command and the +\gloskey{name} key contains commands, you will have to disable the +\ifmakedtx{\hyperlink{sanitize}{sanitization}}{\htmlref{sanitization}{sanitize}} +of the \gloskey{name} key and protect fragile commands. + +There are also analogous commands:\\[10pt] +\DescribeMacro{\Glsname} +\cs{Glsname}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +\DescribeMacro{\GLSname} +\cs{GLSname}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable +the hyperlink. + +\DescribeMacro{\glssymbol}The command:\\[10pt] +\cs{glssymbol}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +is similar to \ics{gls} except that it always uses the value +of the \gloskey{symbol} key and does not mark the entry as +having been used. Note: if you want to use this command and the +\gloskey{symbol} key contains commands, you will have to disable the +\ifmakedtx{\hyperlink{sanitize}{sanitization}}{\htmlref{sanitization}{sanitize}} +of the \gloskey{symbol} key and protect fragile commands. + +There are also analogous commands:\\[10pt] +\DescribeMacro{\Glssymbol} +\cs{Glssymbol}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +\DescribeMacro{\GLSsymbol} +\cs{GLSsymbol}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable +the hyperlink. + +\DescribeMacro{\glsdesc}The command:\\[10pt] +\cs{glsdesc}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +is similar to \ics{gls} except that it always uses the value +of the \gloskey{description} key and does not mark the entry as +having been used. Note: if you want to use this command and the +\gloskey{description} key contains commands, you will have to disable the +\ifmakedtx{\hyperlink{sanitize}{sanitization}}{\htmlref{sanitization}{sanitize}} +of the \gloskey{description} key and protect fragile commands. + +There are also analogous commands:\\[10pt] +\DescribeMacro{\Glsdesc} +\cs{Glsdesc}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +\DescribeMacro{\GLSdesc} +\cs{GLSdesc}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable +the hyperlink. + +\ifmakedtx{}{\toTop} + +\subsubsection{Changing the format of the link text} +\label{sec:glsdisplay} + +The format of the \term{link text} for \ics{gls}, \ics{glspl} +and their uppercase variants is governed by two commands: +\DescribeMacro{\glsdisplayfirst}\cs{glsdisplayfirst}, which is used the +first time a glossary entry is used in the text and +\DescribeMacro{\glsdisplay}\cs{glsdisplay}, which is used subsequently. +Both commands take four arguments: the first is either the singular or +plural form given by the \gloskey{text}, \gloskey{plural}, +\gloskey{first} or \gloskey{firstplural} keys (used when the term was +defined) depending on context; the second argument is the term's +description (as supplied by the \gloskey{description} key); the third +argument is the symbol associated with the term (as supplied by the +\gloskey{symbol} key) and the fourth argument is the additional text +supplied in the final optional argument to \cs{gls} or +\cs{glspl} (or their uppercase variants). The default definitions +of \cs{glsdisplay} and \cs{glsdisplayfirst} simply +print the first argument immediately followed by the fourth argument. +The remaining arguments are ignored. + +For example, suppose you want a glossary of measurements and +units, you can use the \gloskey{symbol} key to store the unit: +\begin{verbatim} +\newglossaryentry{distance}{name=distance, +description={The length between two points}, +symbol={km}} +\end{verbatim} +and now suppose you want \verb|\gls{distance}| to produce +\dq{distance (km)} on first use, then you can redefine +\cs{glsdisplayfirst} as follows: +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand{\glsdisplayfirst}[4]{#1#4 (#3)} +\end{verbatim} +Note that the additional text is placed after \verb|#1|, so +\verb|\gls{distance}['s]| will produce \dq{distance's (km)} +rather than \dq{distance (km)'s} which looks a bit odd (even though +it may be in the context of \dq{the distance (km) is measured between +the two points} --- but in this instance it may be better not to +use a contraction). + +Note also that all of the \term{link text} will be formatted according +to \ics{glstextformat} (described earlier). So if you do, say: +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand{\glstextformat}[1]{\textbf{#1}} +\renewcommand{\glsdisplayfirst}[4]{#1#4 (#3)} +\end{verbatim} +then \verb|\gls{distance}| will produce \dq{\textbf{distance (km)}}. + +If you have multiple glossaries, changing \cs{glsdisplayfirst} and +\cs{glsdisplay} will change the way entries for all of the +glossaries appear when using commands \cs{gls}, \cs{glspl} and their +uppercase variants. If you only +want the change to affect entries for a given glossary, then you need +to use \DescribeMacro{\defglsdisplay}\cs{defglsdisplay} and +\DescribeMacro{\defglsdisplayfirst}\cs{defglsdisplayfirst} instead +of redefining \cs{glsdisplay} and \cs{glsdisplayfirst}. + +Both \cs{defglsdisplay} and \cs{defglsdisplayfirst} take two arguments: +the first (which is optional) is the glossary name\footnote{\texttt{main} for the main +(default) glossary, \cs{acronymtype} for the list of acronyms, or the +name supplied in the first mandatory argument to \cs{newglossary} for +additional glossaries.} and the second is how the term should be +displayed when it is invoked using commands \cs{gls}, +\cs{glspl} and their uppercase variants. This is similar to the way \cs{glsdisplayfirst} was +redefined above. + +For example, suppose you have created a new glossary called +\texttt{notation} and you want to change the way the entry is +displayed on first use so that it includes the symbol, you can +do: +\begin{verbatim} +\defglsdisplayfirst[notation]{#1#4 (denoted #3)} +\end{verbatim} +Now suppose you have defined an entry as follows: +\begin{verbatim} +\newglossaryentry{set}{type=notation, +name=set, +description={A collection of objects}, +symbol={$S$}, +} +\end{verbatim} +The first time you reference this entry using \cs{gls} it +will be displayed as: \dq{set (denoted \ifmakedtx{$S$}{\textit{S}})} +(similarly for \cs{glspl} and the uppercase variants). + +Remember that if you use the \gloskey{symbol} key, you need to use a +glossary style that displays the symbol, as many of the styles ignore +it. In addition, if you want either the description or symbol to appear +in the \term{link text}, you will have to disable the +\ifmakedtx{\hyperlink{sanitize}{sanitization}}{\htmlref{sanitization}{sanitize}} +of these keys and protect fragile commands.\ifmakedtx{}{\toTop} + +\subsubsection{Enabling and disabling hyperlinks to glossary entries} + +If you load the \isty{hyperref} or \isty{html} packages prior to +loading the \sty{glossaries} package, commands such as \ics{glslink} +and \ics{gls}, described above, will automatically have hyperlinks +to the relevant glossary entry, unless the \gloskey[glslink]{hyper} +option has been set to \texttt{false}. You can disable or enable links using:\\[10pt] +\DescribeMacro{\glsdisablehyper}\cs{glsdisablehyper}\\[10pt] +and\\[10pt] +\DescribeMacro{\glsenablehyper}\cs{glsenablehyper}\\[10pt] +respectively. The effect can be localised by placing the commands +within a group. Note that you should only use \cs{glsenablehyper} +if the commands \ics{hyperlink} and \ics{hypertarget} have been +defined (for example, by the \isty{hyperref} package). + +\subsection{Adding an entry to the glossary without generating text} +\label{sec:glsadd} + +\DescribeMacro{\glsadd} +It is possible to add a line in the glossary file without +generating any text at that point in the document using:\\[10pt] +\cs{glsadd}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\\[10pt] +This is similar to \ics{glslink}, only it doesn't produce +any text (so therefore, there is no \gloskey[glslink]{hyper} key +available in \meta{options} but all the other options that can +be used with \cs{glslink} can be passed to \cs{glsadd}). + +\DescribeMacro{\glsaddall} +To add all entries that have been defined, use:\\[10pt] +\cs{glsaddall}\oarg{glossary list}\\[10pt] +If there are multiple glossaries, you can specify to add only +those entries which belong to the glossaries listed in +\meta{glossary list} (which must be a comma separated list of +glossary names). For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\glsaddall[notation] +\end{verbatim} +will add all the entries that have been defined for the glossary +labelled \dq{notation}.\ifmakedtx{}{\toTop} + +\subsection{Displaying a glossary} + +\DescribeMacro{\printglossaries} +The command \cs{printglossaries} will display all the +defined glossaries. Note that no glossaries will appear until +you have either used the Perl script \appname{makeglossaries} +or have directly used \appname{makeindex} (as described in +\ifmakedtx{\autoref{sec:makeglossaries}}{\htmlref{Generating the Associated Glossary Files}{sec:makeglossaries}}). If the glossary still +does not appear after you re-\LaTeX\ your document, check +the \appname{makeindex} log files to see if there is a problem. +Remember that you also need to use the command \ics{makeglossaries} in +the preamble to enable the glossaries. + +\DescribeMacro{\printglossary} +An individual glossary is displayed using:\\[10pt] +\cs{printglossary}\oarg{options}\\[10pt] +where \meta{options} is a \meta{key}=\meta{value} list of options. +The following keys are available: +\begin{description} +\item[{\gloskey[printglossary]{type}}] The value of this key +specifies which glossary to print. If omitted, the default +glossary is assumed. For example, to print the list of acronyms: +\begin{verbatim} +\printglossary[type=\acronymtype] +\end{verbatim} + +\item[{\gloskey[printglossary]{title}}] This is the glossary's +title (overriding the title specified when the glossary was +defined). + +\item[{\gloskey[printglossary]{toctitle}}] This is the title +to use for the table of contents (if the \pkgopt{toc} package +option has been used). If omitted, the glossary title is used. + +\item[{\gloskey[printglossary]{style}}] This specifies which +glossary style to use for this glossary, overriding the effect +of the \pkgopt{style} option or \ics{glossarystyle}. +\end{description} + +\DescribeMacro{\glossarypreamble} +Information can be added to the start of the glossary by redefining +\cs{glossarypreamble}. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand{\glossarypreamble}{Numbers in italic indicate +primary definitions.} +\end{verbatim} +This needs to be done before the glossary is displayed using +\cs{printglossaries} or \cs{printglossary}. Note that if you +want a different preamble for each glossary, you will need to +use a separate \cs{printglossary} for each glossary and change +the definition of \cs{glossarypreamble} between each glossary. +For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand{\glossarypreamble}{Numbers in italic indicate +primary definitions.} +\printglossary +\renewcommand{\glossarypreamble}{} +\printglossary[type=acronym] +\end{verbatim} +Alternatively, you can do something like: +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand{\glossarypreamble}{Numbers in italic indicate +primary definitions.\gdef\glossarypreamble{}} +\printglossaries +\end{verbatim} +which will print the preamble text for the first glossary and +change the preamble to do nothing for subsequent glossaries. +(Note that \cs{gdef} is required as the glossary is placed within +a group.) + +\DescribeMacro{\glossarypostamble}There is an analogous command +called \cs{glossarypostamble} which is placed at the end of each +glossary.\ifmakedtx{}{\toTop} + +\subsubsection{Changing the way the entry name appears in the glossary} +\label{sec:glsnamefont} + +\DescribeMacro{\glsnamefont}Within each glossary, each entry name is +formatted according to \cs{glsnamefont} which takes one argument: the +entry name. This command is always used regardless of the glossary +style. By default, \cs{glsnamefont} simply displays its argument in +whatever the surrounding font happens to be. This means that in the +list styles the name will appear in bold, since the name is placed in +the optional argument of \cs{item}, whereas in the tabular styles the +name will appear in the normal font. + +For example, suppose you want all the entry names to appear in +medium weight small caps, then you can do: +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand{\glsnamefont}[1]{\textsc{\mdseries #1}} +\end{verbatim} +\ifmakedtx{}{\toTop} + +\subsection{Defining New Glossaries} + +\DescribeMacro{\newglossary} +A new glossary can be defined using:\\[10pt] +\cs{newglossary}\oarg{log-ext}\marg{name}\marg{in-ext}\marg{out-ext}\marg{title}\oarg{counter}\\[10pt] +where \meta{name} is label to assign to this glossary. The arguments +\meta{in-ext} and \meta{out-ext} specify the extensions to give to the +input and output files for that glossary, \meta{title} is the default +title for this new glossary and the final optional argument +\meta{counter} specifies which counter to use for the associated number +lists\iterm{number list} (see also \ifmakedtx{\autoref{sec:numberlists}}{\htmlref{Number Lists}{sec:numberlists}}.) The +first optional argument specifies the extension for the +\appname{makeindex} transcript file (this information is only used by +\appname{makeglossaries} which picks up the information from the +auxiliary file.) + +Note that the main (default) glossary is automatically created as: +\begin{verbatim} +\newglossary{main}{gls}{glo}{\glossaryname} +\end{verbatim} +so it can be identified by the label \texttt{main}. Using the +\pkgopt{acronym} package option is equivalent to: +\begin{verbatim} +\newglossary[alg]{acronym}{acr}{acn}{\acronymname} +\end{verbatim} +so it can be identified by the label \texttt{acronym}. If you are +not sure whether the \pkgopt{acronym} option has been used, you +can identify the list of acronyms by the command +\DescribeMacro{\acronymtype}\cs{acronymtype} which is set to +\texttt{acronym}, if the \pkgopt{acronym} option has been used, +otherwise it is set to \texttt{main}.\ifmakedtx{}{\toTop} + +\subsection{Acronyms} +\label{sec:acronyms} + +\DescribeMacro{\newacronym} +As you may have noticed in \ifmakedtx{\autoref{sec:newglosentry}}{\htmlref{Defining Glossary Entries}{sec:newglosentry}}, when you +specify a new entry, you can specify alternate text to use when +the term is first used in the document. This provides a useful +means to define acronyms. The \sty{glossaries} package defines +the command:\\[10pt] +\cs{newacronym}\oarg{key-val list}\marg{label}\marg{abbrv}\marg{long}\\[10pt] +This is equivalent to:\vskip5pt +\begin{ttfamily}\par\noindent +\cs{newglossaryentry}\textrm{\marg{label}}\{type=\cs{acronymtype},\\ +name=\textrm{\marg{abbrv}},\\ +description=\textrm{\marg{long}},\\ +text=\textrm{\marg{abbrv}},\\ +first=\{\textrm{\meta{long}} (\textrm{\meta{abbrv}})\},\\ +plural=\{\textrm{\meta{abbrv}}s\},\\ +firstplural=\{\textrm{\meta{long}}s (\textrm{\meta{abbrv}}s)\},\\ +\textrm{\meta{key-val list}}\}\par +\end{ttfamily} +\vskip5pt +As mentioned in the previous section, the command \cs{acronymtype} is +the name of the glossary in which the acronyms should appear. If the +\pkgopt{acronym} package option has been used, this will be +\texttt{acronym}, otherwise it will be \texttt{main}. The acronyms can +then be used in exactly the same way as any other glossary entry. +For example, the following defines the acronym IDN: +\begin{verbatim} +\newacronym{idn}{IDN}{identification number} +\end{verbatim} +This is equivalent to: +\begin{verbatim} +\newglossaryentry{idn}{type=\acronymtype, +name={IDN}, +description={identification number}, +text={IDN}, +first={identification number (IDN)}, +plural={IDNs}, +firstplural={identification numbers (IDNs)}} +\end{verbatim} +so \verb|\gls{idn}| will produce \dq{identification number (IDN)} on +first use and \dq{IDN} on subsequent uses. + +The \sty{glossaries} package has options that change the +definition of \ics{newacronym} for common acronym formats. These +options also change the way the link text is displayed for the +acronyms. + +Table~\ref{tab:acronymsettings} lists the package options and +how the keys are used to store \meta{long} (the long form) and +\meta{abbrv} (the short form). Note that the \pkgopt{smallcaps} +option redefines \ics{acronymfont} so that it sets its argument +in small captials otherwise \cs{acronymfont} simply displays its +argument in the surrounding font. Note also that if none of +the package options \pkgopt{smallcaps}, \pkgopt{description} +or \pkgopt{footnote} are used, \cs{acronymfont} is not used, so +changing the definition of \cs{acronymfont} will have no effect +under such circumstances. + +\begin{table}[htbp] +\caption{Package options governing acronyms and how the information +is stored in the glossary keys} +\label{tab:acronymsettings} +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{lllll} +\bfseries Package Option & +\gloskey{first} & +\gloskey{text} & +\gloskey{description} & +\gloskey{symbol}\\ +\pkgopt{description},\pkgopt{footnote} & +\meta{abbrv} & +\meta{abbrv} & +user supplied & +\meta{long}\\ +\pkgopt{description},\pkgopt{dua} & +\meta{long} & +\meta{long} & +user supplied & +\meta{abbrv}\\ +\pkgopt{description} & +\meta{long} & +\meta{abbrv} & +user supplied & +\meta{abbrv}\\ +\pkgopt{footnote} & +\meta{abbrv} & +\meta{abbrv} & +\meta{long} & + \\ +\pkgopt{smallcaps} & +\meta{long} & +\meta{abbrv} & +\meta{long} & +\meta{abbrv}\\ +\pkgopt{dua} & +\meta{long} & +\meta{long} & +\meta{long} & +\meta{abbrv}\\ +None of the above& +\meta{long} (\meta{abbrv}) & +\meta{abbrv} & +\meta{long} & +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +\end{table} + +Each of the package options \pkgopt{smallcaps}, \pkgopt{footnote} +and \pkgopt{description} use \ics{defglsdisplay} and +\ics{defglsdisplayfirst} (described \ifmakedtx{in +\autoref{sec:glsdisplay}}{\htmlref{earlier}{sec:glsdisplay}}) +to change the way the link text is displayed. + +\begin{description} +\item[\pkgopt{description},\pkgopt{footnote}]\ifmakedtx{\mbox{}\par}{} +When these two options are used together, the first use displays +the entry as:\\[10pt] +\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\cs{footnote}\marg{long} +\\[10pt] +while subsequent use displays the entry as:\\[10pt] +\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\\[10pt] +where \meta{insert} indicates the text supplied in the final +optional argument to \cs{gls}, \cs{glspl} or their uppercase +variants. + +Note also that when these two package options are used (in the +given order), the \sty{glossaries} package additionally implements the +\pkgopt{sanitize} option using +\ipkgopt[description]{sanitize}\ipkgopt[symbol]{sanitize}\verb|sanitize={description=false,symbol=false}|, so +remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. + +\item[dua]\ifmakedtx{\mbox{}\par}{} +The \pkgopt{dua} package option always displays the expanded +form and so may not be used with \pkgopt{footnote} or +\pkgopt{smallcaps}. Both first use and subsequent use displays the +entry in the form:\\[10pt] +\meta{long}\meta{insert}\\[10pt] +If the \pkgopt{description} option is also used, the \gloskey{name} +key is set to the long form, otherwise the \gloskey{name} key is +set to the short form and the \gloskey{description} key is set to +the long form. + +\item[\pkgopt{description}]\ifmakedtx{\mbox{}\par}{} +This option displays the entry on first use as:\\[10pt] +\meta{long}\meta{insert} (\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv})\\[10pt] +while subsequent use displays the entry as:\\[10pt] +\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\\[10pt] +Note also that if this package option is used, the \sty{glossaries} +package additionally implements the option +\ipkgopt[symbol]{sanitize}\verb|sanitize={symbol=false}|, so +remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. + +\item[\pkgopt{footnote}]\ifmakedtx{\mbox{}\par}{} +This option displays the entry on first use as:\\[10pt] +\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\cs{footnote}\marg{long}\\[10pt] +while subsequent use displays the entry as:\\[10pt] +\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert} + +Note also that if this package option is used, the \sty{glossaries} +package additionally implements the option +\ipkgopt[description]{sanitize}\verb|sanitize={description=false}|, so +remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. + +\item[\pkgopt{smallcaps}]\ifmakedtx{\mbox{}\par}{} +If neither the \pkgopt{footnote} nor \pkgopt{description} options +have been set, this option displays the entry on first use as:\\[10pt] +\meta{long}\meta{insert} (\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv})\\[10pt] +while subsequent use displays the entry as:\\[10pt] +\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\\[10pt] +where \cs{acronymfont} is set to \cs{textsc}. + +Note also that if this package option is used, the \sty{glossaries} +package additionally implements the option +\ipkgopt[symbol]{sanitize}\verb|sanitize={symbol=false}|, so +remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. + +\item[None of the above]\ifmakedtx{\mbox{}\par}{} +If none of the package options \pkgopt{smallcaps}, \pkgopt{footnote} +or \pkgopt{description} are used, then on first use the entry is +displayed as:\\[10pt] +\meta{long} (\meta{abbrv})\meta{insert}\\[10pt] +while subsequent use displays the entry as:\\[10pt] +\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\\[10pt] +\meta{abbrv}\meta{insert} +\end{description} + +Recall from \ifmakedtx{\autoref{sec:glslink}}{\htmlref{earlier}{sec:glslink}} +that you can access the values of individual keys using commands +like \ics{glstext}, so it is possible to use these commands to +print just the long form or just the abbreviation without affecting +the flag that determines whether the entry has been used. However +the keys that store the long and short form vary depending on +the acronym style, so the \sty{glossaries} package provides +commands that are set according to the package options. These are +as follows: +\vspace{10pt}\par\noindent +\DescribeMacro{\acrshort} +\cs{acrshort}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\ +\DescribeMacro{\Acrshort} +\cs{ACRshort}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\ +\DescribeMacro{\ACRshort} +\cs{ACRshort}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +Print the abbreviated version with a hyperlink (if necessary) to the +relevant entry in the glossary. This is usually equivalent to +\ics{glstext} (or its uppercase variants) but may additionally +put the link text within the argument to \ics{acronymfont}. +\vspace{10pt}\par\noindent +\DescribeMacro{\acrlong} +\cs{acrlong}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\ +\DescribeMacro{\Acrlong} +\cs{ACRlong}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\ +\DescribeMacro{\ACRlong} +\cs{ACRlong}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +Print the long version with a hyperlink (if necessary) to the +relevant entry in the glossary. This is may be equivalent to +\ics{glsdesc}, \ics{glssymbol} or \ics{glsfirst} (or their uppercase +variants), depending on package options. +\vspace{10pt}\par\noindent +\DescribeMacro{\acrfull} +\cs{acrfull}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\ +\DescribeMacro{\Acrfull} +\cs{ACRfull}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\ +\DescribeMacro{\ACRfull} +\cs{ACRfull}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +Print the long version followed by the abbreviation in brackets +with a hyperlink (if necessary) to the +relevant entry in the glossary. + +Note that if you change the definition of \ics{newacronym}, you +may additionally need to change the above commands as well as +the changing way the text is displayed using \ics{defglsdisplay} +and \ics{defglsdisplayfirst}. + +\ifmakedtx{}{\toTop} + +\subsection{Unsetting and resetting entry flags} + +When using commands such as \ics{gls} it is possible that you may want +to use the value given by the \gloskey{first} key, even though you have +already used the glossary entry. Conversely, you may want to use the +value given by the \gloskey{text} key, even though you haven't used the +glossary entry. The former can be achieved by one of the following +commands:\\[10pt] +\DescribeMacro{\glsreset}\cs{glsreset}\marg{label}\\ +\DescribeMacro{\glslocalreset}\cs{glslocalreset}\marg{label}\\[10pt] +while the latter can be achieved by one of the following commands:\\[10pt] +\DescribeMacro{\glsunset}\cs{glsunset}\marg{label}\\ +\DescribeMacro{\glslocalunset}\cs{glslocalunset}\marg{label} +\\[10pt] +You can determine whether an entry has been used using:\\[10pt] +\DescribeMacro{\ifglsused} +\cs{ifglsused}\marg{label}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}\\[10pt] +where \meta{label} is the label of the required entry. If the +entry has been used, \meta{true part} will be done, otherwise +\meta{false part} will be done. +\ifmakedtx{}{\toTop} + +\subsection{Glossary Styles} +\label{sec:styles} +The \sty{glossaries} package comes with some pre-defined +glossary styles. These are as follows: +\begin{description} +\item[list] The \glostyle{list} style uses the \envname{description} +environment. The entry name is placed in the optional argument +of the \cs{item} command (so it will appear in bold by +default). The description follows, and then the associated number +list for that entry. + +\item[listgroup] The \glostyle{listgroup} style is like +\glostyle{list} but the glossary groups have headings. + +\item[listhypergroup] The \glostyle{listhypergroup} style is like +\glostyle{listgroup} but has a set of links to the glossary +groups. + +\item[altlist] The \glostyle{altlist} style is like \glostyle{list} +but the description is placed on the following line. + +\item[altlistgroup] The \glostyle{altlistgroup} style is like +\glostyle{altlist} but the glossary groups have headings. + +\item[altlisthypergroup] The \glostyle{altlisthypergroup} style is like +\glostyle{altlistgroup} but has a set of links to the glossary +groups. + +\item[listdotted] This style uses the \envname{description} +environment. Each entry starts with \verb|\item[]|, followed by the +name followed by a dotted line, followed by the description. Note that +this style ignores both the \term{number list} and the symbol. The +length \DescribeMacro{\glslistdottedwidth}\cs{glslistdottedwidth} +governs where the description should start.\footnote{This style was +supplied by Axel~Menzel.} + +\item[long] The \glostyle{long} style uses the \envname{longtable} +environment (defined by the \isty{longtable} package). It has two +columns: the first column contains the entry's name and the second +column contains the description followed by the \term{number list}. + +\item[longborder] The \glostyle{longborder} style is like +\glostyle{long} but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. + +\item[longheader] The \glostyle{longheader} style is like +\glostyle{long} but has a header row. + +\item[longheaderborder] The \glostyle{longheaderborder} style is +like \glostyle{longheader} but has horizontal and vertical lines +around it. + +\item[long3col] The \glostyle{long3col} style is like +\glostyle{long} but has three columns. The first column contains +the entry's name, the second column contains the description +and the third column contains the \term{number list}. + +\item[long3colborder] The \glostyle{long3colborder} style is like +the \glostyle{long3col} style but has horizontal and vertical +lines around it. + +\item[long3colheader] The \glostyle{long3colheader} style is like +\glostyle{long3col} but has a header row. + +\item[long3colheaderborder] The \glostyle{long3colheaderborder} style is +like \glostyle{long3colheader} but has horizontal and vertical lines +around it. + +\item[long4col] The \glostyle{long4col} style is like +\glostyle{long3col} but has an additional column in which the +entry's associated symbol appears. + +\item[long4colborder] The \glostyle{long4colborder} style is like +the \glostyle{long4col} style but has horizontal and vertical +lines around it. + +\item[long4colheader] The \glostyle{long4colheader} style is like +\glostyle{long4col} but has a header row. + +\item[long4colheaderborder] The \glostyle{long4colheaderborder} style is +like \glostyle{long4colheader} but has horizontal and vertical lines +around it. + +\item[super] The \glostyle{super} style uses the \envname{supertabular} +environment (defined by the \isty{supertabular} package). It has two +columns: the first column contains the entry's name and the second +column contains the description followed by the \term{number list}. + +\item[superborder] The \glostyle{superborder} style is like +\glostyle{super} but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. + +\item[superheader] The \glostyle{superheader} style is like +\glostyle{super} but has a header row. + +\item[superheaderborder] The \glostyle{superheaderborder} style is +like \glostyle{superheader} but has horizontal and vertical lines +around it. + +\item[super3col] The \glostyle{super3col} style is like +\glostyle{super} but has three columns. The first column contains +the entry's name, the second column contains the description +and the third column contains the \iterm{number list}. + +\item[super3colborder] The \glostyle{super3colborder} style is like +the \glostyle{super3col} style but has horizontal and vertical +lines around it. + +\item[super3colheader] The \glostyle{super3colheader} style is like +\glostyle{super3col} but has a header row. + +\item[super3colheaderborder] The \glostyle{super3colheaderborder} style +is like \glostyle{super3colheader} but has horizontal and vertical +lines around it. + +\item[super4col] The \glostyle{super4col} style is like +\glostyle{super3col} but has an additional column in which the +entry's associated symbol appears. + +\item[super4colborder] The \glostyle{super4colborder} style is like +the \glostyle{super4col} style but has horizontal and vertical +lines around it. + +\item[super4colheader] The \glostyle{super4colheader} style is like +\glostyle{super4col} but has a header row. + +\item[super4colheaderborder] The \glostyle{super4colheaderborder} style +is like \glostyle{super4colheader} but has horizontal and vertical +lines around it. + +\end{description} + +The glossary style can be set using the \pkgopt{style} package option +or using the \gloskey[printglossary]{style} key in the optional +argument to \ics{printglossary} or using the command:\\[10pt] +\DescribeMacro{\glossarystyle}\cs{glossarystyle}\marg{style-name}\\[10pt] + + \changes{1.03}{2007 July 4}{'glspostdescription added} +All the styles except for the three- and four-column styles and the +\glostyle{listdotted} style use the command +\DescribeMacro{\glspostdescription}\cs{glspostdescription} after the +description. This simply displays a full stop by default. To eliminate +this full stop (or replace it with something else, say a comma), you +will need to redefine \cs{glspostdescription} before the glossary is +displayed.\ifmakedtx{}{\toTop} + +\subsection{Defining your own glossary style} + +If the predefined styles don't fit your requirements, you can +define your own style using\DescribeMacro{\newglossarystyle}:\\[10pt] +\cs{newglossarystyle}\marg{name}\marg{definitions}\\[10pt] +where \meta{name} is the name of the new glossary style (to be +used in \cs{glossarystyle}). The second argument \meta{definitions}, +needs to redefine all of the following: + +\begin{description} +\item +\DescribeEnv{theglossary} +\envname{theglossary}\par\noindent +This environment defines how the main body of the glossary should +be typeset. Note that this does not include the section heading, +the glossary preamble (defined by \cs{glossarypreamble}) or the +glossary postamble (defined by \cs{glossarypostamble}.) For example, +the \glostyle{list} style uses the \envname{description} environment, +so the \envname{theglossary} environment is simply redefined to begin +and end the \envname{description} environment. + +\item +\DescribeMacro{\glossaryheader} +\cs{glossaryheader}\par\noindent +This macro indicates what to do at the start of the main body +of the glossary. Note that this is not the same as +\cs{glossarypreamble}, which should not be affected by changes in +the glossary style. The \glostyle{list} glossary style redefines +\cs{glossaryheader} to do nothing, whereas the \glostyle{longheader} +glossary style redefines \cs{glossaryheader} to do a header row. + +\item +\DescribeMacro{\glsgroupheading} +\cs{glsgroupheading}\marg{label}\par\noindent +This macro indicates what to do at the start of each logical block +within the main body of the glossary. The glossary is sub-divided into +twenty-eight logical blocks that are determined by the first character +of the \gloskey{sort} key (or \gloskey{name} key if the \gloskey{sort} +key is omitted). The sub-divisions are in the following order: symbols, +numbers, A, \ldots, Z. Note that the argument to \cs{glsgroupheading} +is a label \emph{not} the group title. The group title can be obtained +via \cs{glsgetgrouptitle}\marg{label}, and a navigation hypertarget can +be created using \cs{glsnavhypertarget}\marg{label}. Most of the +predefined glossary styles redefine \cs{glsgroupheading} to simply +ignore its argument. The \glostyle{listhypergroup} style redefines +\cs{glsgroupheading} as follows: +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{% +\item[\glsnavhypertarget{##1}{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}]} +\end{verbatim} +See also \cs{glsgroupskip} below. (Note that command definitions within +\cs{newglossarystyle} must use \verb|##1| etc instead of \verb|#1| etc.) + +\item +\DescribeMacro{\glsgroupskip} +\cs{glsgroupskip}\par\noindent +This macro determines what to do after one logical group but before +the header for the next logical group. The \glostyle{list} glossary +style simply redefines \cs{glsgroupskip} to be \cs{indexspace}. + +\item +\DescribeMacro{\glossaryentryfield} +\cs{glossaryentryfield}\marg{label}\marg{formatted +name}\marg{description}\marg{symbol} +\marg{number list}\par\noindent +This macro indicates what to do for a given glossary entry. +Note that \meta{formatted name} will always be in the form +\cs{glsnamefont}\marg{name}. This allows the user to set a given +font for the entry name, regardless of the glossary style used. +Note that \meta{label} is the label used when the glossary entry +was defined via either \cs{newglossaryentry} or \cs{newacronym}. +Each time you use a glossary entry it creates a +link\footnote{if the document doesn't have hyperlinks enabled +\cs{@glslink} ignores the label and simply typesets the text.} +using \cs{@glslink}\marg{label}\marg{text} with the label +\texttt{glo:}\meta{label}. Your +new glossary style must therefore redefine \cs{glossaryentryfield} +so that it uses \cs{@glstarget}\verb|{|\texttt{glo:}\meta{label}\verb|}|\marg{text} +to ensure the hyperlinks function correctly.\footnote{again, if the +document doesn't support hyperlinks, \cs{@glstarget} will ignore +the label, and just typeset the text.} For example, the +\glostyle{list} style defines \cs{glossaryentryfield} as follows: +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{% +\item[\@glstarget{glo:##1}{##2}] ##3\glspostdescription\space ##5} +\end{verbatim} + +Note also that \meta{number list} will always be of the form\\[10pt] +\cs{glossaryentrynumbers}\{\cs{relax}\\ +\cs{setentrycounter}\marg{counter name}\cs{glsnumberformat}\marg{number(s)}\}\\[10pt] +where \meta{number(s)} +may contain \cs{delimN} (to delimit individual numbers) and/or +\cs{delimR} (to indicate a range of numbers). There may be +multiple occurrences of +\cs{setentrycounter}\marg{counter name}\cs{glsnumberformat}\marg{number(s)}, but note +that the entire number list is enclosed within the argument +to \ics{glossaryentrynumbers}. The user can redefine this to change +the way the entire number list is formatted, regardless of +the glossary style. However the most common use of +\cs{glossaryentrynumbers} is to provide a means of suppressing the +number list altogether. (In fact, the \pkgopt{nonumberlist} option +redefines \cs{glossaryentrynumbers} to ignore its argument.) +Therefore, when you define a new glossary style, you don't need +to worry about whether the user has specified the +\pkgopt{nonumberlist} package option. +\end{description}\ifmakedtx{}{\toTop} + +\subsubsection{Example: creating a completely new style} + +If you want a completely new style, you will need to redefine all +of the commands and environment listed above. You also need to +take care when using internal commands (commands whose name +contain the @ symbol). These should either be used in a \texttt{.sty} +file or must be placed within \cs{makeatletter} and \cs{makeatother}. + +For example, suppose you want each entry to start with a bullet point. +This means that the glossary should be placed in the \envname{itemize} +environment, so \envname{theglossary} should start and end that +environment. Let's also suppose that you don't want anything between +the glossary groups (so \cs{glsgroupheading} and \cs{glsgroupskip} +should do nothing) and suppose you don't want anything to appear +immediately after \verb|\begin{theglossary}| (so \cs{glossaryheader} +should do nothing). In addition, let's suppose the symbol should +appear in brackets after the name, followed by the description and +last of all the \term{number list} should appear within square brackets +at the end. Then you can create this new glossary style, called, say, +\texttt{mylist}, as follows: +\begin{verbatim} + \newglossarystyle{mylist}{% + % put the glossary in the itemize environment: + \renewenvironment{theglossary}{\begin{itemize}}{\end{itemize}}% + % have nothing after \begin{theglossary}: + \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}% + % have nothing between glossary groups: + \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}% + \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{}% + % set how each entry should appear: + \renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{% + \item % bullet point + \@glstarget{glo:##1}{##2}% the entry name + \space (##4)% the symbol in brackets + \space ##3% the description + \space [##5]% the number list in square brackets + }% + } +\end{verbatim} +\ifmakedtx{}{\toTop} + +\subsubsection{Example: creating a new glossary style based on an +existing style} + +\changes{1.11}{2008 March 1}{Fixed error in manual (glossary style +is set using 'glossarystyle not 'setglossarystyle)}% +If you want to define a new style that is a slightly modified +version of an existing style, you can use \cs{glossarystyle} +within the second argument of \cs{newglossarystyle} followed by +whatever alterations you require. For example, suppose you want +a style like the \glostyle{list} style but you don't want the extra +vertical space created by \cs{indexspace} between groups, then you +can create a new glossary style called, say, \texttt{mylist} as +follows: +\begin{verbatim} +\newglossarystyle{mylist}{% +\glossarystyle{list}% base this style on the list style +\renewcommand{\glsgroupskip}{}% make nothing happen between groups +} +\end{verbatim} +\ifmakedtx{}{\toTop} + + \StopEventually{\clearpage\phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Index}\PrintIndex} + +\ifmakedtx{}{\printindex\toTop} + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..34cab2da055 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/glossary2glossaries.html b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossary2glossaries.html index 235ac5000db..74207fb56c1 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/glossary2glossaries.html +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossary2glossaries.html @@ -34,41 +34,41 @@ Contents</A> <!--Table of Contents--> <UL> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html19" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html21" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00020000000000000000">1 Package Options</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html20" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html22" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00030000000000000000">2 Defining new glossary types</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html21" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html23" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00040000000000000000">3 \make<glossary name></A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html22" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html24" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00050000000000000000">4 Storing glossary information</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html23" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html25" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00060000000000000000">5 Adding an entry to the glossary</A> <UL> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html24" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html26" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00061000000000000000">5.1 \useglosentry</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html25" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html27" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00062000000000000000">5.2 \useGlosentry</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html26" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html28" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00063000000000000000">5.3 \gls</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html27" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html29" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00064000000000000000">5.4 \glossary</A> </UL> <BR> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html28" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html30" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00070000000000000000">6 Acronyms</A> <UL> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html29" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html31" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00071000000000000000">6.1 \acrln and \acrsh</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html30" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html32" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00072000000000000000">6.2 \ifacronymfirstuse</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html31" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html33" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00073000000000000000">6.3 \resetacronym and \unsetacronym</A> </UL> <BR> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html32" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html34" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00080000000000000000">7 Displaying the glossary</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html33" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html35" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00090000000000000000">8 Using makeindex</A> </UL> <!--End of Table of Contents--> @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ to the <TT>glossaries</TT> package options. <A NAME="tab:pkgopt"></A> <DIV ALIGN="CENTER"> -<A NAME="457"></A> +<A NAME="462"></A> <TABLE CELLPADDING=3> <CAPTION><STRONG>Table 1:</STRONG> Mappings from <TT>glossary</TT> to <TT>glossaries</TT> @@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ glossary information for later use, or you could simply use <TT>\glossary</TT> whenever you wanted to add information to the glossary. With the new <TT>glossaries</TT> package, the latter option is no longer available<A NAME="tex2html2" - HREF="#foot459"><SUP>1</SUP></A>. If + HREF="#foot464"><SUP>1</SUP></A>. If you have stored all the glossary information using <TT>\storeglosentry</TT>, then you will need to convert these commands into the equivalent <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT>. If you haven't used @@ -429,18 +429,19 @@ to <TT>counter</TT>. </H2> <P> -If you have opted to explicitly use <TT>\glossary</TT> instead of storing -the glossary information with <TT>\storeglosentry</TT>, then converting -from <TT>glossary</TT> to <TT>glossaries</TT> will be more time-consuming, -although in the end, I hope you will see the benefits! Using -<TT>\glossary</TT> throughout the document is time consuming, and if you -use it more than once for the same term, there's a chance extra -spaces may creep in which will cause <TT>makeindex</TT> to treat the -two entries as different terms, even though they look the same in the -document. However, if you have used <TT>\glossary</TT>, you will need -to define the term using <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT>, and then use -<TT>\glsadd{<<I>label</I>>}</TT> (or <TT>\glslink{<<I>label</I>>}{<<I>text</I>>}</TT> -if you have used <TT>\xglossary</TT>.) +When using the <TT>glossaries</TT> package, you should not use +<TT>\glossary</TT> directly.<A NAME="tex2html3" + HREF="#foot469"><SUP>2</SUP></A> If, with the old +package, you have opted to explicitly use <TT>\glossary</TT> instead of +storing the glossary information with <TT>\storeglosentry</TT>, then +converting from <TT>glossary</TT> to <TT>glossaries</TT> will be more +time-consuming, although in the end, I hope you will see the +benefits!<A NAME="tex2html4" + HREF="#foot470"><SUP>3</SUP></A> If +you have used <TT>\glossary</TT> with the old glossary package, you will +instead need to define the relevant glossary terms using +<TT>\newglossaryentry</TT> and reference the terms using <TT>\glslink</TT>, +<TT>\gls</TT> (or <TT>\glspl</TT> etc). <P> If you don't like the idea of continually scrolling back to the @@ -727,20 +728,37 @@ instead. <P> <BR><HR><H4>Footnotes</H4> <DL> -<DT><A NAME="foot459">... +<DT><A NAME="foot464">... available</A><A HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#tex2html2"><SUP>1</SUP></A></DT> <DD>mainly because having a key value list in <TT>\glossary</TT> caused problems, but it also helps consistency. </DD> +<DT><A NAME="foot469">... directly.</A><A + HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#tex2html3"><SUP>2</SUP></A></DT> +<DD>This is because <TT>\glossary</TT> requires +the argument to be in a specific format and doesn't use the +<<I>key</I>>=<<I>value</I>> format that the old glossary package used. The +new package's internal commands set this format, as well as escaping +any of <TT>makeindex</TT>'s special characters, so although it is +still possible to use <TT>\glossary</TT> with the new package, it's not +recommended. If you persist in using <TT>\glossary</TT> with the new +package, don't complain if things go wrong! + +</DD> +<DT><A NAME="foot470">... +benefits!</A><A + HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#tex2html4"><SUP>3</SUP></A></DT> +<DD>From the user's point of view, using <TT>\glossary</TT> +throughout the document is time consuming, and if you use it more than +once for the same term, there's a chance extra spaces may creep in +which will cause <TT>makeindex</TT> to treat the two entries as +different terms, even though they look the same in the document. + +</DD> </DL> <BR><HR> -<ADDRESS> -<A href=http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/>Nicola L. C. Talbot</A>. -<A HREF=http://www.cmp.uea.ac.uk/>School of Computing Sciences</A>. -<A HREF=http://www.uea.ac.uk/>University of East Anglia.</A> -Last Modified: 2007-09-15 -</ADDRESS> + </BODY> </HTML> diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossary2glossaries.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossary2glossaries.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7280a20d692 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossary2glossaries.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossary2glossaries.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossary2glossaries.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f811c671f11 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossary2glossaries.tex @@ -0,0 +1,529 @@ +\documentclass[a4paper]{article} + +\usepackage[colorlinks,pdfauthor={Nicola L.C. Talbot}, + pdftitle={Upgrading from the glossary package to + the glossaries package}]{hyperref} +\usepackage{html} +\usepackage{xr} + +\externaldocument{glossaries} + +\title{Upgrading from the glossary package to the glossaries +package} +\author{Nicola L.C. Talbot} + +\newcommand*{\meta}[1]{\textnormal{\textless\emph{#1}\textgreater}} +\newcommand*{\marg}[1]{\texttt{\char`\{\meta{#1}\char`\}}} +\newcommand*{\oarg}[1]{\texttt{[\meta{#1}]}} +\newcommand*{\cs}[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}} + +%\begin{latexonly} +\newcommand*{\sty}[1]{\textsf{#1}} + +\newsavebox\waybox +\newenvironment{oldway}{\begin{lrbox}{\waybox} +\begin{minipage}{0.98\linewidth}\ttfamily +}{\end{minipage}\end{lrbox}\vskip\baselineskip\par\noindent +\begin{tabular}{r} +\fbox{\usebox\waybox}\\[4pt]\footnotesize\mbox{\sty{glossary}} +\end{tabular}% +\vskip\baselineskip\par\noindent\ignorespaces} + +\newenvironment{newway}{\begin{lrbox}{\waybox} +\begin{minipage}{0.98\linewidth}\ttfamily +}{\end{minipage}\end{lrbox}\vskip\baselineskip\par\noindent +\begin{tabular}{r} +\fbox{\usebox\waybox}\\[4pt]\footnotesize\mbox{\sty{glossaries}} +\end{tabular}% +\vskip\baselineskip\par\noindent\ignorespaces} +%\end{latexonly} +\begin{htmlonly} +\newenvironment{oldway}{\par\begin{ttfamily}}{\end{ttfamily}\par} +\newenvironment{newway}{\par\begin{ttfamily}}{\end{ttfamily}\par} +\newcommand{\sty}[1]{\texttt{#1}} +\renewcommand{\LaTeX}{LaTeX} +\end{htmlonly} + +\begin{document} +\maketitle +\tableofcontents + +\begin{abstract} +The purpose of this document is to provide advice if you want +to convert a \LaTeX\ document from using the obsolete +\sty{glossary} package to the replacement \sty{glossaries} package. +\end{abstract} + +\section{Package Options} + +When converting a document that currently uses the obsolete +\sty{glossary} package to the replacement \sty{glossaries} package, +it should be fairly obvious that the first thing you need to do is +replace \verb|\usepackage{glossary}| with +\verb|\usepackage{glossaries}|, however some of the package options +are different, so you may need to change those as well. +Table~\ref{tab:pkgopt} shows the mappings from the \sty{glossary} +to the \sty{glossaries} package options. + +\begin{table}[htbp] +\caption[Mappings]{Mappings from \sty{glossary} to \sty{glossaries} +package options} +\label{tab:pkgopt} +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{ll} +\bfseries \sty{glossary} option & \bfseries \sty{glossaries} option\\ +style=list & style=list\\ +style=altlist & style=altlist\\ +style=long,header=none,border=none,cols=2 & style=long\\ +style=long,header=plain,border=none,cols=2 & style=longheader\\ +style=long,header=none,border=plain,cols=2 & style=longborder\\ +style=long,header=plain,border=plain,cols=2 & style=longheaderborder\\ +style=long,header=none,border=none,cols=3 & style=long3col\\ +style=long,header=plain,border=none,cols=3 & style=long3colheader\\ +style=long,header=none,border=plain,cols=3 & style=long3colborder\\ +style=long,header=plain,border=plain,cols=3 & style=long3colheaderborder\\ +style=super,header=none,border=none,cols=2 & style=super\\ +style=super,header=plain,border=none,cols=2 & style=superheader\\ +style=super,header=none,border=plain,cols=2 & style=superborder\\ +style=super,header=plain,border=plain,cols=2 & style=superheaderborder\\ +style=super,header=none,border=none,cols=3 & style=super3col\\ +style=super,header=plain,border=none,cols=3 & style=super3colheader\\ +style=super,header=none,border=plain,cols=3 & style=super3colborder\\ +style=super,header=plain,border=plain,cols=3 & style=super3colheaderborder\\ +number=none & nonumberlist\\ +number=\meta{counter name} & counter=\meta{counter name}\\ +toc & toc\\ +hypertoc & toc\\ +hyper & \emph{no corresponding option}\\ +section=true & section\\ +section=false & \emph{no corresponding option}\\ +acronym & acronym\\ +global & \emph{no corresponding option} +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +\end{table} + +\section{Defining new glossary types} + +If you have created new glossary types, you will need to +replace all instances of +\begin{oldway} +\cs{newglossarytype}\oarg{log-ext}\marg{type}\marg{out-ext}\marg{in-ext}\oarg{style list}\newline +\cs{newcommand}\verb|{\|\meta{type}name\verb|}|\marg{title} +\end{oldway}% +with +\begin{newway} +\cs{newglossary}\oarg{log-ext}\marg{type}\marg{out-ext}\marg{in-ext}\marg{title} +\end{newway}% +in the preamble, and +\begin{newway} +\cs{glossarystyle}\marg{new style list} +\end{newway}% +immediately before \verb|\printglossary[type=|\meta{type}\verb|]|, +if the new glossary requires a different style to the main (default) +glossary. + +The \meta{style list} optional argument can be converted to +\meta{new style list} using the same mapping given in +Table~\ref{tab:pkgopt}. + +For example, if your document contains the following: +\begin{verbatim} +\newglossarytype[nlg]{notation}{not}{ntn}[style=long,header] +\newcommand{\notationname}{Index of Notation} +\end{verbatim} +You will need to replace the above two lines with: +\begin{verbatim} +\newglossary[nlg]{notation}{not}{ntn}{Index of Notation} +\end{verbatim} +in the preamble, and +\begin{verbatim} +\glossarystyle{style=longheader} +\end{verbatim} +immediately prior to displaying this glossary new type. + +Note that the glossary title is no longer specified using +\cs{}\meta{glossary-type}\texttt{name} (except for \cs{glossaryname} +and \cs{acronymname}) but is instead specified in the \meta{title} +argument of \cs{newglossary}. The short title which is specified +in the \sty{glossary} package by the command +\cs{short}\meta{glossary-name}\texttt{name} is now specified +using the \texttt{toctitle} key in the optional argument to +\cs{printglossary}. + +\section{\cs{make}\meta{glossary name}} + +All instances of \cs{make}\meta{glossary name} (e.g.\ +\cs{makeglossary} and \cs{makeacronym}) should be replaced +by the single command \cs{makeglossaries}. For example, if +your document contained the following: +\begin{verbatim} +\makeglossary +\makeacronym +\end{verbatim} +then you should replace both lines with the single line: +\begin{verbatim} +\makeglossaries +\end{verbatim} + +\section{Storing glossary information} + +With the old \sty{glossary} package you could optionally store +glossary information for later use, or you could simply use +\cs{glossary} whenever you wanted to add information to the glossary. +With the new \sty{glossaries} package, the latter option is no longer +available\footnote{mainly because having a key value list in +\cs{glossary} caused problems, but it also helps consistency.}. If +you have stored all the glossary information using +\cs{storeglosentry}, then you will need to convert these commands +into the equivalent \cs{newglossaryentry}. If you haven't used +\cs{storeglosentry}, then you'll have a bit more work to do! + +The former approach requires substituting all instances of +\begin{oldway} +\cs{storeglosentry}\marg{label}\marg{gls-entry} +\end{oldway}% +with +\begin{newway} +\cs{newglossaryentry}\marg{label}\marg{gls-entry} +\end{newway}% +This should be fairly easy to do using the search and replace +facility in your editor (but see notes below). + +If you have used the optional argument of \cs{storeglosentry} +(i.e.\ you have multiple glossaries) then you will need to +substitute +\begin{oldway} +\cs{storeglosentry}\oarg{gls-type}\marg{label}\marg{gls-entry} +\end{oldway}% +with +\begin{newway} +\cs{newglossaryentry}\marg{label}\verb|{|\meta{gls-entry},type=\meta{gls-type}\verb|}| +\end{newway} + +The glossary entry information \meta{gls-entry} may also need +changing. If \meta{gls-entry} contains any of \texttt{makeindex}'s +special characters (i.e.\ \texttt{@} \texttt{!} \verb|"| or +\verb"|") then they should no longer be escaped with \verb'"' +since the \sty{glossaries} package deals with these characters +internally. For example, if your document contains the following: +\begin{verbatim} +\storeglosentry{card}{name={$"|\mathcal{S}"|$}, +description={The cardinality of the set $\mathcal{S}$}} +\end{verbatim} +then you will need to replace it with: +\begin{verbatim} +\newglossaryentry{card}{name={$|\mathcal{S}|$}, +description={The cardinality of the set $\mathcal{S}$}} +\end{verbatim} + +The \texttt{format} and \texttt{number} keys available in +\cs{storeglosentry} are not available with \cs{newglossaryentry}. +Note also that the \sty{glossary} package allowed you to use +\cs{storeglosentry} in the document, but \cs{newglossaryentry} +may only be used in the preamble. + +\section{Adding an entry to the glossary} + +The \sty{glossary} package provided two basic means to add +information to the glossary: firstly, the term was defined +using \cs{storeglosentry} and the entries for that term were +added using \cs{useglosentry}, \cs{useGlosentry} and \cs{gls}. +Secondly, the term was added to the glossary using \cs{glossary}. +This second approach is unavailable with the \sty{glossaries} +package. + +\subsection{\cs{useglosentry}} +\label{sec:useglosentry} + +The \sty{glossary} package allows you to add information to the +glossary for a predefined term without producing any text +in the document using +\begin{oldway} +\cs{useglosentry}\oarg{old options}\marg{label} +\end{oldway}% +Any occurrences of this command will need to be replaced with +\begin{newway} +\cs{glsadd}\oarg{new options}\marg{label} +\end{newway}% +The \texttt{format} key in \meta{old options} remains the same +in \meta{new options}, the \texttt{number=}\meta{counter name} +key in \meta{old options} should be replaced with\linebreak +\texttt{counter=}\meta{counter name} in \meta{new options}. + +\subsection{\cs{useGlosentry}} + +The \sty{glossary} package allows you to add information to the +glossary for a predefined term with the given text using +\begin{oldway} +\cs{useGlosentry}\oarg{old options}\marg{label}\marg{text} +\end{oldway}% +Any occurrences if this command will need to be replaced with +\begin{newway} +\cs{glslink}\oarg{new options}\marg{label}\marg{text} +\end{newway}% +The mapping from \meta{old options} to \meta{new options} is +the same as that given in section~\ref{sec:useglosentry} above. + +\subsection{\cs{gls}} + +Both the \sty{glossary} and the \sty{glossaries} packages define +the command \cs{gls}. In this case, the only thing you need to +change is the \texttt{number} key in the optional argument +to \texttt{counter}. + +\subsection{\cs{glossary}} + +When using the \sty{glossaries} package, you should not use +\cs{glossary} directly.\footnote{This is because \cs{glossary} requires +the argument to be in a specific format and doesn't use the +\meta{key}=\meta{value} format that the old glossary package used. The +new package's internal commands set this format, as well as escaping +any of \texttt{makeindex}'s special characters, so although it is +still possible to use \cs{glossary} with the new package, it's not +recommended. If you persist in using \cs{glossary} with the new +package, don't complain if things go wrong!} If, with the old +package, you have opted to explicitly use \cs{glossary} instead of +storing the glossary information with \cs{storeglosentry}, then +converting from \sty{glossary} to \sty{glossaries} will be more +time-consuming, although in the end, I hope you will see the +benefits!\footnote{From the user's point of view, using \cs{glossary} +throughout the document is time consuming, and if you use it more than +once for the same term, there's a chance extra spaces may creep in +which will cause \texttt{makeindex} to treat the two entries as +different terms, even though they look the same in the document.} If +you have used \cs{glossary} with the old glossary package, you will +instead need to define the relevant glossary terms using +\cs{newglossaryentry} and reference the terms using \cs{glslink}, +\cs{gls} (or \cs{glspl} etc). + +If you don't like the idea of continually scrolling back to the +preamble to type all your \cs{newglossaryentry} commands, you may +prefer to create a new file, in which to store all these commands, +and then input that file in your document's preamble. Most text +editors and front-ends allow you to have multiple files open, and +you can tab back and forth between them. + +\section{Acronyms} + +In the \sty{glossary} package, acronyms were treated differently +to glossary entries. This resulted in inconsistencies and sprawling +unmaintainable code. The new \sty{glossaries} package treats +acronyms in exactly the same way as normal glossary terms. In fact, +in the \sty{glossaries} package: +\begin{newway} +\cs{newacronym}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\marg{abbrv}\marg{long} +\end{newway} +is a shortcut for: +\begin{newway} +\cs{newglossaryentry}\marg{label}\{type=\cs{acronymtype}, +name=\marg{abbrv}, +description=\marg{long}, +text=\marg{abbrv}, +first=\{\meta{long} (\meta{abbrv})\}, +plural=\{\meta{abbrv}s\}, +firstplural=\{\meta{long}s (\meta{abbrv}s)\}, +\meta{options}\} +\end{newway} + +This is different to the \sty{glossary} package which set the +\texttt{name} key to \meta{long} (\meta{abbrv}) and allowed you +to set a description using the \texttt{description} key. If you want +your document to remain like this, you can redefine \cs{newacronym} +as follows: +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{% +\newglossaryentry{#2}{type=\acronymtype, +name={#4 (#3)}, +text={#3}, +first={#4 (#3)}, +plural={#3s}, +firstplural={#4s (#3s)},#1}} +\end{verbatim} +The \texttt{description} key will then need to be entered using the +optional argument. + +For example, if your document originally had the following: +\begin{verbatim} +\newacronym{SVM}{Support Vector Machine}{description=Statistical +pattern recognition technique} +\end{verbatim} +Then you would need to redefine \cs{newacronym} as shown above, +and change the above to: +\begin{verbatim} +\newacronym[description=Statistical pattern recognition +technique]{svm}{SVM}{Support Vector Machine} +\end{verbatim} +You will also need to replace all occurrences of \cs{SVM} with +\verb|\gls{svm}|. Alternatively, you can define \cs{SVM}: +\begin{verbatim} +\newcommand{\SVM}{\gls{svm}} +\end{verbatim} + +If you have used \cs{useacronym} instead of \cs{}\meta{acr-name}, +then you will need to replace all occurrences of +\begin{oldway} +\cs{useacronym}\oarg{insert}\marg{acr-name} +\end{oldway}% +with +\begin{newway} +\cs{gls}\marg{label}\oarg{insert} +\end{newway}% +Note that the starred versions of \cs{useacronym} and +\cs{}\meta{acr-name} (which make the first letter uppercase) should +be replaced with \cs{Gls}\marg{label}. + +\subsection{\cs{acrln} and \cs{acrsh}} + +In the \sty{glossary} package, it is possible to produce the +long and short forms of an acronym without adding an entry to +the glossary using \cs{acrln} and \cs{acrsh}. With the +\sty{glossaries} package, you can replace +\begin{oldway} +\cs{acrsh}\marg{acr-name} +\end{oldway}% +with +\begin{newway} +\cs{glsentrytext}\marg{label} +\end{newway}% +However the \sty{glossaries} package provides no direct equivalent +of \cs{acrln}. Instead it provides \cs{glsentryfirst} which +produces the ``first use'' text without adding an entry to the +glossary, or affecting the first use flag. + +Alternatively, if you haven't changed the definition of +\cs{newacronym}, the long form by itself can be obtained using +\cs{glsentrydesc}, since by default the \texttt{description} key is +set to the long form (but read the notes in the \sty{glossaries} +manual regarding the \texttt{sanitize} package option). + +If you want to be able to set a description, and be able to +independently access the description, the long form and the +short form, you can redefine \cs{newacronym} so that it uses +the \texttt{symbol} key and use \cs{defglsdisplayfirst} +so that it uses this value on first use, as follows: +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{\newglossaryentry{#2}{% +name={#4 (#3)}, +text={#3}, +first={#4}, +symbol={#3}, +}} +\defglsdisplayfirst{\acronymtype}{##1 (##3)##4} +\end{verbatim} +As before, you can access the short name via +\cs{glsentrytext}\marg{label}, but you can now access just the long +form via \cs{glsentryfirst}\marg{label} and the description via +\cs{glsentrydesc}\marg{label}. + +See +\latexhtml{section~\ref*{sec:code:glslink} (}{the section }``Using +glossary entries in the text''\latex{)} of the \sty{glossaries} +manual for further details of how to use these commands. + +\subsection{\cs{ifacronymfirstuse}} + +The \sty{glossary} package command +\begin{oldway} +\cs{ifacronymfirstuse}\marg{acr-name}\marg{text1}\marg{text2} +\end{oldway}% +can be replaced by the \sty{glossaries} command: +\begin{newway} +\cs{ifglsused}\marg{label}\marg{text2}\marg{text1} +\end{newway}% +Note that \cs{ifglsused} evaluates the opposite condition to +that of \cs{ifacronymfirstuse} which is why the last two arguments +have been reversed. + +\subsection{\cs{resetacronym} and \cs{unsetacronym}} + +The \sty{glossary} package allows you to reset and unset the +acronym flag which is used to determine whether the acronym has +been used in the document. The \sty{glossaries} package also +provides a means to do this on either a local or global level. +To reset an acronym, you will need to replace: +\begin{oldway} +\cs{resetacronym}\marg{acr-name} +\end{oldway}% +with either +\begin{newway} +\cs{glsreset}\marg{label} +\end{newway}% +or +\begin{newway} +\cs{glslocalreset}\marg{label} +\end{newway} + +To unset an acronym, you will need to replace: +\begin{oldway} +\cs{unsetacronym}\marg{acr-name} +\end{oldway}% +with either +\begin{newway} +\cs{glsunset}\marg{label} +\end{newway}% +or +\begin{newway} +\cs{glslocalunset}\marg{label} +\end{newway} + +\section{Displaying the glossary} + +The \sty{glossary} package provides the command \cs{printglossary} +(or \cs{print}\meta{type} for other glossary types) which +can be used to print individual glossaries. The \sty{glossaries} +package provides the command \cs{printglossaries} which +will print all the glossaries which have been defined, or +\cs{printglossary}\oarg{options} to print individual glossaries. +So if you just have \cs{printglossary}, then you can leave it as +it is, but if you have, say: +\begin{verbatim} +\printglossary +\printglossary[acronym] +\end{verbatim} +or +\begin{verbatim} +\printglossary +\printacronym +\end{verbatim} +then you will need to either replace this with either +\begin{verbatim} +\printglossaries +\end{verbatim} +or +\begin{verbatim} +\printglossary +\printglossary[type=\acronymtype] +\end{verbatim} + +The \sty{glossary} package allows you to specify a short title +(for the table of contents and page header) by defining a command +of the form \cs{short}\meta{glossary-type}\texttt{name}. The +\sty{glossaries} package doesn't do this, but instead provides +the \texttt{toctitle} key which can be used in the optional +argument to \cs{printglossary}. For example, if you have created +a new glossary type called \texttt{notation}, and you had +defined +\begin{verbatim} +\newcommand{\shortnotationname}{Notation} +\end{verbatim} +then you would need to use the \texttt{toctitle} key: +\begin{verbatim} +\printglossary[type=notation,toctitle=Notation] +\end{verbatim} +The \sty{glossaries} package will ignore \cs{shortnotationname}, +so unless you have used it elsewhere in the document, you may +as well remove the definition. + +\section{Using makeindex} + +If you convert your document from using the \sty{glossary} package +to the \sty{glossaries} package, you will need to delete any of +the additional files, such as the \texttt{.glo} file, that were +created by the \sty{glossary} package, as the \sty{glossaries} +package uses a different \texttt{makeindex} style file. +Remember also, that if you used the \texttt{makeglos} Perl script, +you will need to use the \texttt{makeglossaries} Perl script +instead. + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/latex2html/glossaries.perl b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/latex2html/glossaries.perl deleted file mode 100644 index 22ad50f784c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/latex2html/glossaries.perl +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1713 +0,0 @@ -# File : glossaries.perl -# Author : Nicola L.C. Talbot -# Date : 14th June 2007 -# Last Modified : 21st Aug 2007 -# Version : 1.02 -# Description : LaTeX2HTML (limited!) implementation of glossaries -# package. Note that not all the glossaries.sty -# macros have been implemented. - -# This is a LaTeX2HTML style implementing the glossaries package, and -# is distributed as part of that package. -# Copyright 2007 Nicola L.C. Talbot -# This work may be distributed and/or modified under the -# conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -# of this license of (at your option) any later version. -# The latest version of this license is in -# http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -# and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -# version 2005/12/01 or later. -# -# This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. -# -# The Current Maintainer of this work is Nicola Talbot. - -# This work consists of the files glossaries.dtx and glossaries.ins -# and the derived files glossaries.sty, glossary-hypernav.sty, -# glossary-list.sty, glossary-long.sty, glossary-super.sty, -# glossaries.perl. Also makeglossaries and makeglossaries.bat - -package main; - -# These are the only package options implemented. - -sub do_glossaries_style_altlist{ -} - -sub do_glossaries_toc{ -} - -sub do_glossaries_toc_true{ -} - -$GLSCURRENTFORMAT="textrm"; - -sub do_cmd_glossaryname{ - "Glossary$_[0]" -} - -$gls_mark{'main'} = "<tex2html_gls_main_mark>"; -$gls_file_mark{'main'} = "<tex2html_gls_main_file_mark>"; -$gls_title{'main'} = "\\glossaryname"; -$delimN{'main'} = ", "; -$glsnumformat{'main'} = $GLSCURRENTFORMAT; -@{$gls_entries{'main'}} = (); -$gls_displayfirst{'main'} = "glsdisplayfirst"; -$gls_display{'main'} = "glsdisplay"; - - -$acronymtype = 'main'; - -sub do_glossaries_acronym{ - &do_glossaries_acronym_true -} - -sub do_glossaries_acronym_true{ - &make_newglossarytype("acronym", "\\acronymname"); - $acronymtype = 'acronym'; -} - -sub do_glossary_acronym_false{ - $acronymtype = 'main'; -} - -sub do_cmd_acronymname{ - join('', 'Acronyms', $_[0]); -} - -sub do_cmd_acronymtype{ - join('', $acronymtype, $_[0]); -} - -# modify set_depth_levels so that glossary is added - -sub replace_glossary_markers{ - foreach $type (keys %gls_mark) - { - if (defined &add_gls_hook) - {&add_gls_hook if (/$gls_mark{$type}/);} - else - {&add_gls($type) if (/$gls_mark{$type}/);} - - s/$gls_file_mark{$type}/$glsfile{$type}/g; - } -} - -# there must be a better way of doing this -# other than copying the orginal code and adding to it. -sub replace_general_markers { - if (defined &replace_infopage_hook) {&replace_infopage_hook if (/$info_page_mark/);} - else { &replace_infopage if (/$info_page_mark/); } - if (defined &add_idx_hook) {&add_idx_hook if (/$idx_mark/);} - else {&add_idx if (/$idx_mark/);} - &replace_glossary_markers; - - if ($segment_figure_captions) { -s/$lof_mark/$segment_figure_captions/o - } else { s/$lof_mark/$figure_captions/o } - if ($segment_table_captions) { -s/$lot_mark/$segment_table_captions/o - } else { s/$lot_mark/$table_captions/o } - &replace_morelinks(); - if (defined &replace_citations_hook) {&replace_citations_hook if /$bbl_mark/;} - else {&replace_bbl_marks if /$bbl_mark/;} - if (defined &add_toc_hook) {&add_toc_hook if (/$toc_mark/);} - else {&add_toc if (/$toc_mark/);} - if (defined &add_childs_hook) {&add_childs_hook if (/$childlinks_on_mark/);} - else {&add_childlinks if (/$childlinks_on_mark/);} - &remove_child_marks; - - if (defined &replace_cross_references_hook) {&replace_cross_references_hook;} - else {&replace_cross_ref_marks if /$cross_ref_mark||$cross_ref_visible_mark/;} - if (defined &replace_external_references_hook) {&replace_external_references_hook;} - else {&replace_external_ref_marks if /$external_ref_mark/;} - if (defined &replace_cite_references_hook) {&replace_cite_references_hook;} - else { &replace_cite_marks if /$cite_mark/; } - if (defined &replace_user_references) { - &replace_user_references if /$user_ref_mark/; } - -} - -sub add_gls{ - local($sidx_style, $eidx_style) =('<STRONG>','</STRONG>'); - if ($INDEX_STYLES) { -if ($INDEX_STYLES =~/,/) { -local(@styles) = split(/\s*,\s*/,$INDEX_STYLES); - $sidx_style = join('','<', join('><',@styles) ,'>'); - $eidx_style = join('','</', join('></',reverse(@styles)) ,'>'); -} else { - $sidx_style = join('','<', $INDEX_STYLES,'>'); - $eidx_style = join('','</', $INDEX_STYLES,'>'); -} - } - &add_real_gls -} - -sub gloskeysort{ - local($x, $y) = ($a, $b); - $x=~s/^(.*)###(\d+)$/\l\1/; - local($x_id) = $2; - $y=~s/^(.*)###(\d+)$/\l\1/; - local($y_id) = $2; - - local($n) = ($x cmp $y); - - if ($n == 0) - { - $n = ($x_id <=> $y_id); - } - - $n; -} - -sub add_real_gls{ - local($type) = @_; - print "\nDoing glossary '$type' ..."; - local($key, $str, @keys, $glossary, $level, $count, - @previous, @current, $id, $linktext, $delimN); - - @keys = keys %{$glossary{$type}}; - - @keys = sort gloskeysort @keys; - - $level = 0; - - $delimN = $delimN{$type}; - - foreach $key (@keys) - { - $current = $key; - $str = $current; - $str =~ s/\#\#\#\d+$//o; # Remove the unique id's - #$linktext = $cross_ref_visible_mark; - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $linktext = "\\$glossary_format{$type}{$key}${OP}$id${CP}$glossary_linktext{$type}{$key}${OP}$id${CP}"; - $linktext = &translate_commands($linktext); - - local($entry) = $glossary_entry{$type}{$key}; - - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - local($name) = &translate_commands( - "\\glsnamefont $OP$id$CP$glsentry{$entry}{name}$OP$id$CP"); - - local($symbol) = ($glsentry{$entry}{'symbol'} ? - " $glsentry{$entry}{symbol}" : ''); - - $glossary .= - # If it's the same string don't start a new line - (&index_key_eq($current, $previous) ? - $delimN - . $glossary{$type}{$key} - . $linktext - . "</A>\n" - : "<DT>" - . $name - . "<DD>" - . $glsentry{$entry}{'description'} - . $symbol . '. ' - . $glossary{$type}{$key} - . $linktext. "</A>\n"); - $previous = $current; - } - $glossary = '<DD>'.$glossary unless ($glossary =~ /^\s*<D(T|D)>/); - - $glossary =~ s/(<A [^>]*>)(<D(T|D)>)/$2$1/g; - - $str = &translate_commands("\\glossarypostamble"); - s/$gls_mark{$type}/$preglossary\n<DL COMPACT>\n$glossary<\/DL>$str\n/s; -} - -sub set_depth_levels { - # Sets $outermost_level - local($level); - # scan the document body, not the preamble, for use of sectioning commands - my ($contents) = $_; - if ($contents =~ /\\begin\s*((?:$O|$OP)\d+(?:$C|$CP))document\1|\\startdocument/s) { -$contents = $'; - } - foreach $level ("part", "chapter", "section", "subsection", - "subsubsection", "paragraph") { -last if (($outermost_level) = $contents =~ /\\($level)$delimiter_rx/); -last if (($outermost_level) = $contents =~ /\\endsegment\s*\[\s*($level)\s*\]/s); -if ($contents =~ /\\segment\s*($O\d+$C)[^<]+\1\s*($O\d+$C)\s*($level)\s*\2/s) -{ $outermost_level = $3; last }; - } - $level = ($outermost_level ? $section_commands{$outermost_level} : - do {$outermost_level = 'section'; 3;}); - - if ($REL_DEPTH && $MAX_SPLIT_DEPTH) { -$MAX_SPLIT_DEPTH = $level + $MAX_SPLIT_DEPTH; - } elsif (!($MAX_SPLIT_DEPTH)) { $MAX_SPLIT_DEPTH = 1 }; - - %unnumbered_section_commands = ( - 'tableofcontents', $level -, 'listoffigures', $level -, 'listoftables', $level -, 'bibliography', $level -, 'textohtmlindex', $level -, 'textohtmlglossary', $level -, 'textohtmlglossaries', $level - , %unnumbered_section_commands - ); - - %section_commands = ( - %unnumbered_section_commands - , %section_commands - ); -} - -sub add_bbl_and_idx_dummy_commands { - local($id) = $global{'max_id'}; - - s/([\\]begin\s*$O\d+$C\s*thebibliography)/$bbl_cnt++; $1/eg; - ## if ($bbl_cnt == 1) { -s/([\\]begin\s*$O\d+$C\s*thebibliography)/$id++; "\\bibliography$O$id$C$O$id$C $1"/geo; - #} - $global{'max_id'} = $id; - s/([\\]begin\s*$O\d+$C\s*theindex)/\\textohtmlindex $1/o; - s/[\\]printindex/\\textohtmlindex /o; - &add_gls_dummy_commands; - &lib_add_bbl_and_idx_dummy_commands() if defined(&lib_add_bbl_and_idx_dummy_commands); -} - -sub add_gls_dummy_commands{ - s/[\\]printglossary/\\textohtmlglossary/sg; - s/[\\]printglossaries/\\textohtmlglossaries/sg; -} - -sub get_firstkeyval{ - local($key,$_) = @_; - local($value); - - s/\b$key\s*=$OP(\d+)$CP(.*)$OP\1$CP\s*(,|$)/$value=$2;','/es; - undef($value) if $`=~/\b$key\s*=/; - - unless (defined($value)) - { - s/(^|,)\s*$key\s*=\s*([^,]*)\s*(,|$)/,/s; - $value=$2; - } - - ($value,$_); -} - -# need to get the value of the last key of a given name -# in the event of multiple occurences. -sub get_keyval{ - local($key,$_) = @_; - local($value); - - while (/\b$key\s*=/) - { - ($value,$_) = &get_firstkeyval($key, $_); - last unless defined($value); - } - - ($value,$_); -} - -# This is modified from do_cmd_textohtmlindex - -sub do_cmd_textohtmlglossary{ - local($_) = @_; - - local($keyval,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; - - local($type,$title,$toctitle,$style); - - ($type,$keyval) = &get_keyval('type', $keyval); - ($title,$keyval) = &get_keyval('title', $keyval); - ($toctitle,$keyval) = &get_keyval('toctitle', $keyval); - ($style,$keyval) = &get_keyval('style', $keyval); - - &make_textohtmlglossary($type,$toctitle,$title,$style).$_; -} - -sub make_textohtmlglossary{ - local($type,$toctitle,$title,$style) = @_; - - unless (defined($type)) {$type = 'main';} - - unless (defined $gls_mark{$type}) - { - &write_warnings("glossary type '$type' not implemented"); - } - - unless (defined($title) and $title) {$title = $gls_title{$type};} - unless (defined($toctitle) and $toctitle) {$toctitle = $title;} - - $toc_sec_title = $toctitle; - $glsfile{$type} = $CURRENT_FILE; - - $TITLE=&translate_commands($toctitle); - - if (%glossary_labels) { &make_glossary_labels(); } - - if (($SHORT_INDEX) && (%glossary_segment)) - { - &make_preglossary(); - } - else - { - $preglossary = &translate_commands("\\glossarypreamble"); - } - - local $idx_head = $section_headings{'textohtmlindex'}; - local($heading) = join('' - , &make_section_heading($title, $idx_head) - , $gls_mark{$type} ); - local($pre,$post) = &minimize_open_tags($heading); - join('',"<BR>\n" , $pre); -} - -sub do_cmd_textohtmlglossaries{ - local($_) = @_; - - foreach $type (keys %gls_mark) - { - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $_ = &make_textohtmlglossary($type,$gls_title{'main'}).$_; - } - - $_; -} - -sub make_glossary_labels { - local($key, @keys); - @keys = keys %glossary_labels; - foreach $key (@keys) { - if (($ref_files{$key}) && !($ref_files{$key} eq "$glsfile{'main'}")) { - local($tmp) = $ref_files{$key}; - &write_warnings("\nmultiple label $key , target in $glsfile{'main'} masks $tmp "); - } - $ref_files{$key} .= $glsfile{'main'}; - } -} - -sub make_preglossary{ &make_real_preglossary } -sub make_real_preglossary{ - local($key, @keys, $head, $body); - $head = "<HR>\n<H4>Legend:</H4>\n<DL COMPACT>"; - @keys = keys %glossary_segment; - foreach $key (@keys) { - local($tmp) = "segment$key"; - $tmp = $ref_files{$tmp}; - $body .= "\n<DT>$key<DD>".&make_named_href('',$tmp,$glossary_segment{$key}); - } - $preglossary = join('', $head, $body, "\n</DL>") if ($body); -} - -sub do_cmd_glossary { &do_real_glossary(@_) } -sub do_real_glossary { - local($_) = @_; - local($type) = "main"; - local($anchor,$entry); - - local($type,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; - - $entry = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx//o&&($entry=$2)); - - $anchor = &make_glossary_entry($entry,$anchor_invisible_mark,$type); - - join('', $anchor, $_); -} - -sub make_glossary_entry { &make_real_glossary_entry(@_) } -sub make_real_glossary_entry { - local($entry,$text,$type) = @_; - local($this_file) = $CURRENT_FILE; - $TITLE = $saved_title if (($saved_title)&&(!($TITLE)||($TITLE eq $default_title))); - - local($sort) = $glsentry{$entry}{'sort'}; - - # Save the reference - local($str) = "$sort###" . ++$global{'max_id'}; # Make unique - # concatenate multiple spaces into a single space - # otherwise keys won't sort properly - $str=~s/\s+/ /gs; - local($br_id) = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $glossary{$type}{$str} .= &make_half_href($this_file."#$br_id"); - $glossary_format{$type}{$str} = $GLSCURRENTFORMAT; - $glossary_entry{$type}{$str} = $entry; - $glossary_linktext{$type}{$str} = $TITLE; - "<A HREF=$gls_file_mark{$type}#tex2html$href_name NAME=\"$br_id\">$text<\/A>"; -} - -sub do_cmd_newglossary{ - local($_) = @_; - local($type,$out,$in,$opt,$pat,$title); - - ($opt,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; - - $type = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx//o&&($type=$2)); - $in = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx//o&&($in=$2)); - $out = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx//o&&($out=$2)); - $title = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx//o&&($title=$2)); - - ($opt,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; - - &make_newglossarytype($type, $title); - - $_; -} - -sub make_newglossarytype{ - local($type, $title) = @_; - - $gls_mark{$type} = "<tex2html_gls_${type}_mark>"; - $gls_file_mark{$type} = "<tex2html_gls_${type}_file_mark>"; - $gls_title{$type} = $title; - $delimN{$type} = ", "; - $glsnumformat{$type} = $GLSCURRENTFORMAT; - @{$gls_entries{$type}} = (); - $gls_displayfirst{$type} = "glsdisplayfirst"; - $gls_display{$type} = "glsdisplay"; -} - -sub do_cmd_glsdisplay{ - local($_) = @_; - local($text,$description,$symbol,$insert); - - $text = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$text=$2;''/eo); - - $description = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$description=$2;''/eo); - - $symbol = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$symbol=$2;''/eo); - - $insert = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$insert=$2;''/eo); - - "$text$insert" . $_; -} - -sub do_cmd_glsdisplayfirst{ - local($_) = @_; - local($text,$description,$symbol,$insert); - - $text = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$text=$2;''/eo); - - $description = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$description=$2;''/eo); - - $symbol = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$symbol=$2;''/eo); - - $insert = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$insert=$2;''/eo); - - "$text$insert" . $_; -} - -sub gls_get_displayfirst{ - local($type) = @_; - local($display)= $gls_displayfirst{$type}; - - if (not defined($display)) - { - &write_warnings("Glossary '$type' is not defined"); - $display=''; - } - elsif ($display eq '') - { - &write_warnings("glsdisplayfirst not set for glossary '$type'"); - } - else - { - $display = "\\$display "; - } - - $display; -} - -sub gls_get_display{ - local($type) = @_; - local($display)= $gls_display{$type}; - - if (not defined($display)) - { - &write_warnings("Glossary '$type' is not defined"); - $display = ''; - } - elsif ($display eq '') - { - &write_warnings("glsdisplay not set for glossary '$type'"); - } - else - { - $display = "\\$display "; - } - - $display; -} - -sub do_cmd_glsnamefont{ - local($_) = @_; - local($text); - - $text = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$text=$2;''/eo); - - "<B>$text</B>$_"; -} - -sub do_cmd_newacronym{ - local($_) = @_; - local($label,$abbrev,$long,$opt); - - ($opt,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; - - $label = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); - $abbrv = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$abbrv=$2;''/eo); - $long = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$long=$2;''/eo); - - local($cmd) = "\\newglossaryentry"; - local($id); - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $cmd .= "$OP$id$CP$label$OP$id$CP"; - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - local($entry) = "type=$OP$id$CP\\acronymtype$OP$id$CP,"; - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $entry .= "name=$OP$id$CP$abbrv$OP$id$CP,"; - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $entry .= "description=$OP$id$CP$long$OP$id$CP,"; - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $entry .= "text=$OP$id$CP$abbrv$OP$id$CP,"; - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $entry .= "first=$OP$id$CP$long ($abbrv)$OP$id$CP,"; - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $entry .= "plural=$OP$id$CP${abbrv}s$OP$id$CP,"; - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $entry .= "firstplural=$OP$id$CP${long}s (${abbrv}s)$OP$id$CP"; - - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $cmd .= "$OP$id$CP$entry,$opt$OP$id$CP"; - - &translate_commands($cmd).$_; -} - -sub gls_entry_init{ - local($label, $type, $name, $desc) = @_; - - %{$glsentry{$label}} = - ( type => $type, - name => $name, - 'sort' => $name, - description => $description, - text => $name, - first => $name, - plural => "${name}s", - firstplural => "${name}s", - symbol => '', - flag => 0 - ); -} - -sub gls_get_type{ - local($label) = @_; - local($type) = ''; - - if (&gls_entry_defined($label)) - { - $type = $glsentry{$label}{'type'}; - } - else - { - &write_warnings("gls_get_type: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined"); - } - - $type; -} - -sub gls_set_type{ - local($label, $type) = @_; - - if (&gls_entry_defined($label)) - { - $glsentry{$label}{'type'} = $type; - } - else - { - &write_warnings("gls_set_type: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined"); - } -} - -sub gls_get_name{ - local($label) = @_; - local($name) = ''; - - if (&gls_entry_defined($label)) - { - $name = $glsentry{$label}{'name'}; - } - else - { - &write_warnings("gls_get_name: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined"); - } - - $name; -} - -sub gls_set_name{ - local($label, $name) = @_; - - if (&gls_entry_defined($label)) - { - $glsentry{$label}{'name'} = $name; - } - else - { - &write_warnings("gls_set_name: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined"); - } -} - -sub gls_get_description{ - local($label) = @_; - local($description) = ''; - - if (&gls_entry_defined($label)) - { - $description = $glsentry{$label}{'description'}; - } - else - { - &write_warnings("gls_get_description: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined"); - } - - $description; -} - -sub gls_set_description{ - local($label, $description) = @_; - - if (&gls_entry_defined($label)) - { - $glsentry{$label}{'description'} = $description; - } - else - { - &write_warnings("gls_set_description: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined"); - } -} - -sub gls_get_symbol{ - local($label) = @_; - local($symbol) = ''; - - if (&gls_entry_defined($label)) - { - $symbol = $glsentry{$label}{'symbol'}; - } - else - { - &write_warnings("gls_get_symbol: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined"); - } - - $symbol; -} - -sub gls_set_symbol{ - local($label, $symbol) = @_; - - if (&gls_entry_defined($label)) - { - $glsentry{$label}{'symbol'} = $symbol; - } - else - { - &write_warnings("gls_set_symbol: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined"); - } -} - -sub gls_get_sort{ - local($label) = @_; - local($sort) = ''; - - if (&gls_entry_defined($label)) - { - $sort = $glsentry{$label}{'sort'}; - } - else - { - &write_warnings("gls_get_sort: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined"); - } - - $sort; -} - -sub gls_set_sort{ - local($label, $sort) = @_; - - if (&gls_entry_defined($label)) - { - $glsentry{$label}{'sort'} = $sort; - } - else - { - &write_warnings("gls_set_sort: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined"); - } -} - -sub gls_get_text{ - local($label) = @_; - local($text) = ''; - - if (&gls_entry_defined($label)) - { - $text = $glsentry{$label}{'text'}; - } - else - { - &write_warnings("gls_get_text: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined"); - } - - $text; -} - -sub gls_set_text{ - local($label, $text) = @_; - - if (&gls_entry_defined($label)) - { - $glsentry{$label}{'text'} = $text; - } - else - { - &write_warnings("gls_set_text: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined"); - } -} - -sub gls_get_plural{ - local($label) = @_; - local($plural) = ''; - - if (&gls_entry_defined($label)) - { - $plural = $glsentry{$label}{'plural'}; - } - else - { - &write_warnings("gls_get_plural: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined"); - } - - $plural; -} - -sub gls_set_plural{ - local($label, $plural) = @_; - - if (&gls_entry_defined($label)) - { - $glsentry{$label}{'plural'} = $plural; - } - else - { - &write_warnings("gls_set_plural: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined"); - } -} - -sub gls_get_firstplural{ - local($label) = @_; - local($firstplural) = ''; - - if (&gls_entry_defined($label)) - { - $firstplural = $glsentry{$label}{'firstplural'}; - } - else - { - &write_warnings("gls_get_firstplural: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined"); - } - - $firstplural; -} - -sub gls_set_firstplural{ - local($label, $firstplural) = @_; - - if (&gls_entry_defined($label)) - { - $glsentry{$label}{'firstplural'} = $firstplural; - } - else - { - &write_warnings("gls_set_firstplural: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined"); - } -} - -sub gls_get_first{ - local($label) = @_; - local($first) = ''; - - if (&gls_entry_defined($label)) - { - $first = $glsentry{$label}{'first'}; - } - else - { - &write_warnings("gls_get_first: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined"); - } - - $first; -} - -sub gls_set_first{ - local($label, $first) = @_; - - if (&gls_entry_defined($label)) - { - $glsentry{$label}{'first'} = $first; - } - else - { - &write_warnings("gls_set_first: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined"); - } -} - -sub gls_used{ - local($label) = @_; - local($flag) = 0; - - if (&gls_entry_defined($label)) - { - $flag = $glsentry{$label}{'flag'}; - } - else - { - &write_warnings("gls_used: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined"); - } - - $flag; -} - -sub gls_entry_defined{ - local($label) = @_; - - defined(%{$glsentry{$label}}); -} - -sub do_cmd_newglossaryentry{ - local($_) = @_; - local($label,$name,$description,$symbol,$sort,$text,$first, - $plural,$firstplural,$type,$keyval); - - $label = &missing_braces unless - s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo; - - $keyval = &missing_braces unless - s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$keyval=$2;''/eo; - - ($name,$keyval) = &get_keyval('name', $keyval); - ($description,$keyval) = &get_keyval('description', $keyval); - ($symbol,$keyval) = &get_keyval('symbol', $keyval); - ($sort,$keyval) = &get_keyval('sort', $keyval); - ($text,$keyval) = &get_keyval('text', $keyval); - ($first,$keyval) = &get_keyval('first', $keyval); - ($firstplural,$keyval) = &get_keyval('firstplural', $keyval); - ($plural,$keyval) = &get_keyval('plural', $keyval); - ($type,$keyval) = &get_keyval('type', $keyval); - - if (defined($type)) - { - $type = &translate_commands($type); - } - else - { - $type = 'main'; - } - - &gls_entry_init($label, $type, $name, $description); - - &gls_set_symbol($label, defined($symbol)?$symbol:''); - - $sort = "$name $description" unless (defined($sort) and $sort); - - &gls_set_sort($label, $sort); - - $text = $name unless (defined($text) and $text); - - &gls_set_text($label, $text); - - $first = $text unless (defined($first) and $first); - - &gls_set_first($label, $first); - - $plural = "${text}s" unless (defined($plural) and $plural); - - &gls_set_plural($label, $plural); - - $firstplural = "${first}s" unless (defined($firstplural) and $firstplural); - - &gls_set_firstplural($label, $firstplural); - - push @{$gls_entries{$type}}, $label; - - $_; -} - -sub reset_entry{ - local($label) = @_; - - $glsentry{$label}{'flag'} = 0; -} - -sub unset_entry{ - local($label) = @_; - - $glsentry{$label}{'flag'} = 1; -} - -sub do_cmd_glsreset{ - local($_) = @_; - local($label); - - $label = &missing_braces unless - s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo; - - &reset_entry($label); - - $_; -} - -sub do_cmd_glsunset{ - local($_) = @_; - local($label); - - $label = &missing_braces unless - s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo; - - &unset_entry($label); - - $_; -} - -sub do_cmd_ifglsused{ - local($_) = @_; - local($label,$true,$false); - - $label = &missing_braces unless - s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo; - - $true = &missing_braces unless - s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$true=$2;''/eo; - - $false = &missing_braces unless - s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$false=$2;''/eo; - - (&gls_used($label) ? $true : $false) . $_; -} - -sub do_cmd_ifglsentryexists{ - local($_) = @_; - local($label,$true,$false); - - $label = &missing_braces unless - s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo; - - $true = &missing_braces unless - s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$true=$2;''/eo; - - $false = &missing_braces unless - s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$false=$2;''/eo; - - (&gls_entry_defined($label) ? $true : $false) . $_; -} - -sub gls_add_entry{ - local($type, $label, $format, $text) = @_; - - local($oldfmt) = $GLSCURRENTFORMAT; - - if (defined($format) and $format) - { - $GLSCURRENTFORMAT=$format; - } - - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - - local($str) = &make_real_glossary_entry($label,$text,$type); - $GLSCURRENTFORMAT = $oldfmt; - - $str; -} - -sub do_cmd_glsadd{ - local($_) = @_; - local($optarg,$pat,$label,$str,$id,$type,$format); - ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; - - $label = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); - - $type = &gls_get_type($label); - - if (defined $type) - { - ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); - $format='' unless(defined($format)); - - &gls_add_entry($type,$label,$format,""); - } - else - { - &write_warnings("gls_add: glossary entry '$label' undefined"); - $str = ''; - } - - $str . $_; -} - -sub do_cmd_glsaddall{ - local($_) = @_; - local($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; - - local($format,$types); - - ($type,$optarg) = &get_keyval('types', $optarg); - - ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); - $format='' unless(defined($format)); - - local(@types) = keys(%gls_mark); - - if (defined($types)) - { - @types = split /,/, $types; - } - - foreach $type (@types) - { - # strip leasing and trailing spaces - $type=~s/^\s*([^\s]+)\s*$/\1/; - - foreach $label (@{$gls_entries{$type}}) - { - &gls_add_entry($type,$label,$format,""); - } - } - - $_; -} - -sub do_cmd_glsresetall{ - local($_) = @_; - local($types,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; - - local(@types) = keys(%gls_mark); - - if (defined($types) and $types) - { - @types = split /,/, $types; - } - - foreach $type (@types) - { - # strip leasing and trailing spaces - $type=~s/^\s*([^\s]+)\s*$/\1/; - - foreach $label (@{$gls_entries{$type}}) - { - &reset_entry($label); - } - } - - $_; -} - -sub do_cmd_glsunsetall{ - local($_) = @_; - local($types,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; - - local(@types) = keys(%gls_mark); - - if (defined($types) and $types) - { - @types = split /,/, $types; - } - - foreach $type (@types) - { - # strip leasing and trailing spaces - $type=~s/^\s*([^\s]+)\s*$/\1/; - - foreach $label (@{$gls_entries{$type}}) - { - &reset_entry($label); - } - } - - $_; -} - -sub make_glslink{ - local($type,$label,$format,$text) = @_; - local($str) = ''; - - if (defined $type) - { - $str = &gls_add_entry($type,$label,$format,$text); - } - else - { - &write_warnings("glossary '$type' undefined"); - } - - $str; -} - -sub do_cmd_glslink{ - local($_) = @_; - local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text,$type,$format,$str); - - ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; - - ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); - - $label = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); - - $text = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$text=$2;''/eo); - - # v1.01 removed following lines (\glslink doesn't have - # a final optional argument! - #local ($space) = ''; - #if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} - #($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; - - $type = &gls_get_type($label); - - #&make_glslink($type, $label, $format, $text).$space . $_; - &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, $text) . $_; -} - -sub do_cmd_glsentrydesc{ - local($_) = @_; - - $label = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); - - &gls_get_description($label).$_; -} - -sub do_cmd_Glsentrydesc{ - local($_) = @_; - - $label = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); - - ucfirst(&gls_get_description($label)).$_; -} - -sub do_cmd_glsentrytext{ - local($_) = @_; - - $label = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); - - &gls_get_text($label).$_; -} - -sub do_cmd_Glsentrytext{ - local($_) = @_; - - $label = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); - - ucfirst(&gls_get_text($label)).$_; -} - -sub do_cmd_glsentryname{ - local($_) = @_; - - $label = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); - - &gls_get_name($label).$_; -} - -sub do_cmd_Glsentryname{ - local($_) = @_; - - $label = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); - - ucfirst(&gls_get_name($label)).$_; -} - -sub do_cmd_glsentryfirst{ - local($_) = @_; - - $label = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); - - &gls_get_first($label).$_; -} - -sub do_cmd_Glsentryfirst{ - local($_) = @_; - - $label = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); - - ucfirst(&gls_get_first($label)).$_; -} - -sub do_cmd_glsentryplural{ - local($_) = @_; - - $label = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); - - &gls_get_plural($label).$_; -} - -sub do_cmd_Glsentryplural{ - local($_) = @_; - - $label = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); - - ucfirst(&gls_get_plural($label)).$_; -} - -sub do_cmd_glsentryfirstplural{ - local($_) = @_; - - $label = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); - - local($text)=$glsentry{$label}{'firstplural'}; - - unless (defined($text)) - { - &write_warnings("glossary entry '$label' has not been defined"); - $text = ''; - } - - "$text$_"; - &gls_get_firstplural($label).$_; -} - -sub do_cmd_Glsentryfirstplural{ - local($_) = @_; - - $label = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); - - ucfirst(&gls_get_firstplural($label)).$_; -} - -sub do_cmd_glsentrysymbol{ - local($_) = @_; - - $label = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); - - &gls_get_symbol($label).$_; -} - -sub do_cmd_Glsentrysymbol{ - local($_) = @_; - - $label = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); - - ucfirst(&gls_get_symbol($label)).$_; -} - -sub do_cmd_gls{ - local($_) = @_; - local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); - - ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; - - ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); - - $label = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); - - local ($space) = ''; - if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} - - $insert = ''; - ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; - - local($display) = ''; - - local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); - - if (&gls_used($label)) - { - # entry has already been used - - $text = &gls_get_text($label); - $display = &gls_get_display($type); - } - else - { - # entry hasn't been used - - $text = &gls_get_first($label); - $display = &gls_get_displayfirst($type); - - &unset_entry($label); - } - - local($args) = ''; - - local($id) = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $args .= "$OP$id$CP$text$OP$id$CP"; - - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $args .= "$OP$id$CP$glsentry{$label}{description}$OP$id$CP"; - - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $args .= "$OP$id$CP$glsentry{$label}{symbol}$OP$id$CP"; - - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $args .= "$OP$id$CP$insert$OP$id$CP"; - - local($link_text) = &translate_commands("$display$args"); - - &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, $link_text) .$space . $_; -} - -sub do_cmd_glspl{ - local($_) = @_; - local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); - - ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; - - ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); - - $label = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); - - local ($space) = ''; - if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} - - $insert = ''; - ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; - - local($display) = ''; - - local($type) = $glsentry{$label}{'type'}; - - if (&gls_used($label)) - { - # entry has already been used - - $text = &gls_get_plural($label); - $display = &gls_get_display($type);; - } - else - { - # entry hasn't been used - - $text = &gls_get_firstplural($label); - $display = &gls_get_displayfirst($type); - - &unset_entry($label); - } - - local($args) = ''; - - local($id) = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $args .= "$OP$id$CP$text$OP$id$CP"; - - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $args .= "$OP$id$CP$glsentry{$label}{description}$OP$id$CP"; - - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $args .= "$OP$id$CP$glsentry{$label}{symbol}$OP$id$CP"; - - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $args .= "$OP$id$CP$insert$OP$id$CP"; - - local($link_text) = &translate_commands("$display$args"); - - &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, $link_text) . $space . $_; -} - -sub do_cmd_Gls{ - local($_) = @_; - local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); - - ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; - - ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); - - $label = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); - - local ($space) = ''; - if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} - - $insert = ''; - ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; - - local($display) = ''; - - local($type) = $glsentry{$label}{'type'}; - - if (&gls_used($label)) - { - # entry has already been used - - $text = &gls_get_text($label); - $display = &gls_get_display($type);; - } - else - { - # entry hasn't been used - - $text = &gls_get_first($label); - $display = &gls_get_displayfirst($type); - - &unset_entry($label); - } - - local($args) = ''; - - local($id) = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $args .= "$OP$id$CP$text$OP$id$CP"; - - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $args .= "$OP$id$CP$glsentry{$label}{description}$OP$id$CP"; - - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $args .= "$OP$id$CP$glsentry{$label}{symbol}$OP$id$CP"; - - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $args .= "$OP$id$CP$insert$OP$id$CP"; - - local($link_text) = &translate_commands("$display$args"); - - &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, ucfirst($link_text)). $space . $_; -} - -sub do_cmd_Glspl{ - local($_) = @_; - local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); - - ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; - - ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); - - $label = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); - - local ($space) = ''; - if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} - - $insert = ''; - ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; - - local($display) = ''; - - local($type) = $glsentry{$label}{'type'}; - - if (&gls_used($label)) - { - # entry has already been used - - $text = &gls_get_plural($label); - $display = &gls_get_display($type);; - } - else - { - # entry hasn't been used - - $text = &gls_get_firstplural($label); - $display = &gls_get_displayfirst($type); - - &unset_entry($label); - } - - local($args) = ''; - - local($id) = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $args .= "$OP$id$CP$text$OP$id$CP"; - - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $args .= "$OP$id$CP$glsentry{$label}{description}$OP$id$CP"; - - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $args .= "$OP$id$CP$glsentry{$label}{symbol}$OP$id$CP"; - - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $args .= "$OP$id$CP$insert$OP$id$CP"; - - local($link_text) = &translate_commands("$display$args"); - - &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, ucfirst($link_text)).$space . $_; -} - -sub do_cmd_GLS{ - local($_) = @_; - local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); - - ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; - - ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); - - $label = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); - - local ($space) = ''; - if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} - - $insert = ''; - ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; - - local($display) = ''; - - local($type) = $glsentry{$label}{'type'}; - - if (&gls_used($label)) - { - # entry has already been used - - $text = &gls_get_text($label); - $display = &gls_get_display($type);; - } - else - { - # entry hasn't been used - - $text = &gls_get_first($label); - $display = &gls_get_displayfirst($type); - - &unset_entry($label); - } - - local($args) = ''; - - local($id) = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $args .= "$OP$id$CP$text$OP$id$CP"; - - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $args .= "$OP$id$CP$glsentry{$label}{description}$OP$id$CP"; - - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $args .= "$OP$id$CP$glsentry{$label}{symbol}$OP$id$CP"; - - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $args .= "$OP$id$CP$insert$OP$id$CP"; - - local($link_text) = &translate_commands("$display$args"); - - &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, uc($link_text)).$space . $_; -} - -sub do_cmd_GLSpl{ - local($_) = @_; - local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); - - ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; - - ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); - - $label = &missing_braces unless - (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); - - local ($space) = ''; - if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} - - $insert = ''; - ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; - - local($display) = ''; - - local($type) = $glsentry{$label}{'type'}; - - if (&gls_used($label)) - { - # entry has already been used - - $text = &gls_get_plural($label); - $display = &gls_get_display($type);; - } - else - { - # entry hasn't been used - - $text = &gls_get_firstplural($label); - $display = &gls_get_displayfirst($type); - - &unset_entry($label); - } - - local($args) = ''; - - local($id) = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $args .= "$OP$id$CP$text$OP$id$CP"; - - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $args .= "$OP$id$CP$glsentry{$label}{description}$OP$id$CP"; - - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $args .= "$OP$id$CP$glsentry{$label}{symbol}$OP$id$CP"; - - $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; - $args .= "$OP$id$CP$insert$OP$id$CP"; - - local($link_text) = &translate_commands("$display$args"); - - &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, uc($link_text)).$space . $_; -} - -sub do_cmd_glossarypreamble{ - local($_) = @_; - $_[0]; -} - -sub do_cmd_glossarypostamble{ - local($_) = @_; - $_[0]; -} - -sub do_cmd_glsnumformat{ - local($_) = @_; - - $_; -} - -sub do_cmd_hyperit{ - join('', "\\textit ", $_[0]); -} - -sub do_cmd_hyperrm{ - join('', "\\textrm ", $_[0]); -} - -sub do_cmd_hypertt{ - join('', "\\texttt ", $_[0]); -} - -sub do_cmd_hypersf{ - join('', "\\textsf ", $_[0]); -} - -sub do_cmd_hyperbf{ - join('', "\\textbf ", $_[0]); -} - -&ignore_commands( <<_IGNORED_CMDS_ ); -makeglossary -makeglossaries -_IGNORED_CMDS_ - -1; diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/database1.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/database1.tex index 8a78ad6d785..ab557f81460 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/database1.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/database1.tex @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ -% This is a sample database of glossary entries -% Only those entries used in the document with \glslink, \gls, -% \glspl, and uppercase variants will have entries in the -% glossary. Note that the type key is not used, as the -% glossary type can be specified in \loadglsentries + % This is a sample database of glossary entries + % Only those entries used in the document with \glslink, \gls, + % \glspl, and uppercase variants will have entries in the + % glossary. Note that the type key is not used, as the + % glossary type can be specified in \loadglsentries \newglossaryentry{array}{name=array, description={A list of values identified by a numeric value}} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/database2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/database2.tex index 032b2d2b586..1fb3042e36b 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/database2.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/database2.tex @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ -% This is a sample database of glossary entries -% Only those entries used in the document with \glslink, \gls, -% \glspl, and uppercase variants will have entries in the -% glossary. Note that the type key is not used, as the -% glossary type can be specified in \loadglsentries + % This is a sample database of glossary entries + % Only those entries used in the document with \glslink, \gls, + % \glspl, and uppercase variants will have entries in the + % glossary. Note that the type key is not used, as the + % glossary type can be specified in \loadglsentries -% Don't need to worry about makeindex special characters + % Don't need to worry about makeindex special characters \newglossaryentry{quote}{name={"}, description={the double quote symbol}} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/minimalgls.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/minimalgls.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b9d3cf6c7e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/minimalgls.tex @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + % This is a minimal file for testing and debugging + % the glossaries package. Change the class file as + % desired, and add the relevant package options to + % both the class file and the glossaries package. + % Change the sample glossary entry and acronym if + % required. + % + % Only add extra packages or commands if they + % contribute to whatever problem you are trying to + % test. + % + % Remember that the document will not be complete + % until you have successfully completed all of the + % following steps: + % 1. latex minimalgls + % 2. makeglossaries minimalgls (note no extension) + % 3. latex minimalgls + % A further run through LaTeX will be required to ensure that + % the table of contents is up to date if the toc option + % is used. +\documentclass{article} +\listfiles + + %\usepackage{glossaries} % acronym will go in main glossary +\usepackage[acronym]{glossaries} % make a separate list of acronyms + +\makeglossaries + +\newglossaryentry{sample}{name={sample}, +description={a sample entry}} + +\newacronym{aca}{aca}{a contrived acronym} + +\begin{document} + +A \gls{sample} entry and \gls{aca}. + +\printglossaries +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sample.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/sample.tex index 1555f0c31d3..f91ab534f8e 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sample.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/sample.tex @@ -15,14 +15,14 @@ sort=Perl, % need a sort key because name contains a command description=A scripting language} \newglossaryentry{pagelist}{name=page list, -% description value has to be enclosed in braces -% because it contains commas + % description value has to be enclosed in braces + % because it contains commas description={a list of individual pages or page ranges (e.g.\ 1,2,4,7-9)}} \newglossaryentry{mtrx}{name=matrix, description={rectangular array of quantities}, -% plural is not simply obtained by appending an s, so specify + % plural is not simply obtained by appending an s, so specify plural=matrices} \newcommand{\pardescription}{distinct section of piece of diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sample4col.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/sample4col.tex index 67b78bc4575..67b78bc4575 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sample4col.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/sample4col.tex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleAcr.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/sampleAcr.tex index 2b26e982be0..2b26e982be0 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleAcr.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/sampleAcr.tex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleAcrDesc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/sampleAcrDesc.tex index 4a54c674943..8014d656b42 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleAcrDesc.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/sampleAcrDesc.tex @@ -10,17 +10,17 @@ \makeglossaries \newglossaryentry{svm}{ -% how the entry name should appear in the glossary + % how the entry name should appear in the glossary name={Support vector machine (SVM)}, -% how the description should appear in the glossary -% since I have used sanitize={description=false} -% I have to protect fragile commands + % how the description should appear in the glossary + % since I have used sanitize={description=false} + % I have to protect fragile commands description={Statistical pattern recognition technique~\protect\cite{svm}}, -% how the entry should appear in the document text + % how the entry should appear in the document text text={svm}, -% how the entry should appear the first time it is -% used in the document text + % how the entry should appear the first time it is + % used in the document text first={support vector machine (svm)}} \newglossaryentry{ksvm}{ @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ first={kernel support vector machine}} \chapter{Support Vector Machines} The \gls{svm} is used widely in the area of pattern recognition. -% plural form with initial letter in uppercase: + % plural form with initial letter in uppercase: \Glspl{svm} are \ldots This is the text produced without a link: \glsentrytext{svm}. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleDB.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/sampleDB.tex index 7d58e32e2af..7d58e32e2af 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleDB.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/sampleDB.tex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleEq.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/sampleEq.tex index 4fb888c6cb9..39829705e77 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleEq.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/sampleEq.tex @@ -9,13 +9,13 @@ \makeglossaries -% Change the glossary headings + % Change the glossary headings \renewcommand{\entryname}{Notation} \renewcommand{\descriptionname}{Function Name} \renewcommand{\pagelistname}{Number of Formula} -% define glossary entries + % define glossary entries \newglossaryentry{Gamma}{name=\ensuremath{\Gamma(z)}, description=Gamma function, @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ description=Euler's constant,sort=C} description=Catalan's constant,sort=G} \begin{document} -\title{A Sample Document Using glossary.sty} +\title{A Sample Document Using glossaries.sty} \author{Nicola Talbot} \maketitle diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleEqPg.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/sampleEqPg.tex index 19531e3897e..218b1a3fed4 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleEqPg.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/sampleEqPg.tex @@ -13,27 +13,27 @@ \renewcommand{\glossarypreamble}{Numbers in italic indicate the equation number, numbers in bold indicate page numbers where the main definition occurs.\par} -% set the glossary number style to italic -% hyperit is used instead of textit because -% the hyperref package is being used. + % set the glossary number style to italic + % hyperit is used instead of textit because + % the hyperref package is being used. \renewcommand{\glsnumberformat}[1]{\hyperit{#1}} -% 1st column heading + % 1st column heading \renewcommand{\entryname}{Notation} -% 2nd column heading + % 2nd column heading \renewcommand{\descriptionname}{Function Name} -% 3rd column heading + % 3rd column heading \renewcommand{\pagelistname}{} -% Redefine header row so that it -% adds a blank row after the title row + % Redefine header row so that it + % adds a blank row after the title row \renewcommand{\glossaryheader}{\bfseries\entryname & \bfseries\descriptionname&\bfseries\pagelistname\\ & & \\\endhead} -% Define glossary entries + % Define glossary entries \newglossaryentry{Gamma}{name=\ensuremath{\Gamma(z)}, description=Gamma function,sort=Gamma} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleNtn.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/sampleNtn.tex index 04af87e3562..b33269174f6 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleNtn.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/sampleNtn.tex @@ -4,12 +4,12 @@ \usepackage{html} \usepackage[toc]{glossaries} -% Define a new glossary type called notation + % Define a new glossary type called notation \newglossary[nlg]{notation}{not}{ntn}{Notation} \makeglossaries -% Notation definitions + % Notation definitions \newglossaryentry{not:set}{type=notation, % glossary type name={$\mathcal{S}$}, @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ name={$!$}, description={factorial}, sort=factorial} -% Main glossary definitions + % Main glossary definitions \newglossaryentry{gls:set}{name=set, description={A collection of distinct objects}} @@ -40,13 +40,13 @@ description={A collection of distinct objects}} description={The number of elements in the specified set}} \begin{document} -\title{Sample Document using glossary Package} +\title{Sample Document using the glossaries Package} \author{Nicola Talbot} \pagenumbering{alph} \maketitle \begin{abstract} -%stop hyperref complaining about duplicate page identifiers: + %stop hyperref complaining about duplicate page identifiers: \pagenumbering{Alph} This is a sample document illustrating the use of the \textsf{glossaries} package. In this example, a new glossary type @@ -60,6 +60,9 @@ doesn't have associated numbers. \tableofcontents \printglossaries + %\printglossary + %\setglossarysection{section} + %\printglossary[type=notation] \chapter{Introduction} \pagenumbering{arabic} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleSec.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/sampleSec.tex index ccefe8c19e1..ccefe8c19e1 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleSec.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/sampleSec.tex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/scripts/makeglossaries b/Master/texmf-dist/scripts/glossaries/makeglossaries index aaa0c1b36d0..20a4b236fff 100755 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/scripts/makeglossaries +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/scripts/glossaries/makeglossaries @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ -#!/usr/bin/perl +#!/usr/bin/perl -w # File : makeglossaries # Author : Nicola Talbot -# Version : 1.0 (2007/05/10) +# Version : 1.2 (2008/03/02) # Description: simple Perl script that calls makeindex. # Intended for use with "glossaries.sty" (saves having to remember # all the various switches) @@ -25,43 +25,63 @@ # and the derived files glossaries.sty, glossary-hypernav.sty, # glossary-list.sty, glossary-long.sty, glossary-super.sty, # glossaries.perl. Also makeglossaries and makeglossaries. +# +# History: +# v1.2 (2008-03-02) : +# * added support for --help and --version +# * improved error handling +# v1.1 (2008-02-13) : +# * added -w and strict +# * added check to ensure .tex file not passed to makeglossaries +# +# v1.0 (2007-05-10) : Initial release. use Getopt::Std; +use strict; + +$Getopt::Std::STANDARD_HELP_VERSION = 1; + +my $version="1.2 (2008-03-02)"; + +my($opt_q, $opt_t, $opt_o, $opt_s, $opt_p, $opt_g, $opt_c, $opt_r, + $opt_l, $opt_i)=("","","","","","","","","",""); + +getopts('s:o:t:p:ilqrcg'); -if ($#ARGV < 0) +unless ($#ARGV == 0) { - die "Syntax : $0 [-ilqrcg] [-s sty] [-o gls] [-t log] [-p num] <filename>\n"; + die "makeglossaries: Need exactly one file argument.\nUse `makeglossaries --help' for help.\n"; } -getopt('sotp'); -getopts('ilqrcg'); - # define known extensions - %exttype = ( +my %exttype = ( main => {in=>'glo', out=>'gls', 'log'=>'glg'}, ); -$ext = ''; +my $ext = ''; +my $name = $ARGV[0]; -if (length(@ARGV[0]) < 4) -{ - $name = @ARGV[0]; -} -elsif (substr(@ARGV[0],-4,1) eq ".") +# modified this to make sure users don't try passing the +# tex file: +if (length($ARGV[0]) > 3 and substr($ARGV[0],-4,1) eq ".") { - $name = substr(@ARGV[0],0,length(@ARGV[0])-4); + $name = substr($ARGV[0],0,length($ARGV[0])-4); - $ext = substr(@ARGV[0],-3,3); -} -else -{ - $name = @ARGV[0]; + $ext = substr($ARGV[0],-3,3); + + if (lc($ext) eq 'tex') + { + die("Don't pass the tex file to makeglossaries:\n" + ."either omit the extension to make all the glossaries, " + ."or specify one of the glossary files, e.g. $name.glo, to " + ."make just that glossary.\n") + } } -$istfile = "$name.ist"; +my $istfile = "$name.ist"; -# check log file for other glossary types +# check aux file for other glossary types # and for ist file name if (open AUXFILE, "$name.aux") @@ -91,12 +111,12 @@ if (open AUXFILE, "$name.aux") } else { - print "unable to open $name.aux\n"; + print STDERR "Unable to open $name.aux: $!\n"; } # save all the general makeindex switches -$mkidxopts = ''; +my $mkidxopts = ''; if ($opt_i) { @@ -140,9 +160,9 @@ unless ($opt_s eq "") if ($ext ne '') { - %thistype = %{$exttype{'main'}}; #default + my %thistype = %{$exttype{'main'}}; #default - foreach $type (keys %exttype) + foreach my $type (keys %exttype) { if ($exttype{$type}{'in'} eq $ext) { @@ -152,6 +172,8 @@ if ($ext ne '') } } + my $outfile; + if ($opt_o eq "") { $outfile = "$name.$thistype{out}"; @@ -161,6 +183,8 @@ if ($ext ne '') $outfile = $opt_o; } + my $transcript; + if ($opt_t eq "") { $transcript = "$name.$thistype{'log'}"; @@ -175,14 +199,16 @@ if ($ext ne '') } else { - foreach $type (keys %exttype) + foreach my $type (keys %exttype) { - %thistype = %{$exttype{$type}}; + my %thistype = %{$exttype{$type}}; - $inputfile = "$name.$thistype{in}"; + my $inputfile = "$name.$thistype{in}"; if (-r $inputfile) { + my $outfile; + if ($opt_o eq "") { $outfile = "$name.$thistype{out}"; @@ -192,6 +218,8 @@ else $outfile = $opt_o; } + my $transcript; + if ($opt_t eq "") { $transcript = "$name.$thistype{'log'}"; @@ -204,17 +232,17 @@ else &makeindex($inputfile,$outfile,$transcript, $istfile,$mkidxopts,$opt_q); } - elsif (!$opt_q) + else { - print "no read access for '$inputfile'\n"; + print STDERR "No read access for '$inputfile': $!\n"; } } } sub makeindex{ - local($in,$out,$trans,$ist,$rest,$quiet) = @_; - local($name,$cmdstr,$buffer,$n,$i,$j); - local(@stuff,@item); + my($in,$out,$trans,$ist,$rest,$quiet) = @_; + my($name,$cmdstr,$buffer,$n,$i,$j); + my(@stuff,@item); $cmdstr = "$rest -s $ist -t $trans -o $out $in"; @@ -226,4 +254,31 @@ sub makeindex{ `makeindex $cmdstr`; } +sub HELP_MESSAGE{ + print "\nSyntax : makeglossaries [options] <filename>\n\n"; + print "For use with the glossaries package to pass relevant\n"; + print "files to makeindex\n\n"; + print "<filename>\tBase name of glossary file(s). This should\n"; + print "\t\tbe the name of your main LaTeX document without any\n"; + print "\t\textension.\n"; + print "\nOptions:\n"; + print "-c\t\tCompress intermediate blanks\n"; + print "-g\t\tEmploy German word ordering\n"; + print "-l\t\tLetter ordering\n"; + print "-o <gls>\tUse <gls> as the output file.\n"; + print "-p <num>\tSet the starting page number to be <num>\n"; + print "-q\t\tQuiet mode\n"; + print "-r\t\tDisable implicit page range formation\n"; + print "-s <sty>\tEmploy <sty> as the style file\n"; + print "-t <log>\tEmploy <log> as the transcript file\n"; + print "\nSee makeindex documentation for further details on these "; + print "options\n"; +} + +sub VERSION_MESSAGE{ + print "Makeglossaries Version $version\n"; + print "Copyright (C) 2007 Nicola L C Talbot\n"; + print "This material is subject to the LaTeX Project Public License.\n"; +} + 1; diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/scripts/glossaries/makeglossaries.bat b/Master/texmf-dist/scripts/glossaries/makeglossaries.bat new file mode 100755 index 00000000000..64a6a20750c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/scripts/glossaries/makeglossaries.bat @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +@rem = '-*- Perl -*-
+@echo off
+perl -S "%~dp0makeglossaries" %*
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries/glossaries.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries/glossaries.dtx index a47abec2adb..08536be6b18 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries/glossaries.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries/glossaries.dtx @@ -2,17 +2,24 @@ % glossaries.dtx generated using makedtx version 0.94b (c) Nicola Talbot % Command line args: % -macrocode "glossaries\.perl" +% -macrocode ".*\.tex" % -src "glossaries.sty\Z=>glossaries.sty" % -src "(glossary-.+)\.(sty)\Z=>\1.\2" -% -src "glossaries\.perl\Z=>glossaries.perl" +% -src "(glossaries-babel)\.(sty)\Z=>\1.\2" +% -src "(glossaries-dictionary-.+)\.(dict)\Z=>\1.\2" +% -src "(minimalgls\.tex)\Z=>\1" +% -src "(sample.*\.tex)\Z=>\1" +% -src "(database.*\.tex)\Z=>\1" +% -src "(glossaries\.perl)\Z=>\1" % -author "Nicola Talbot" % -dir "source" % -setambles "glossaries\.perl=>\nopreamble\nopostamble" % -comment "glossaries\.perl" -% -doc "manual.tex" +% -comment ".*\.tex" +% -doc "glossaries-manual.tex" % -codetitle "Documented Code" % glossaries -% Created on 2007/10/13 15:35 +% Created on 2008/3/4 12:06 %\fi %\iffalse %<*package> @@ -35,7 +42,7 @@ %\fi % \iffalse % Doc-Source file to use with LaTeX2e -% Copyright (C) 2007 Nicola Talbot, all rights reserved. +% Copyright (C) 2008 Nicola Talbot, all rights reserved. % \fi % \iffalse %<*driver> @@ -45,7 +52,7 @@ \usepackage[colorlinks, bookmarks, hyperindex=false, - pdfauthor={N.L.C. Talbot}, + pdfauthor={Nicola L.C. Talbot}, pdftitle={glossaries.sty: LaTeX2e Package to Assist Generating Glossaries}, pdfkeywords={LaTeX,package,glossary,acronyms}]{hyperref} @@ -63,40 +70,45 @@ \makeatother \RecordChanges \PageIndex -\CheckSum{3027} +\CheckSum{4357} \CodelineNumbered \newcommand*{\termdef}[1]{\emph{#1}\iterm{#1}} \newcommand*{\term}[1]{#1\iterm{#1}} \newcommand*{\iterm}[1]{\index{#1|main}} +\newcommand{\dq}[1]{``#1''} \newcommand*{\istkey}[1]{\texttt{#1}\index{makeindex=\texttt{makeindex}>#1=\texttt{#1}|hyperpage}} -\newcommand*{\icmdname}[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}\SpecialMainIndex{#1}} +\newcommand*{\ics}[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}\SpecialMainIndex{#1}} \newcommand*{\appname}[1]{\texttt{#1}\index{#1=\texttt{#1}|hyperpage}} \newcommand*{\mkidxspch}{\index{makeindex=\texttt{makeindex}>special characters|hyperpage}} \newcommand*{\igloskey}[2][newglossaryentry]{\index{#1 options=\cs{#1} options>#2=\textsf{#2}|hyperpage}} \newcommand*{\gloskey}[2][newglossaryentry]{\textsf{#2}\igloskey[#1]{#2}} +\newcommand*{\ipkgopt}[2][]{% +\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{% +\index{package options>#2=\textsf{#2}|hyperpage}}{% +\index{package options>#2=\textsf{#2}>#1=\textsf{#1}|hyperpage}}} \newcommand*{\pkgopt}[2][]{% \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{% \textsf{#2}\index{package options>#2=\textsf{#2}|hyperpage}}{% \textsf{#2=#1}\index{package options>#2=\textsf{#2}>#1=\textsf{#1}|hyperpage}}} -\newcommand*{\pkgoptval}[2]{\textsf{#1}\index{package options>#2>#1|hyperpage}} +\newcommand*{\pkgoptval}[2]{\textsf{#1}\index{package options>#2=\textsf{#2}>#1=\textsf{#1}|hyperpage}} \newcommand*{\glostyle}[1]{\textsf{#1}\index{glossary styles>#1|hyperpage}} \newcommand*{\filetype}[1]{\texttt{#1}\index{file types>#1|hyperpage}} -\newcommand*{\styname}[1]{\textsf{#1}\index{#1 package=\textsf{#1} package|hyperpage}} +\newcommand*{\sty}[1]{\textsf{#1}} +\newcommand*{\isty}[1]{\sty{#1}\index{#1 package=\sty{#1} package|hyperpage}} \newcommand*{\envname}[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\begin{document} -\DocInput{glossaries.dtx} +\begin{document}\DocInput{glossaries.dtx} \end{document} %</driver> %\fi %\MakeShortVerb{"} %\DeleteShortVerb{\|} % -% \title{glossaries.sty v 1.08: \LaTeXe\ Package to Assist Generating Glossaries} +% \title{glossaries.sty v 1.11: \LaTeXe\ Package to Assist Generating Glossaries} % \author{Nicola L.C. Talbot\\[10pt] %School of Computing Sciences\\ %University of East Anglia\\ @@ -104,31 +116,47 @@ %NR4 7TJ. United Kingdom.\\ %\url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/}} % -% \date{13th October 2007} +% \date{2nd March 2008} % \maketitle %\tableofcontents % % \section{Introduction} % % \changes{1.0}{2007 May 16}{Initial version} -%The \styname{glossaries} package is provided to assist -%generating glossaries. It has a certain amount of flexibility, -%allowing the user to customize the format of the glossary, -%define new glossary styles, and multiple glossaries. It -%also supports acronyms, and glossary styles which -%include symbols in addition to a name and description for a -%given glossary entry. There is provision for loading a database -%of glossary terms, where only those terms used in the -%text are added to the glossary. This -%package replaces the \styname{glossary} package which is now +%The \sty{glossaries} package is provided to assist generating +%glossaries. It has a certain amount of flexibility, allowing the user +%to customize the format of the glossary and define multiple glossaries. +%It also supports acronyms and glossary styles that include +%symbols (in addition to a name and description) for glossary +%entries. There is provision for loading a database of glossary terms +%where only those terms used in the text are added to the glossary. +%This package replaces the \isty{glossary} package which is now %obsolete. % -%The \styname{glossaries} package comes with the Perl script +%As from version 1.08, the \sty{glossaries} package now has +%limited multi-lingual support, thanks to all the people who have sent +%me the relevant translations either via email or via comp.text.tex. +%However you must load \isty{babel} \emph{before} +%\sty{glossaries} to enable this. (See \autoref{sec:predefinednames} for thepredefined names used by the \sty{glossaries} package.) +%As from version 1.1, the \sty{glossaries} package also supports +%Till~Tantau's \isty{translator} package provided it is loaded +%before the \sty{glossaries} package. This makes it easier to change +%the default translations or add new dictionaries. +%If you don't want to use the predefined translations, you can use the +%package option \pkgopt[false]{translate} and supply your own translations. +% +%This documentation is structured as follows: \autoref{sec:quick} is for people who want a few quick pointers of how to get started, +%without having to read through lengthy descriptions, +%\autoref{sec:overview} gives an overview of available commands. +%\subsection{Generating the associated glossary files} +%\label{sec:makeglossaries} +% +%The \sty{glossaries} package comes with the Perl script %\appname{makeglossaries} which will run \appname{makeindex} on %all the glossary files using a customized \appname{makeindex} -%style file (which is created by \icmdname{makeglossaries}). +%\filetype{.ist} style file (which is created by \ics{makeglossaries}). %The relevant extensions are obtained from the -%auxiliary file, so you only need to pass the basename as the +%auxiliary file, so you should only pass the basename as the %argument. For example, if your document is called %\texttt{myfile.tex}, do: %\begin{verbatim} @@ -146,8 +174,8 @@ % %If you don't have Perl installed, you will have to run %\appname{makeindex} for each glossary type you have defined. -%For example, if you have used the \pkgopt{acronym} package option, -%so you have both a main glossary as well as a list of acronyms, you +%For example, if you have used the \pkgopt{acronym} package option +%then you will have both a main glossary as well as a list of acronyms, so you %will need to do (assuming your document is called \texttt{myfile.tex}): %\begin{verbatim} %makeindex -s myfile.ist -t myfile.glg -o myfile.gls myfile.glo @@ -156,29 +184,23 @@ %This requires remembering all extensions for each of the glossaries %defined in your document, so where possible you should use %\appname{makeglossaries} instead to reduce the possibility of error. +%Don't pass all the glossary files in a single call to +%\appname{makeindex} or it will merge all your glossaries into a +%single glossary. % -%As from version 1.08, the \styname{glossaries} package now has -%limited multi-lingual support, thanks to all the people who have sent -%me the relevant translations either via email or via comp.text.tex. -%However, you must load \styname{babel} \emph{before} -%\styname{glossaries}. (See \autoref{sec:predefinednames} for the -%predefined names used by the \styname{glossaries} package.) -% -%This documentation is structured as follows: \autoref{sec:quick} -%is for people who want a few quick pointers of how to get started, -%without having to read through lengthy descriptions, -%\autoref{sec:overview} gives an overview of available commands -%and their syntax, \autoref{sec:code} contains the documented -%source code for those who want to know more about how the -%package works, and how to do more complicated things, such as -%changing the way glossary entries appear. -% +%If any problems occur, remember to check the transcript files +%(e.g.\ \filetype{.glg} or \filetype{.alg}) for messages. %\subsection{Troubleshooting} % -%There is a list of frequently asked questions for the -%\styname{glossaries} package available at: -%\url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/packages/faq/}. +%The glossaries package comes with a minimal file called +%\texttt{minimalgls.tex} which can be used for testing. This +%should be located in \texttt{texmf/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/}. Further +%information on debugging \LaTeX\ code is available at +%\url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/minexample/}. % +%There is a list of frequently asked questions for the +%\sty{glossaries} package available at +%\url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/packages/faq/glossariesfaq.html}. %\section{A Quick Guide For The Impatient} %\label{sec:quick} % @@ -187,28 +209,28 @@ %lengthy descriptions. % %\begin{enumerate} -%\item Load \styname{glossaries} \emph{after} \styname{hyperref}: +%\item Load \sty{glossaries} \emph{after} \isty{hyperref}: %\begin{verbatim} %\usepackage{hyperref} %\usepackage{glossaries} %\end{verbatim} -%Similarly for the \styname{html} package: +%Similarly for the \isty{html} package: %\begin{verbatim} %\usepackage{html} %\usepackage{glossaries} %\end{verbatim} % -%\item Always use \icmdname{makeglossaries} if you want the glossary +%\item Always use \ics{makeglossaries} if you want the glossary %entries to be written to the glossary file: %\begin{verbatim} %\documentclass{article} %\usepackage{glossaries} %\makeglossaries %\end{verbatim} -%If you don't use \icmdname{makeglossaries}, your glossaries will +%If you don't use \ics{makeglossaries}, your glossaries will %not appear in the document! % -%\item Use \icmdname{printglossaries} to make your glossaries appear +%\item Use \ics{printglossaries} to make your glossaries appear %in the document at that point. For example: %\begin{verbatim} %\maketitle @@ -226,24 +248,30 @@ %makeglossaries myfile %latex myfile %\end{verbatim} +%(You may need to run \LaTeX\ again if you have used the \pkgopt{toc} +%package option.) %If you use Windows, there is a batch file called %\texttt{makeglossaries.bat} which you can use, but you will %still need Perl installed. % %\item New glossaries can be defined using:\par -%\icmdname{newglossary}% +%\ics{newglossary}\oarg{log-ext}% %\marg{label}\marg{in-ext}\marg{out-ext}% %\marg{title}\par where \meta{label} is an identifying label, %\meta{in-ext} is the extension of the file to be created %by \appname{makeindex} (called by \appname{makeglossaries}), %\meta{out-ext} is the extension of the file to be read by %\appname{makeindex} and \meta{title} is the title for this -%new glossary. Example: +%new glossary. The first optional argument \meta{log-ext} specifies +%the extension of the \appname{makeindex} transcript file. Example: %\begin{verbatim} -%\newglossary{notation}{not}{ntn}{Notation} +%\newglossary[nlg]{notation}{not}{ntn}{Notation} %\end{verbatim} %This glossary's label is \texttt{notation} and its title -%will be Notation. +%will be Notation. If you use \appname{makeglossaries}, the +%\appname{makeindex} transcript will be written to a file with the +%extension \filetype{.nlg}. If \meta{log-ext} is omitted, the extension +%\filetype{.glg} will be used. % %\item Any new glossaries must be defined before %\cs{makeglossaries} @@ -255,7 +283,7 @@ %\end{verbatim} % %\item If you use the \pkgopt{acronym} package option, the -%\styname{glossaries} package +%\sty{glossaries} package %will automatically create a new glossary type labelled %\texttt{acronym}: %\begin{verbatim} @@ -263,8 +291,8 @@ %\end{verbatim} % %\item If your pages have a hyphen compositor (i.e.\ your page -%numbers appear in the form 2-1), redefine \icmdname{glscompositor} -%\emph{before} \icmdname{makeglossaries}: +%numbers appear in the form 2-1), redefine \ics{glscompositor} +%\emph{before} \ics{makeglossaries}: %\begin{verbatim} %\documentclass{article} %\usepackage{glossaries} @@ -279,7 +307,7 @@ %\end{verbatim} % %\item Define a new entry with:\par -%\icmdname{newglossaryentry}\marg{label}\marg{key-val list}\par +%\ics{newglossaryentry}\marg{label}\marg{key-val list}\par %The \meta{key-val list} must at least contain a \gloskey{name} %key and a \gloskey{description} key. %For example: @@ -293,7 +321,7 @@ % %\item If the entry name starts with an accented letter, you will %need to group the first letter (otherwise it will cause a -%problem for \icmdname{Gls} and \icmdname{Glspl}): +%problem for \ics{Gls} and \ics{Glspl}): %\begin{verbatim} %\newglossaryentry{elite}{name={{\'e}lite}, %description={select group or class}} @@ -321,7 +349,7 @@ %\end{verbatim} % %\item Plural forms are assumed to be the singular form with an -%``s'' appended, unless otherwise specified. To specify an +%\dq{s} appended, unless otherwise specified. To specify an %irregular plural, use the \gloskey{plural} key. For example: %\begin{verbatim} %\newglossaryentry{matrix}{name=matrix, @@ -337,8 +365,8 @@ %text=matrix, %plural=matrices} %\end{verbatim} -%In this example, the entry name appears as Matrix in the -%glossary, and either matrix or matrices in the text. +%In this example, the entry name appears as \dq{Matrix} in the +%glossary, and either \dq{matrix} or \dq{matrices} in the text. % %\item The way the term appears on first use can be different %to the way it appears subsequently: @@ -349,13 +377,13 @@ %text=SM, %firstplural=singular matrices (SMs)} %\end{verbatim} -%In this example, the entry name appears as Singular Matrix in -%the glossary, and in the text it appears as singular matrix (SM) -%or singular matrices (SMs) the first time the entry is used, -%and subsequently appears as SM or SMs. +%In this example, the entry name appears as \dq{Singular Matrix} in +%the glossary, and in the text it appears as \dq{singular matrix (SM)} +%or \dq{singular matrices (SMs)} the first time the entry is used, +%and subsequently appears as \dq{SM} or \dq{SMs}. % %\item The quick and easy way to define an acronym is to use:\par -%\icmdname{newacronym}\oarg{key-val list}\marg{label}\marg{abbrev}% +%\ics{newacronym}\oarg{key-val list}\marg{label}\marg{abbrev}% %\marg{long}\par %For example: %\begin{verbatim} @@ -371,43 +399,44 @@ %plural={SVMs}, %firstplural={support vector machines (SVMs)}} %\end{verbatim} -%(The value of \icmdname{acronymtype} varies depending on whether -%the glossary package option \pkgopt{acronym} is used or not. +%(The value of \ics{acronymtype} varies depending on whether +%the \pkgopt{acronym} package option is used or not. %The optional argument \meta{key-val list} can be used to -%override any of the \icmdname{newglossaryentry} keys, for +%override any of the \ics{newglossaryentry} keys; for %example, if the acronym has an irregular plural.) % %\item The font used to display the entry name in the glossary -%is governed by \icmdname{glsnamefont}. This can be redefined +%is governed by \ics{glsnamefont}. This can be redefined %as required. For example, to make the entry names appear %in a medium sans-serif font do: %\begin{verbatim} %\renewcommand{\glsnamefont}[1]{\textsf{\mdseries #1}} %\end{verbatim} %Note that the list-like glossary styles defined in the -%\styname{glossary-list} package place the entry name in -%the optional argument to \icmdname{item}, so they will -%appear in bold, unless you redefine \icmdname{glsnamefont}. +%\isty{glossary-list} package place the entry name in +%the optional argument to \ics{item}, so they will +%appear in bold, unless you redefine \ics{glsnamefont} to counteract the +%bold font. % -%\item In the document use \icmdname{gls}\marg{label} +%\item In the document use \ics{gls}\marg{label} %to use a predefined term (this will also enter the term into -%the associated glossary output file.) For example: +%the associated glossary output file). For example: %\begin{verbatim} %A \gls{singmtx} is a matrix with a zero determinant. %\end{verbatim} % %\item Other variations: %\begin{itemize} -%\item \icmdname{Gls}\marg{label} : like \cs{gls}, +%\item \ics{Gls}\marg{label} : like \cs{gls}, %but with first letter in upper case -%\item \icmdname{GLS}\marg{label} : like \cs{gls}, +%\item \ics{GLS}\marg{label} : like \cs{gls}, %but all upper case. -%\item \icmdname{glspl}\marg{label} : use plural -%\item \icmdname{Glspl}\marg{label} : use plural with +%\item \ics{glspl}\marg{label} : use plural +%\item \ics{Glspl}\marg{label} : use plural with %first letter in upper case -%\item \icmdname{GLSpl}\marg{label} : use plural but +%\item \ics{GLSpl}\marg{label} : use plural but %all upper case -%\item \icmdname{glslink}\marg{label}\marg{link text} : +%\item \ics{glslink}\marg{label}\marg{link text} : %use \meta{link text} to link to the given entry in the glossary. %\end{itemize} %For example, the following will produce the plural form with @@ -419,7 +448,7 @@ %\item Additional text can be appended to the link using the %end optional argument. For example, to form the possessive: %\begin{verbatim} -%The \gls{singmtx}['s] dimensions are not necessarily equal. +%The \gls{singmtx}['s] dimensions \ldots %\end{verbatim} % %\item The format of the associated entry number can be @@ -434,19 +463,23 @@ %page number in bold (since it uses \cs{textbf}) but %it will no longer have a hyperlink (if hyperlinks are enabled.) % -%\item The \styname{glossaries} package provides commands to +%\item The \sty{glossaries} package provides commands to %change the font whilst ensuring that the number remains a %hyperlink. These are of the form \cs{hyper}\meta{xx} and %are equivalent to the standard font changing commands of the -%form \cs{text}\meta{xx}, as well as \icmdname{hyperemph} -%(which uses \icmdname{emph}.) For example: +%form \cs{text}\meta{xx}, as well as \ics{hyperemph} +%(which uses \ics{emph}.) For example: %\begin{verbatim} %The primary definition of \glspl[format=hyperbf]{singmtx}. %\end{verbatim} % +%\item Don't use declarations in \gloskey[glslink]{format} as this can +%cause unpredictable results, as there is no guarantee that the effect +%will be localised to the required text. +% %\item Entries can be added to the glossary without producing -%any text using \icmdname{glsadd}\marg{label} or -%\icmdname{glsaddall}. These commands also taken an optional +%any text using \ics{glsadd}\marg{label} or +%\ics{glsaddall}. These commands also taken an optional %argument where you can specify the format. For example %\begin{verbatim} %\glsadd[format=hyperbf]{singmtx} @@ -455,9 +488,9 @@ %glossary file for the specified term, but will not produce %any text where the command occurs. % -%\item A number range can be entered using "format=(" and "format=)" -%to mark the beginning and ending of the range\footnote{This is new -%to version 1.01}. For example: +%\item A number range can be entered using \verb|format=(| and +%\verb"format=)" to mark the beginning and ending of the +%range\footnote{This is new to version 1.01}. For example: %\begin{verbatim} % \glsadd[format=(]{singmtx} % This is a very long section all about \glspl{singmtx}. @@ -466,10 +499,11 @@ % % \glsadd[format=)]{singmtx} %\end{verbatim} -%This is equivalent to \appname{makeindex}'s "|(" and "|)" formats. +%This is equivalent to \appname{makeindex}'s \verb"|(" and \verb"|)" +%formats. % %\item You can combine the range markers with a formatting command -%(again without the preceding backslash.) For example: +%(again without the preceding backslash). For example: %\begin{verbatim} % This is the start of a very long section all % about \glspl[format=(hyperbf]{singmtx}. @@ -483,9 +517,9 @@ %\item Only those terms that have actually been used in the %document will be placed in the glossary. If you have defined %a term that doesn't appear in the document, then it means -%you haven't used it in the text (either via \icmdname{glslink} -%or \icmdname{gls} and related commands, or via \icmdname{glsadd} -%or \icmdname{glsaddall}.) +%you haven't used it in the text (either via \ics{glslink} +%or \ics{gls} and related commands, or via \ics{glsadd} +%or \ics{glsaddall}.) % %\item To change the sorting order, use the \gloskey{sort} key. %For example: @@ -525,15 +559,14 @@ %\item Glossary styles can be set using the \pkgopt{style} %package option. For example: %\begin{verbatim} -%\usepackage[style=long3col]{glossary} +%\usepackage[style=long3col]{glossaries} %\end{verbatim} -%or using \icmdname{glossarystyle}\marg{style}. For example: +%or using \ics{glossarystyle}\marg{style}. For example: %\begin{verbatim} %\glossarystyle{altlist} %\end{verbatim} -%The predefined glossary styles provided by the \styname{glossaries} -%bundle are detailed in \autoref{sec:styles}. -% +%The predefined glossary styles provided by the \sty{glossaries} +%bundle are listed in \autoref{sec:styles}. %\item The list of numbers associated with each glossary entry %can be suppressed using the package option \pkgopt{nonumberlist}: %\begin{verbatim} @@ -556,20 +589,31 @@ %\end{verbatim} % %\end{enumerate} -% %\section{Overview}\label{sec:overview} % \changes{1.02}{2007 May 25}{added overview section} % %\subsection{Package Options} % -%The \styname{glossaries} package options are as follows: +%The \sty{glossaries} package options are as follows: %\begin{description} -%\item[\pkgopt{toc}] Add the glossaries to the table of contents -%\item[\pkgopt{section}] This is a key=value option. Its value should -%be the name of a sectional unit (e.g.\ "chapter"). This will make -%the glossaries appear in the named sectional unit, otherwise the -%each glossary will appear in an unnumber chapter, if chapters -%exists, otherwise in an unnumbered section. Example: +%\item[\pkgopt{toc}] Add the glossaries to the table of contents. +% +%\item[\pkgopt{numberline}] When used with \pkgopt{toc}, this will +%add \cs{numberline}\verb|{}| in the final argument of +%\cs{addcontentsline}. This will align the table of contents entry +%with the numbered section titles. Note that this option has no +%effect if the \pkgopt{toc} option is omitted. If \pkgopt{toc} is +%used without \pkgopt{numberline}, the title will be aligned with +%the section numbers rather than the section titles. +% +%\item[\pkgopt{acronym}] Make a separate glossary for acronyms. +% +%\item[\pkgopt{section}] This is a \meta{key}=\meta{value} option. Its +%value should be the name of a sectional unit (e.g.\ chapter). +%This will make the glossaries appear in the named sectional unit, +%otherwise each glossary will appear in a chapter, if chapters +%exists, otherwise in a section. Unnumbered sectional units will be used +%by default. Example: %\begin{verbatim} %\usepackage[section=subsection]{glossaries} %\end{verbatim} @@ -581,41 +625,63 @@ %\begin{verbatim} %\usepackage[section=section]{glossaries} %\end{verbatim} -%Note that the starred form of the sectioning command is always used -%since glossaries tend to be placed in unnumbered sections or chapters. -%If you want the glossaries to appeared in a numbered section, you -%will need to set \DescribeMacro{\glossarysection}\cs{glossarysection} -%to the relevant sectioning command. For example, to make the -%glossaries appear in numbered chapters, do: +%You can change this value later in the document using +%\ics{setglossarysection}\marg{type}. +% +%\item[\pkgopt{numberedsection}] +%The glossaries are placed in unnumbered sectional units by default, +%but this can be changed using \pkgopt{numberedsection}. This option can take +%three possible values: \pkgoptval{false}{numberedsection} (no +%number, i.e.\ use starred form), \pkgoptval{nolabel}{numberedsection} +%(numbered, i.e.\ unstarred form, but not labelled) and +%\pkgoptval{autolabel}{numberedsection} (numbered with automatic +%labelling). If \pkgopt[autolabel]{numberedsection} is used, each +%glossary is given a label that matches the glossary type, so the +%main (default) glossary is labelled \texttt{main}, the list of +%acronyms is labelled \texttt{acronym}\footnote{if the +%\pkgopt{acronym} option is used, otherwise the list of +%acronyms is the main glossary} and additional glossaries are labelled +%using the value specified in the first mandatory argument to +%\cs{newglossary}. For example, if you load \sty{glossaries} +%using: %\begin{verbatim} -%\let\glossarysection\chapter +%\usepackage[section,numberedsection=autolabel]{glossaries} +%\end{verbatim} +%then each glossary will appear in a numbered section, and can +%be referenced using something like: +%\begin{verbatim} +%The main glossary is in section~\ref{main} and the list of +%acronyms is in section~\ref{acronym}. +%\end{verbatim} +%If you can't decide whether to have the acronyms in the main +%glossary or a separate list of acronyms, you can use +%\ics{acronymtype} which is set to \texttt{main} if the +%\pkgopt{acronym} option is not used and is set to \texttt{acronym} +%if the \pkgopt{acronym} option is used. For example: +%\begin{verbatim} +%The list of acronyms is in section~\ref{\acronymtype}. %\end{verbatim} % -%\item[\pkgopt{style}] This is a key=value option. Its value should -%be the name of the glossary style to use. -% +%\item[\pkgopt{style}] This is a \meta{key}=\meta{value} option. Its +%value should be the name of the glossary style to use. Predefined +%glossary styles are listed in \autoref{sec:styles}. %\item[\pkgopt{nonumberlist}] This option will suppress the %associated number lists\iterm{number list} in the glossaries (see also %\autoref{sec:numberlists}.) -% -%\item[\pkgopt{acronym}] Make a separate glossary for acronyms. -% -%\item[\pkgopt{counter}] This is a key=value option. The value should -%be the name of the default counter to use in the -%number lists\iterm{number list}. -% -%\hypertarget{sanitize}{}\relax -%\item[\pkgopt{sanitize}] This is a key=value option whose value is a -%key=value list. By default, the \styname{glossaries} package -%sanitizes the values of the \gloskey{name}, \gloskey{description} and -%\gloskey{symbol} keys used when defining a new glossary entry. This -%may lead to unexpected results if you try to -%display these values within the document text. This sanitization can -%be switched off using the \pkgopt{sanitize} package option. (See -%\autoref{sec:pkgopt} and \autoref{sec:newentry} for further details.) -%For example, to switch off the sanitization for the -%\gloskey{description} and \gloskey{name} keys, but not for -%the \gloskey{symbol} key, do: +%\item[\pkgopt{counter}] This is a \meta{key}=\meta{value} option. The +%value should be the name of the default counter to use in the number +%lists\iterm{number list}. +% +%\hypertarget{sanitize}{}\relax\item[\pkgopt{sanitize}] This is a \meta{key}=\meta{value} option whose +%value is also a \meta{key}=\meta{value} list. By default, the +%\sty{glossaries} package sanitizes the values of the +%\gloskey{name}, \gloskey{description} and \gloskey{symbol} keys used +%when defining a new glossary entry. This may lead to unexpected results +%if you try to display these values within the document text. This +%sanitization can be switched off using the \pkgopt{sanitize} package +%option. (See \autoref{sec:pkgopt} and \autoref{sec:newentry} for further details.) For example, to switch off the sanitization for the +%\gloskey{description} and \gloskey{name} keys, but not for the +%\gloskey{symbol} key, do: %\begin{verbatim} %\usepackage[sanitize={name=false,description=false,% %symbol=true}]{glossaries} @@ -630,70 +696,121 @@ %\gloskey{name} key, you will still need to protect fragile commands %in the \gloskey{name} key if you don't use the \gloskey{text} key. % -%\end{description} +%\item[\pkgopt{babel}] This is a boolean key and is for use when +%the \sty{glossaries} package is used in conjunction with the +%\isty{babel} package. The default is \pkgopt[true]{babel}, which +%adds the glossary translations to \isty{babel}'s captions. If +%you don't like the translations provided by the \sty{glossaries} +%package, you can set \pkgopt[false]{babel} and provide your own +%translations. +% +%\item[\pkgopt{description}] This option changes the definition of +%\ics{newacronym} to allow a description. See \autoref{sec:acronyms} for further details. % +%\item[\pkgopt{footnote}] This option changes the definition of +%\ics{newacronym} and the way that acronyms are displayed. See \autoref{sec:acronyms} for further details. +% +%\item[\pkgopt{smallcaps}] This option changes the definition of +%\ics{newacronym} and the way that acronyms are displayed. See \autoref{sec:acronyms} for further details. +% +%\item[\pkgopt{dua}] This option changes the definition of +%\ics{newacronym} so that acronyms are always expanded. +%See \autoref{sec:acronyms} for further details. +% +%\end{description} %\subsection{Defining Glossary Entries} %\label{sec:newglosentry} % %All glossary entries that are used in a document must be defined in %the preamble. Only those entries that occur in the document -%(using any of the commands described in \autoref{sec:glslink} and -%\autoref{sec:glsadd}) will appear in the glossary. Each time an entry -%is used in this way, a line is added to an associated glossary (.glo) -%file, which then needs to be converted into a corresponding .gls file -%which contains the typeset glossary. The Perl script -%\appname{makeglossaries} can be used to call \appname{makeindex} -%using a customised style file for each of the glossaries that are -%defined in the document. +%(using any of the commands described in \autoref{sec:glslink} and \autoref{sec:glsadd}) will appear in the glossary. Each time an entry is used in this way, a line is added to an associated glossary +%(\filetype{.glo}) file, which then needs to be converted into a +%corresponding \filetype{.gls} file which contains the typeset glossary +%which is input by \ics{printglossary} or +%\ics{printglossaries}. The Perl script \appname{makeglossaries} +%can be used to call \appname{makeindex}, using a customised +%\filetype{.ist} style file, for each of the glossaries that are defined +%in the document. Note that there should be no need for you to +%explicitly edit or input any of these external files. % %\DescribeMacro{\makeglossaries} -%The command \cs{makeglossaries} must be placed in the preamble, -%in order to create the customised \appname{makeindex} style file, -%and to ensure that glossary entries are written to the appropriate -%output file. +%The command \cs{makeglossaries} must be placed in the preamble in +%order to create the customised \appname{makeindex} \filetype{.ist} +%style file and to ensure that glossary entries are written to the +%appropriate output file. If you omit \cs{makeglossaries} none of the +%glossaries will be created. Note that if your page numbers use a +%hyphen compositor, you must set this by redefining +%\DescribeMacro{\glscompositor}\cs{glscompositor} \emph{before} +%using \cs{makeglossaries}: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\renewcommand*{\glscompositor}{-} +%\end{verbatim} +%(The default value of \cs{glscompositor} is a full stop.) % %\DescribeMacro{\newglossaryentry} %New glossary entries are defined using the command:\\[10pt] -%\cs{newglossaryentry}\marg{label}\marg{key-val list}\\[10pt] -%The first argument, \meta{label}, must be a unique label with which to -%identify this entry. The second argument, \meta{key-val list}, -%is a key=value list that supplies the relevant information about this -%entry. There are two required fields: \gloskey{name} and +%\cs{newglossaryentry}\marg{label}\marg{key-val list}\\[10pt] The first +%argument, \meta{label}, must be a unique label with which to identify +%this entry. The second argument, \meta{key-val list}, is a +%\meta{key}=\meta{value} list that supplies the relevant information +%about this entry. There are two required fields: \gloskey{name} and %\gloskey{description}. Available fields are listed below: % %\begin{description} %\item[{\gloskey{name}}] The name of the entry (as it will appear in the -%glossary.) +%glossary). +% %\item[{\gloskey{description}}] A brief description of this term (to -%appear in the glossary.) +%appear in the glossary). +% %\item[{\gloskey{text}}] How this entry will appear in the document text -%when using \icmdname{gls} (or one of its -%uppercase variants.) If this field is omitted, the value of the -%\gloskey{name} key is used. +%when using \ics{gls} (or one of its uppercase variants). If this +%field is omitted, the value of the \gloskey{name} key is used. +% %\item[{\gloskey{first}}] How the entry will appear in the document text -%the first time it is used with \icmdname{gls} -%(or one of its uppercase variants.) If this field is omitted, -%the value of the \gloskey{text} key is used. +%the first time it is used with \ics{gls} (or one of its uppercase +%variants). If this field is omitted, the value of the \gloskey{text} +%key is used. +% %\item[{\gloskey{plural}}] How the entry will appear in the document text -%when using \icmdname{glspl} (or one of its uppercase variants.) +%when using \ics{glspl} (or one of its uppercase variants). %If this field is omitted, the value is obtained by appending an -%``s'' to the value of the \gloskey{text} field. +%\dq{s} to the value of the \gloskey{text} field. +% %\item[{\gloskey{firstplural}}] How the entry will appear in the document -%text the first time it is used with \icmdname{glspl} (or one of -%its uppercase variants.) If this field is omitted, the value is -%obtained by appending an ``s'' to the value of the \gloskey{first} +%text the first time it is used with \ics{glspl} (or one of +%its uppercase variants). If this field is omitted, the value is +%obtained by appending an \dq{s} to the value of the \gloskey{first} %field. +% %\item[{\gloskey{symbol}}] This field is provided to allow the user to %specify an associated symbol, but most glossary styles ignore %this value. If omitted, the value is set to \cs{relax}. -%\item[{\gloskey{sort}}] This value indicates how \appname{makeindex} -%should sort this entry. If omitted, the value is given by -%the \gloskey{name} field. -%This value is equivalent to \appname{makeindex}'s ``actual'' -%character (which is usually the at-sign @.) +% +%\item[{\gloskey{sort}}] This value indicates how \appname{makeindex} +%should sort this entry. If omitted, the value is given by the +%\gloskey{name} field. This value is equivalent to +%\appname{makeindex}'s \dq{actual} character (which is usually the +%at-sign @ although the \sty{glossaries} package uses a different +%symbol). +% %\item[{\gloskey{type}}] This is the glossary type to which this entry -%belongs. If omitted, the default glossary is assumed. +%belongs. If omitted, the default glossary is assumed +%(\texttt{type=main}). The list of acronyms type is given by +%\ics{acronymtype} which will either be \texttt{main} or +%\texttt{acronym}, depending on whether the \pkgopt{acronym} package +%option was used. %\end{description} +%Note that if the \gloskey{text} key (or the \gloskey{name} key, if the +%\gloskey{text} key is omitted) starts with an accented letter, +%you must group the accented letter, otherwise it will cause a +%problem for \cs{Gls} and \cs{Glspl}. For example: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\newglossaryentry{elite}{name={{\'e}lite}, +%description={select group or class}} +%\end{verbatim} +%(Likewise for the \gloskey{plural}, \gloskey{first} and +%\gloskey{firstplural} keys.) % %\DescribeMacro{\loadglsentries} %You can store all your glossary entry definitions in another @@ -705,27 +822,23 @@ %should belong, for those entries where the \gloskey{type} key has %been omitted. Note that only those entries that have been used %in the text will appear in the relevant glossaries. -% %\subsection{Number lists} %\label{sec:numberlists} % %Each entry in the glossary has an associated \termdef{number list}. %By default, %these numbers refer to the pages on which that entry has been used -%(using any of the commands described in \autoref{sec:glslink} -%and \autoref{sec:glsadd}.) The number list can be suppressed using -%the \pkgopt{nonumberlist} package option, or an alternative counter +%(using any of the commands described in \autoref{sec:glslink} and \autoref{sec:glsadd}). The number list can be suppressed using the \pkgopt{nonumberlist} package option, or an alternative counter %can be set as the default using the \pkgopt{counter} package option. -% %\subsection{Links to Glossary Entries} %\label{sec:glslink} % %Once you have defined a glossary entry using -%\icmdname{newglossaryentry}, you can refer to that entry in the +%\ics{newglossaryentry}, you can refer to that entry in the %document using one of the commands listed in this section. The %text which appears at that point in the document when using %one of these commands is referred to as the -%\termdef{link text} (even if there are no hyperlinks.) +%\termdef{link text} (even if there are no hyperlinks). % %The way the \term{link text} is displayed %depends on \DescribeMacro{\glstextformat}\cs{glstextformat}\marg{text}. @@ -738,41 +851,39 @@ %\DescribeMacro{\glslink} %The command:\\[10pt] %\cs{glslink}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\marg{text}\\[10pt] -%will place \meta{text} in the document at that point, and add +%will place \meta{text} in the document at that point and add %a line into the associated glossary file for the glossary entry %given by \meta{label}. If hyperlinks are supported, \meta{text} %will be a hyperlink to the relevant line in the glossary. The -%optional argument \meta{options} must be a key=value list which -%can take any of the following keys: +%optional argument \meta{options} must be a \meta{key}=\meta{value} +%list which can take any of the following keys: % %\begin{description} -%\item[{\gloskey[glslink]{format}}] This specifies how to format -%the associated number for this entry in the glossary. This value -%is equivalent to the \appname{makeindex} encap value, and (as with -%\cs{index}) the value needs to be the name of a -%command \emph{without} the initial backslash. As with -%\cs{index}, the characters "(" and ")" can also be used to -%specify the beginning and ending of a number range. -%Again, as with \cs{index} the command should be the name of a -%command which takes an argument (which will be the associated number.) -%Be careful not to use a declaration (such as \cs{bfseries}) instead of -%a text block command (such as \cs{textbf}) as the effect will not be -%localised. If you want to apply more than one -%style to a given entry (e.g.\ \textbf{bold} and \emph{italic}) you -%will need to create a command that applies both formats, e.g.\ +%\item[{\gloskey[glslink]{format}}] This specifies how to format the +%associated number for this entry in the glossary. This value is +%equivalent to the \appname{makeindex} encap value, and (as with +%\cs{index}) the value needs to be the name of a command \emph{without} +%the initial backslash. As with \cs{index}, the characters \verb"(" and +%\verb")" can also be used to specify the beginning and ending of a +%number range. Again as with \cs{index}, the command should be the name +%of a command which takes an argument (which will be the associated +%number). Be careful not to use a declaration (such as \cs{bfseries}) +%instead of a text block command (such as \cs{textbf}) as the effect is +%not guaranteed to be localised. If you want to apply more than one +%style to a given entry (e.g.\ \textbf{bold} and \emph{italic}) you will +%need to create a command that applies both formats, e.g.\ %\begin{verbatim} %\newcommand*{\textbfem}[1]{\textbf{\emph{#1}}} %\end{verbatim} -%and use that command. (Just as you would have to do with \cs{index}.) +%and use that command. % -%If you are using hyperlinks, and you want to change the font of the -%hyperlink, don't use \cs{hyperpage} (provided by the \styname{hyperref} +%If you are using hyperlinks and you want to change the font of the +%hyperlink, don't use \cs{hyperpage} (provided by the \isty{hyperref} %package) as the numbers may not refer to a page number. -%Instead, the \styname{glossaries} package provides the following +%Instead, the \sty{glossaries} package provides the following %number formats: %\begin{center} -%\begin{tabular}{@{\sffamily}lp{0.8\linewidth}} -%hyperrm & The number is a serif hyperlink to the relevant part of the +%\begin{tabular}{@{\sffamily}lp{0.8\linewidth}}hyperrm & The number is a serif hyperlink to the relevant part of the %document\\ %hypersf & The number is a sans-serif hyperlink to the relevant part %of the document\\ @@ -791,38 +902,36 @@ %hypersc & The number is a small caps hyperlink to the relevant %part of the document\\ %hyperemph & The number is an emphasized hyperlink to the relevant -%part of the document\\ +%part of the document %\end{tabular} %\end{center} %Note that if the \cs{hyperlink} command hasn't been defined, -%the "hyper"\meta{xx} formats are equivalent to the +%the \texttt{hyper}\meta{xx} formats are equivalent to the %analogous \cs{text}\meta{xx} font commands. If you want to %make a new format, you will need to define a command which takes -%one argument, for example, if you want the associated number in -%the glossary to be in a bold sans-serif font, you can define a +%one argument and use that; for example, if you want the associated +%number in the glossary to be in a bold sans-serif font, you can define a %command called, say, \cs{hyperbsf}: %\begin{verbatim} %\newcommand{\hyperbsf}[1]{\textbf{\hypersf{#1}}} %\end{verbatim} -%and then use "hyperbsf" as the value for the \gloskey{format} key. -%(See also \autoref{sec:printglos}.) -% +%and then use \texttt{hyperbsf} as the value for the \gloskey{format} +%key. (See also \autoref{sec:printglos}.) %\item[{\gloskey[glslink]{counter}}] This specifies which counter %to use for the associated number for this glossary entry. (See also %\autoref{sec:numberlists}.) -% %\item[{\gloskey[glslink]{hyper}}] This is a boolean key which can %be used to enable/disable the hyperlink to the relevant entry -%in the glossary. (Note that setting "hyper=true" will have no +%in the glossary. (Note that setting \texttt{hyper=true} will have no %effect if \cs{hyperlink} has not been defined.) The default -%value is "hyper=true". +%value is \texttt{hyper=true}. % %\end{description} %\DescribeMacro{\glslink*} %There is also a starred version:\\[10pt] %\cs{glslink*}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\marg{text}\\[10pt] %which is equivalent to \cs{glslink}, except it sets -%"hyper=false". +%\texttt{hyper=false}. % %\DescribeMacro{\gls} %The command:\\[10pt] @@ -830,20 +939,21 @@ %is the same as \cs{glslink}, except that the \term{link text} %is determined from the values of the \gloskey{text} and %\gloskey{first} keys supplied when the entry was defined using -%\icmdname{newglossaryentry}. There are two uppercase variants:\\[10pt] +%\ics{newglossaryentry}. There are two uppercase variants:\\[10pt] %\DescribeMacro{\Gls} %\cs{Gls}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] -%and +%and\\[10pt] %\DescribeMacro{\GLS} %\cs{GLS}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] -%which make the first letter of the link, or all the link text, +%which make the first letter of the link or all the link text %uppercase, respectively. % %The final optional argument \meta{insert}, allows you to insert %some additional text into the link text. By default, this will %append \meta{insert} at the end of the link text. The first optional -%argument, \meta{options}, is the same as the optional argument to -%\icmdname{glslink}. +%argument \meta{options} is the same as the optional argument to +%\ics{glslink}. As with \cs{glslink}, these commands also have +%a starred version that disable the hyperlink. % %There are also analogous plural forms:\\[10pt] %\DescribeMacro{\glspl} @@ -854,131 +964,614 @@ %\cs{GLSpl}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] %These determine the link text from the \gloskey{plural} and %\gloskey{firstplural} keys supplied when the entry was first -%defined. -% -%To make the description or symbol also appear in the \term{link text}, -%you will need to redefine \cs{glsdisplayfirst} and \cs{glsdisplay} -%or use the commands \cs{defglsdisplayfirst} and \cs{defglsdisplay}. -%See \autoref{sec:code:glslink} for further details. (Note that if you -%want either the description or symbol to appear in the -%\term{link text}, you will have to disable the -%\hyperlink{sanitize}{sanitization} of these -%keys, and protect fragile commands.) +%defined. As before, these commands also have +%a starred version that disable the hyperlink. +% +%\DescribeMacro{\glstext}The command:\\[10pt] +%\cs{glstext}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +%is similar to \ics{gls} except that it always uses the value +%of the \gloskey{text} key and does not mark the entry as +%having been used. +% +%There are also analogous commands:\\[10pt] +%\DescribeMacro{\Glstext} +%\cs{Glstext}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +%\DescribeMacro{\GLStext} +%\cs{GLStext}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +%As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable +%the hyperlink. +% +%\DescribeMacro{\glsfirst}The command:\\[10pt] +%\cs{glsfirst}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +%is similar to \ics{gls} except that it always uses the value +%of the \gloskey{first} key and does not mark the entry as +%having been used. +% +%There are also analogous commands:\\[10pt] +%\DescribeMacro{\Glsfirst} +%\cs{Glsfirst}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +%\DescribeMacro{\GLSfirst} +%\cs{GLSfirst}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +%As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable +%the hyperlink. +% +%\DescribeMacro{\glsplural}The command:\\[10pt] +%\cs{glsplural}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +%is similar to \ics{gls} except that it always uses the value +%of the \gloskey{plural} key and does not mark the entry as +%having been used. +% +%There are also analogous commands:\\[10pt] +%\DescribeMacro{\Glsplural} +%\cs{Glsplural}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +%\DescribeMacro{\GLSplural} +%\cs{GLSplural}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +%As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable +%the hyperlink. +% +%\DescribeMacro{\glsfirstplural}The command:\\[10pt] +%\cs{glsfirstplural}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +%is similar to \ics{gls} except that it always uses the value +%of the \gloskey{firstplural} key and does not mark the entry as +%having been used. +% +%There are also analogous commands:\\[10pt] +%\DescribeMacro{\Glsfirstplural} +%\cs{Glsfirstplural}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +%\DescribeMacro{\GLSfirstplural} +%\cs{GLSfirstplural}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +%As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable +%the hyperlink. +% +%\DescribeMacro{\glsname}The command:\\[10pt] +%\cs{glsname}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +%is similar to \ics{gls} except that it always uses the value +%of the \gloskey{name} key and does not mark the entry as +%having been used. Note: if you want to use this command and the +%\gloskey{name} key contains commands, you will have to disable the +%\hyperlink{sanitize}{sanitization} of the \gloskey{name} key and protect fragile commands. +% +%There are also analogous commands:\\[10pt] +%\DescribeMacro{\Glsname} +%\cs{Glsname}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +%\DescribeMacro{\GLSname} +%\cs{GLSname}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +%As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable +%the hyperlink. +% +%\DescribeMacro{\glssymbol}The command:\\[10pt] +%\cs{glssymbol}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +%is similar to \ics{gls} except that it always uses the value +%of the \gloskey{symbol} key and does not mark the entry as +%having been used. Note: if you want to use this command and the +%\gloskey{symbol} key contains commands, you will have to disable the +%\hyperlink{sanitize}{sanitization} of the \gloskey{symbol} key and protect fragile commands. +% +%There are also analogous commands:\\[10pt] +%\DescribeMacro{\Glssymbol} +%\cs{Glssymbol}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +%\DescribeMacro{\GLSsymbol} +%\cs{GLSsymbol}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +%As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable +%the hyperlink. +% +%\DescribeMacro{\glsdesc}The command:\\[10pt] +%\cs{glsdesc}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +%is similar to \ics{gls} except that it always uses the value +%of the \gloskey{description} key and does not mark the entry as +%having been used. Note: if you want to use this command and the +%\gloskey{description} key contains commands, you will have to disable the +%\hyperlink{sanitize}{sanitization} of the \gloskey{description} key and protect fragile commands. +% +%There are also analogous commands:\\[10pt] +%\DescribeMacro{\Glsdesc} +%\cs{Glsdesc}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +%\DescribeMacro{\GLSdesc} +%\cs{GLSdesc}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +%As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable +%the hyperlink. +% +% +%\subsubsection{Changing the format of the link text} +%\label{sec:glsdisplay} +% +%The format of the \term{link text} for \ics{gls}, \ics{glspl} +%and their uppercase variants is governed by two commands: +%\DescribeMacro{\glsdisplayfirst}\cs{glsdisplayfirst}, which is used the +%first time a glossary entry is used in the text and +%\DescribeMacro{\glsdisplay}\cs{glsdisplay}, which is used subsequently. +%Both commands take four arguments: the first is either the singular or +%plural form given by the \gloskey{text}, \gloskey{plural}, +%\gloskey{first} or \gloskey{firstplural} keys (used when the term was +%defined) depending on context; the second argument is the term's +%description (as supplied by the \gloskey{description} key); the third +%argument is the symbol associated with the term (as supplied by the +%\gloskey{symbol} key) and the fourth argument is the additional text +%supplied in the final optional argument to \cs{gls} or +%\cs{glspl} (or their uppercase variants). The default definitions +%of \cs{glsdisplay} and \cs{glsdisplayfirst} simply +%print the first argument immediately followed by the fourth argument. +%The remaining arguments are ignored. +% +%For example, suppose you want a glossary of measurements and +%units, you can use the \gloskey{symbol} key to store the unit: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\newglossaryentry{distance}{name=distance, +%description={The length between two points}, +%symbol={km}} +%\end{verbatim} +%and now suppose you want \verb|\gls{distance}| to produce +%\dq{distance (km)} on first use, then you can redefine +%\cs{glsdisplayfirst} as follows: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\renewcommand{\glsdisplayfirst}[4]{#1#4 (#3)} +%\end{verbatim} +%Note that the additional text is placed after \verb|#1|, so +%\verb|\gls{distance}['s]| will produce \dq{distance's (km)} +%rather than \dq{distance (km)'s} which looks a bit odd (even though +%it may be in the context of \dq{the distance (km) is measured between +%the two points} --- but in this instance it may be better not to +%use a contraction). +% +%Note also that all of the \term{link text} will be formatted according +%to \ics{glstextformat} (described earlier). So if you do, say: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\renewcommand{\glstextformat}[1]{\textbf{#1}} +%\renewcommand{\glsdisplayfirst}[4]{#1#4 (#3)} +%\end{verbatim} +%then \verb|\gls{distance}| will produce \dq{\textbf{distance (km)}}. +% +%If you have multiple glossaries, changing \cs{glsdisplayfirst} and +%\cs{glsdisplay} will change the way entries for all of the +%glossaries appear when using commands \cs{gls}, \cs{glspl} and their +%uppercase variants. If you only +%want the change to affect entries for a given glossary, then you need +%to use \DescribeMacro{\defglsdisplay}\cs{defglsdisplay} and +%\DescribeMacro{\defglsdisplayfirst}\cs{defglsdisplayfirst} instead +%of redefining \cs{glsdisplay} and \cs{glsdisplayfirst}. +% +%Both \cs{defglsdisplay} and \cs{defglsdisplayfirst} take two arguments: +%the first (which is optional) is the glossary name\footnote{\texttt{main} for the main +%(default) glossary, \cs{acronymtype} for the list of acronyms, or the +%name supplied in the first mandatory argument to \cs{newglossary} for +%additional glossaries.} and the second is how the term should be +%displayed when it is invoked using commands \cs{gls}, +%\cs{glspl} and their uppercase variants. This is similar to the way \cs{glsdisplayfirst} was +%redefined above. +% +%For example, suppose you have created a new glossary called +%\texttt{notation} and you want to change the way the entry is +%displayed on first use so that it includes the symbol, you can +%do: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\defglsdisplayfirst[notation]{#1#4 (denoted #3)} +%\end{verbatim} +%Now suppose you have defined an entry as follows: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\newglossaryentry{set}{type=notation, +%name=set, +%description={A collection of objects}, +%symbol={$S$}, +%} +%\end{verbatim} +%The first time you reference this entry using \cs{gls} it +%will be displayed as: \dq{set (denoted $S$)} (similarly for \cs{glspl} and the uppercase variants). +% +%Remember that if you use the \gloskey{symbol} key, you need to use a +%glossary style that displays the symbol, as many of the styles ignore +%it. In addition, if you want either the description or symbol to appear +%in the \term{link text}, you will have to disable the +%\hyperlink{sanitize}{sanitization} of these keys and protect fragile commands. +%\subsubsection{Enabling and disabling hyperlinks to glossary entries} +% +%If you load the \isty{hyperref} or \isty{html} packages prior to +%loading the \sty{glossaries} package, commands such as \ics{glslink} +%and \ics{gls}, described above, will automatically have hyperlinks +%to the relevant glossary entry, unless the \gloskey[glslink]{hyper} +%option has been set to \texttt{false}. You can disable or enable links using:\\[10pt] +%\DescribeMacro{\glsdisablehyper}\cs{glsdisablehyper}\\[10pt] +%and\\[10pt] +%\DescribeMacro{\glsenablehyper}\cs{glsenablehyper}\\[10pt] +%respectively. The effect can be localised by placing the commands +%within a group. Note that you should only use \cs{glsenablehyper} +%if the commands \ics{hyperlink} and \ics{hypertarget} have been +%defined (for example, by the \isty{hyperref} package). % %\subsection{Adding an entry to the glossary without generating text} %\label{sec:glsadd} % %\DescribeMacro{\glsadd} -%It is also possible to add a line in the glossary file without -%generating any text at that point in the document.\\[10pt] +%It is possible to add a line in the glossary file without +%generating any text at that point in the document using:\\[10pt] %\cs{glsadd}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\\[10pt] -%This is similar to \icmdname{glslink}, only it doesn't produce +%This is similar to \ics{glslink}, only it doesn't produce %any text (so therefore, there is no \gloskey[glslink]{hyper} key -%available in \meta{options}.) +%available in \meta{options} but all the other options that can +%be used with \cs{glslink} can be passed to \cs{glsadd}). % %\DescribeMacro{\glsaddall} -%To add a line for all entries that have been defined, use:\\[10pt] +%To add all entries that have been defined, use:\\[10pt] %\cs{glsaddall}\oarg{glossary list}\\[10pt] %If there are multiple glossaries, you can specify to add only %those entries which belong to the glossaries listed in %\meta{glossary list} (which must be a comma separated list of -%glossary names.) -% +%glossary names). For example: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\glsaddall[notation] +%\end{verbatim} +%will add all the entries that have been defined for the glossary +%labelled \dq{notation}. %\subsection{Displaying a glossary} % %\DescribeMacro{\printglossaries} %The command \cs{printglossaries} will display all the %defined glossaries. Note that no glossaries will appear until %you have either used the Perl script \appname{makeglossaries} -%or have directly used \appname{makeindex}. If the glossary still -%does not appear, after you re-\LaTeX\ your document, then check +%or have directly used \appname{makeindex} (as described in +%\autoref{sec:makeglossaries}). If the glossary still does not appear after you re-\LaTeX\ your document, check %the \appname{makeindex} log files to see if there is a problem. +%Remember that you also need to use the command \ics{makeglossaries} in +%the preamble to enable the glossaries. % %\DescribeMacro{\printglossary} %An individual glossary is displayed using:\\[10pt] %\cs{printglossary}\oarg{options}\\[10pt] -%where \meta{options} is a key-val list of options. The following -%keys are available: +%where \meta{options} is a \meta{key}=\meta{value} list of options. +%The following keys are available: %\begin{description} %\item[{\gloskey[printglossary]{type}}] The value of this key %specifies which glossary to print. If omitted, the default -%glossary is assumed. +%glossary is assumed. For example, to print the list of acronyms: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\printglossary[type=\acronymtype] +%\end{verbatim} % %\item[{\gloskey[printglossary]{title}}] This is the glossary's %title (overriding the title specified when the glossary was -%defined.) +%defined). % %\item[{\gloskey[printglossary]{toctitle}}] This is the title %to use for the table of contents (if the \pkgopt{toc} package -%option has been used.) +%option has been used). If omitted, the glossary title is used. % %\item[{\gloskey[printglossary]{style}}] This specifies which -%glossary style to use for this glossary. +%glossary style to use for this glossary, overriding the effect +%of the \pkgopt{style} option or \ics{glossarystyle}. %\end{description} % +%\DescribeMacro{\glossarypreamble} +%Information can be added to the start of the glossary by redefining +%\cs{glossarypreamble}. For example: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\renewcommand{\glossarypreamble}{Numbers in italic indicate +%primary definitions.} +%\end{verbatim} +%This needs to be done before the glossary is displayed using +%\cs{printglossaries} or \cs{printglossary}. Note that if you +%want a different preamble for each glossary, you will need to +%use a separate \cs{printglossary} for each glossary and change +%the definition of \cs{glossarypreamble} between each glossary. +%For example: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\renewcommand{\glossarypreamble}{Numbers in italic indicate +%primary definitions.} +%\printglossary +%\renewcommand{\glossarypreamble}{} +%\printglossary[type=acronym] +%\end{verbatim} +%Alternatively, you can do something like: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\renewcommand{\glossarypreamble}{Numbers in italic indicate +%primary definitions.\gdef\glossarypreamble{}} +%\printglossaries +%\end{verbatim} +%which will print the preamble text for the first glossary and +%change the preamble to do nothing for subsequent glossaries. +%(Note that \cs{gdef} is required as the glossary is placed within +%a group.) +% +%\DescribeMacro{\glossarypostamble}There is an analogous command +%called \cs{glossarypostamble} which is placed at the end of each +%glossary. +%\subsubsection{Changing the way the entry name appears in the glossary} +%\label{sec:glsnamefont} +% +%\DescribeMacro{\glsnamefont}Within each glossary, each entry name is +%formatted according to \cs{glsnamefont} which takes one argument: the +%entry name. This command is always used regardless of the glossary +%style. By default, \cs{glsnamefont} simply displays its argument in +%whatever the surrounding font happens to be. This means that in the +%list styles the name will appear in bold, since the name is placed in +%the optional argument of \cs{item}, whereas in the tabular styles the +%name will appear in the normal font. +% +%For example, suppose you want all the entry names to appear in +%medium weight small caps, then you can do: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\renewcommand{\glsnamefont}[1]{\textsc{\mdseries #1}} +%\end{verbatim} +% %\subsection{Defining New Glossaries} % %\DescribeMacro{\newglossary} %A new glossary can be defined using:\\[10pt] %\cs{newglossary}\oarg{log-ext}\marg{name}\marg{in-ext}\marg{out-ext}\marg{title}\oarg{counter}\\[10pt] -%where \meta{name} is label to assign to this glossary. (Note that -%the default glossary is labelled "main" and if you use the -%\pkgopt{acronym} package option, there will also be a glossary -%called "acronym".) The arguments \meta{in-ext} and \meta{out-ext} -%specify the extensions to give to the input and output files -%for that glossary, \meta{title} is the default title for this -%new glossary and the final optional argument \meta{counter} specifies -%which counter to use for the associated -%number lists\iterm{number list} (see also -%\autoref{sec:numberlists}.) The first optional argument specifies -%the extension for the \appname{makeindex} transcript file (this -%information is only used by \appname{makeglossaries} which picks -%up the information from the auxiliary file.) -% +%where \meta{name} is label to assign to this glossary. The arguments +%\meta{in-ext} and \meta{out-ext} specify the extensions to give to the +%input and output files for that glossary, \meta{title} is the default +%title for this new glossary and the final optional argument +%\meta{counter} specifies which counter to use for the associated number +%lists\iterm{number list} (see also \autoref{sec:numberlists}.) The first optional argument specifies the extension for the +%\appname{makeindex} transcript file (this information is only used by +%\appname{makeglossaries} which picks up the information from the +%auxiliary file.) +% +%Note that the main (default) glossary is automatically created as: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\newglossary{main}{gls}{glo}{\glossaryname} +%\end{verbatim} +%so it can be identified by the label \texttt{main}. Using the +%\pkgopt{acronym} package option is equivalent to: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\newglossary[alg]{acronym}{acr}{acn}{\acronymname} +%\end{verbatim} +%so it can be identified by the label \texttt{acronym}. If you are +%not sure whether the \pkgopt{acronym} option has been used, you +%can identify the list of acronyms by the command +%\DescribeMacro{\acronymtype}\cs{acronymtype} which is set to +%\texttt{acronym}, if the \pkgopt{acronym} option has been used, +%otherwise it is set to \texttt{main}. %\subsection{Acronyms} +%\label{sec:acronyms} % %\DescribeMacro{\newacronym} -%As you may have noticed in \autoref{sec:newglosentry}, when you -%specify a new entry, you can specify alternate text to use when -%the term is first used in the document, this provides a useful -%means to define acronyms. The \styname{glossaries} package defines +%As you may have noticed in \autoref{sec:newglosentry}, when you specify a new entry, you can specify alternate text to use when +%the term is first used in the document. This provides a useful +%means to define acronyms. The \sty{glossaries} package defines %the command:\\[10pt] %\cs{newacronym}\oarg{key-val list}\marg{label}\marg{abbrv}\marg{long}\\[10pt] %This is equivalent to:\vskip5pt -%\begin{ttfamily}\obeylines -%\cs{newglossaryentry}\textrm{\marg{label}}\{type=\cs{acronymtype}, -%name=\textrm{\marg{abbrv}}, -%description=\textrm{\marg{long}}, -%text=\textrm{\marg{abbrv}}, -%first=\{\textrm{\meta{long}} (\textrm{\meta{abbrv}})\}, -%plural=\{\textrm{\meta{abbrv}}s\}, -%firstplural=\{\textrm{\meta{long}}s (\textrm{\meta{abbrv}}s)\}, -%\textrm{\meta{key-val list}}\} +%\begin{ttfamily}\par\noindent +%\cs{newglossaryentry}\textrm{\marg{label}}\{type=\cs{acronymtype},\\ +%name=\textrm{\marg{abbrv}},\\ +%description=\textrm{\marg{long}},\\ +%text=\textrm{\marg{abbrv}},\\ +%first=\{\textrm{\meta{long}} (\textrm{\meta{abbrv}})\},\\ +%plural=\{\textrm{\meta{abbrv}}s\},\\ +%firstplural=\{\textrm{\meta{long}}s (\textrm{\meta{abbrv}}s)\},\\ +%\textrm{\meta{key-val list}}\}\par %\end{ttfamily} %\vskip5pt -%The command \cs{acronymtype} is the name of the glossary -%in which the acronyms should appear. If the \pkgopt{acronym} -%package option has been used, this will be "acronym", otherwise -%it will be "main". The acronyms can then be used in exactly -%the same way as any other glossary entry. -% -%As you can see from the above, \cs{newacronym} sets the -%description to the long form of the acronym. You may prefer to -%have a description, and set the name to both the long and abbreviated -%forms. For example, the following defines the acronym IDN: +%As mentioned in the previous section, the command \cs{acronymtype} is +%the name of the glossary in which the acronyms should appear. If the +%\pkgopt{acronym} package option has been used, this will be +%\texttt{acronym}, otherwise it will be \texttt{main}. The acronyms can +%then be used in exactly the same way as any other glossary entry. +%For example, the following defines the acronym IDN: %\begin{verbatim} -%\newacronym[name={identification number (IDN)}, -%description={A number uniquely identifying a particular -%object}]{idn}{IDN}{identification number} +%\newacronym{idn}{IDN}{identification number} %\end{verbatim} -%Alternatively: +%This is equivalent to: %\begin{verbatim} -%\newacronym[description={identification number --- a number uniquely -%identifying a particular object}]{idn}{IDN}{identification number} +%\newglossaryentry{idn}{type=\acronymtype, +%name={IDN}, +%description={identification number}, +%text={IDN}, +%first={identification number (IDN)}, +%plural={IDNs}, +%firstplural={identification numbers (IDNs)}} %\end{verbatim} +%so \verb|\gls{idn}| will produce \dq{identification number (IDN)} on +%first use and \dq{IDN} on subsequent uses. +% +%The \sty{glossaries} package has options that change the +%definition of \ics{newacronym} for common acronym formats. These +%options also change the way the link text is displayed for the +%acronyms. +% +%Table~\ref{tab:acronymsettings} lists the package options and +%how the keys are used to store \meta{long} (the long form) and +%\meta{abbrv} (the short form). Note that the \pkgopt{smallcaps} +%option redefines \ics{acronymfont} so that it sets its argument +%in small captials otherwise \cs{acronymfont} simply displays its +%argument in the surrounding font. Note also that if none of +%the package options \pkgopt{smallcaps}, \pkgopt{description} +%or \pkgopt{footnote} are used, \cs{acronymfont} is not used, so +%changing the definition of \cs{acronymfont} will have no effect +%under such circumstances. +% +%\begin{table}[htbp] +%\caption{Package options governing acronyms and how the information +%is stored in the glossary keys} +%\label{tab:acronymsettings} +%\begin{center} +%\begin{tabular}{lllll} +%\bfseries Package Option & +%\gloskey{first} & +%\gloskey{text} & +%\gloskey{description} & +%\gloskey{symbol}\\ +%\pkgopt{description},\pkgopt{footnote} & +%\meta{abbrv} & +%\meta{abbrv} & +%user supplied & +%\meta{long}\\ +%\pkgopt{description},\pkgopt{dua} & +%\meta{long} & +%\meta{long} & +%user supplied & +%\meta{abbrv}\\ +%\pkgopt{description} & +%\meta{long} & +%\meta{abbrv} & +%user supplied & +%\meta{abbrv}\\ +%\pkgopt{footnote} & +%\meta{abbrv} & +%\meta{abbrv} & +%\meta{long} & +% \\ +%\pkgopt{smallcaps} & +%\meta{long} & +%\meta{abbrv} & +%\meta{long} & +%\meta{abbrv}\\ +%\pkgopt{dua} & +%\meta{long} & +%\meta{long} & +%\meta{long} & +%\meta{abbrv}\\ +%None of the above& +%\meta{long} (\meta{abbrv}) & +%\meta{abbrv} & +%\meta{long} & +%\end{tabular} +%\end{center} +%\end{table} +% +%Each of the package options \pkgopt{smallcaps}, \pkgopt{footnote} +%and \pkgopt{description} use \ics{defglsdisplay} and +%\ics{defglsdisplayfirst} (described in \autoref{sec:glsdisplay}) +%to change the way the link text is displayed. +% +%\begin{description} +%\item[\pkgopt{description},\pkgopt{footnote}]\mbox{}\par When these two options are used together, the first use displays +%the entry as:\\[10pt] +%\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\cs{footnote}\marg{long} +%\\[10pt] +%while subsequent use displays the entry as:\\[10pt] +%\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\\[10pt] +%where \meta{insert} indicates the text supplied in the final +%optional argument to \cs{gls}, \cs{glspl} or their uppercase +%variants. +% +%Note also that when these two package options are used (in the +%given order), the \sty{glossaries} package additionally implements the +%\pkgopt{sanitize} option using +%\ipkgopt[description]{sanitize}\ipkgopt[symbol]{sanitize}\verb|sanitize={description=false,symbol=false}|, so +%remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. +% +%\item[dua]\mbox{}\par The \pkgopt{dua} package option always displays the expanded +%form and so may not be used with \pkgopt{footnote} or +%\pkgopt{smallcaps}. Both first use and subsequent use displays the +%entry in the form:\\[10pt] +%\meta{long}\meta{insert}\\[10pt] +%If the \pkgopt{description} option is also used, the \gloskey{name} +%key is set to the long form, otherwise the \gloskey{name} key is +%set to the short form and the \gloskey{description} key is set to +%the long form. +% +%\item[\pkgopt{description}]\mbox{}\par This option displays the entry on first use as:\\[10pt] +%\meta{long}\meta{insert} (\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv})\\[10pt] +%while subsequent use displays the entry as:\\[10pt] +%\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\\[10pt] +%Note also that if this package option is used, the \sty{glossaries} +%package additionally implements the option +%\ipkgopt[symbol]{sanitize}\verb|sanitize={symbol=false}|, so +%remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. +% +%\item[\pkgopt{footnote}]\mbox{}\par This option displays the entry on first use as:\\[10pt] +%\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\cs{footnote}\marg{long}\\[10pt] +%while subsequent use displays the entry as:\\[10pt] +%\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert} +% +%Note also that if this package option is used, the \sty{glossaries} +%package additionally implements the option +%\ipkgopt[description]{sanitize}\verb|sanitize={description=false}|, so +%remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. +% +%\item[\pkgopt{smallcaps}]\mbox{}\par If neither the \pkgopt{footnote} nor \pkgopt{description} options +%have been set, this option displays the entry on first use as:\\[10pt] +%\meta{long}\meta{insert} (\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv})\\[10pt] +%while subsequent use displays the entry as:\\[10pt] +%\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\\[10pt] +%where \cs{acronymfont} is set to \cs{textsc}. +% +%Note also that if this package option is used, the \sty{glossaries} +%package additionally implements the option +%\ipkgopt[symbol]{sanitize}\verb|sanitize={symbol=false}|, so +%remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. +% +%\item[None of the above]\mbox{}\par If none of the package options \pkgopt{smallcaps}, \pkgopt{footnote} +%or \pkgopt{description} are used, then on first use the entry is +%displayed as:\\[10pt] +%\meta{long} (\meta{abbrv})\meta{insert}\\[10pt] +%while subsequent use displays the entry as:\\[10pt] +%\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\\[10pt] +%\meta{abbrv}\meta{insert} +%\end{description} +% +%Recall from \autoref{sec:glslink} that you can access the values of individual keys using commands +%like \ics{glstext}, so it is possible to use these commands to +%print just the long form or just the abbreviation without affecting +%the flag that determines whether the entry has been used. However +%the keys that store the long and short form vary depending on +%the acronym style, so the \sty{glossaries} package provides +%commands that are set according to the package options. These are +%as follows: +%\vspace{10pt}\par\noindent +%\DescribeMacro{\acrshort} +%\cs{acrshort}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\ +%\DescribeMacro{\Acrshort} +%\cs{ACRshort}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\ +%\DescribeMacro{\ACRshort} +%\cs{ACRshort}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +%Print the abbreviated version with a hyperlink (if necessary) to the +%relevant entry in the glossary. This is usually equivalent to +%\ics{glstext} (or its uppercase variants) but may additionally +%put the link text within the argument to \ics{acronymfont}. +%\vspace{10pt}\par\noindent +%\DescribeMacro{\acrlong} +%\cs{acrlong}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\ +%\DescribeMacro{\Acrlong} +%\cs{ACRlong}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\ +%\DescribeMacro{\ACRlong} +%\cs{ACRlong}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +%Print the long version with a hyperlink (if necessary) to the +%relevant entry in the glossary. This is may be equivalent to +%\ics{glsdesc}, \ics{glssymbol} or \ics{glsfirst} (or their uppercase +%variants), depending on package options. +%\vspace{10pt}\par\noindent +%\DescribeMacro{\acrfull} +%\cs{acrfull}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\ +%\DescribeMacro{\Acrfull} +%\cs{ACRfull}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\ +%\DescribeMacro{\ACRfull} +%\cs{ACRfull}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}\\[10pt] +%Print the long version followed by the abbreviation in brackets +%with a hyperlink (if necessary) to the +%relevant entry in the glossary. +% +%Note that if you change the definition of \ics{newacronym}, you +%may additionally need to change the above commands as well as +%the changing way the text is displayed using \ics{defglsdisplay} +%and \ics{defglsdisplayfirst}. +% +% +%\subsection{Unsetting and resetting entry flags} +% +%When using commands such as \ics{gls} it is possible that you may want +%to use the value given by the \gloskey{first} key, even though you have +%already used the glossary entry. Conversely, you may want to use the +%value given by the \gloskey{text} key, even though you haven't used the +%glossary entry. The former can be achieved by one of the following +%commands:\\[10pt] +%\DescribeMacro{\glsreset}\cs{glsreset}\marg{label}\\ +%\DescribeMacro{\glslocalreset}\cs{glslocalreset}\marg{label}\\[10pt] +%while the latter can be achieved by one of the following commands:\\[10pt] +%\DescribeMacro{\glsunset}\cs{glsunset}\marg{label}\\ +%\DescribeMacro{\glslocalunset}\cs{glslocalunset}\marg{label} +%\\[10pt] +%You can determine whether an entry has been used using:\\[10pt] +%\DescribeMacro{\ifglsused} +%\cs{ifglsused}\marg{label}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}\\[10pt] +%where \meta{label} is the label of the required entry. If the +%entry has been used, \meta{true part} will be done, otherwise +%\meta{false part} will be done. % %\subsection{Glossary Styles} -%The \styname{glossaries} package comes with some pre-defined +%\label{sec:styles} +%The \sty{glossaries} package comes with some pre-defined %glossary styles. These are as follows: %\begin{description} %\item[list] The \glostyle{list} style uses the \envname{description} @@ -988,35 +1581,43 @@ %list for that entry. % %\item[listgroup] The \glostyle{listgroup} style is like -%\glostyle{list}, but the glossary groups have headings. +%\glostyle{list} but the glossary groups have headings. % %\item[listhypergroup] The \glostyle{listhypergroup} style is like -%\glostyle{listgroup}, but has a set of links to the glossary +%\glostyle{listgroup} but has a set of links to the glossary %groups. % %\item[altlist] The \glostyle{altlist} style is like \glostyle{list} %but the description is placed on the following line. % %\item[altlistgroup] The \glostyle{altlistgroup} style is like -%\glostyle{altlist}, but the glossary groups have headings. +%\glostyle{altlist} but the glossary groups have headings. % %\item[altlisthypergroup] The \glostyle{altlisthypergroup} style is like -%\glostyle{altlistgroup}, but has a set of links to the glossary +%\glostyle{altlistgroup} but has a set of links to the glossary %groups. % +%\item[listdotted] This style uses the \envname{description} +%environment. Each entry starts with \verb|\item[]|, followed by the +%name followed by a dotted line, followed by the description. Note that +%this style ignores both the \term{number list} and the symbol. The +%length \DescribeMacro{\glslistdottedwidth}\cs{glslistdottedwidth} +%governs where the description should start.\footnote{This style was +%supplied by Axel~Menzel.} +% %\item[long] The \glostyle{long} style uses the \envname{longtable} -%environment. It has two columns, the first column contains the -%entry's name, the second column contains the description followed -%by the \term{number list}. +%environment (defined by the \isty{longtable} package). It has two +%columns: the first column contains the entry's name and the second +%column contains the description followed by the \term{number list}. % %\item[longborder] The \glostyle{longborder} style is like -%\glostyle{long}, but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. +%\glostyle{long} but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. % %\item[longheader] The \glostyle{longheader} style is like -%\glostyle{long}, but has a header row. +%\glostyle{long} but has a header row. % %\item[longheaderborder] The \glostyle{longheaderborder} style is -%like \glostyle{longheader}, but has horizontal and vertical lines +%like \glostyle{longheader} but has horizontal and vertical lines %around it. % %\item[long3col] The \glostyle{long3col} style is like @@ -1029,10 +1630,10 @@ %lines around it. % %\item[long3colheader] The \glostyle{long3colheader} style is like -%\glostyle{long3col}, but has a header row. +%\glostyle{long3col} but has a header row. % %\item[long3colheaderborder] The \glostyle{long3colheaderborder} style is -%like \glostyle{long3colheader}, but has horizontal and vertical lines +%like \glostyle{long3colheader} but has horizontal and vertical lines %around it. % %\item[long4col] The \glostyle{long4col} style is like @@ -1044,25 +1645,25 @@ %lines around it. % %\item[long4colheader] The \glostyle{long4colheader} style is like -%\glostyle{long4col}, but has a header row. +%\glostyle{long4col} but has a header row. % %\item[long4colheaderborder] The \glostyle{long4colheaderborder} style is -%like \glostyle{long4colheader}, but has horizontal and vertical lines +%like \glostyle{long4colheader} but has horizontal and vertical lines %around it. % %\item[super] The \glostyle{super} style uses the \envname{supertabular} -%environment. It has two columns, the first column contains the -%entry's name, the second column contains the description followed -%by the \term{number list}. +%environment (defined by the \isty{supertabular} package). It has two +%columns: the first column contains the entry's name and the second +%column contains the description followed by the \term{number list}. % %\item[superborder] The \glostyle{superborder} style is like -%\glostyle{super}, but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. +%\glostyle{super} but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. % %\item[superheader] The \glostyle{superheader} style is like -%\glostyle{super}, but has a header row. +%\glostyle{super} but has a header row. % %\item[superheaderborder] The \glostyle{superheaderborder} style is -%like \glostyle{superheader}, but has horizontal and vertical lines +%like \glostyle{superheader} but has horizontal and vertical lines %around it. % %\item[super3col] The \glostyle{super3col} style is like @@ -1075,11 +1676,11 @@ %lines around it. % %\item[super3colheader] The \glostyle{super3colheader} style is like -%\glostyle{super3col}, but has a header row. +%\glostyle{super3col} but has a header row. % -%\item[super3colheaderborder] The \glostyle{super3colheaderborder} style is -%like \glostyle{super3colheader}, but has horizontal and vertical lines -%around it. +%\item[super3colheaderborder] The \glostyle{super3colheaderborder} style +%is like \glostyle{super3colheader} but has horizontal and vertical +%lines around it. % %\item[super4col] The \glostyle{super4col} style is like %\glostyle{super3col} but has an additional column in which the @@ -1090,38 +1691,40 @@ %lines around it. % %\item[super4colheader] The \glostyle{super4colheader} style is like -%\glostyle{super4col}, but has a header row. +%\glostyle{super4col} but has a header row. % -%\item[super4colheaderborder] The \glostyle{super4colheaderborder} style is -%like \glostyle{super4colheader}, but has horizontal and vertical lines -%around it. +%\item[super4colheaderborder] The \glostyle{super4colheaderborder} style +%is like \glostyle{super4colheader} but has horizontal and vertical +%lines around it. % %\end{description} % -%The glossary style can be set using the \pkgopt{style} package option, +%The glossary style can be set using the \pkgopt{style} package option %or using the \gloskey[printglossary]{style} key in the optional -%argument to \icmdname{printglossary}, or using the command:\\[10pt] -%\cs{glossarystyle}\marg{style-name}\\[10pt] +%argument to \ics{printglossary} or using the command:\\[10pt] +%\DescribeMacro{\glossarystyle}\cs{glossarystyle}\marg{style-name}\\[10pt] % % \changes{1.03}{2007 July 4}{'glspostdescription added} -%All the styles except for the three and four column styles use the -%command \DescribeMacro{\glspostdescription}\cs{glspostdescription} -%after the description. This simply displays a full stop by default. -%To eliminate this full stop (or replace it with something else, -%say a comma), you will need to redefine \cs{glspostdescription} -%before the glossary is displayed. -% +%All the styles except for the three- and four-column styles and the +%\glostyle{listdotted} style use the command +%\DescribeMacro{\glspostdescription}\cs{glspostdescription} after the +%description. This simply displays a full stop by default. To eliminate +%this full stop (or replace it with something else, say a comma), you +%will need to redefine \cs{glspostdescription} before the glossary is +%displayed. %\subsection{Defining your own glossary style} % %If the predefined styles don't fit your requirements, you can %define your own style using\DescribeMacro{\newglossarystyle}:\\[10pt] %\cs{newglossarystyle}\marg{name}\marg{definitions}\\[10pt] %where \meta{name} is the name of the new glossary style (to be -%used in \cs{glossarystyle}. The second argument \meta{definitions}, -%needs to redefine the following: +%used in \cs{glossarystyle}). The second argument \meta{definitions}, +%needs to redefine all of the following: % +%\begin{description} +%\item %\DescribeEnv{theglossary} -%\noindent\envname{theglossary}\par\noindent +%\envname{theglossary}\par\noindent %This environment defines how the main body of the glossary should %be typeset. Note that this does not include the section heading, %the glossary preamble (defined by \cs{glossarypreamble}) or the @@ -1130,8 +1733,9 @@ %so the \envname{theglossary} environment is simply redefined to begin %and end the \envname{description} environment. % +%\item %\DescribeMacro{\glossaryheader} -%\noindent\cs{glossaryheader}\par\noindent +%\cs{glossaryheader}\par\noindent %This macro indicates what to do at the start of the main body %of the glossary. Note that this is not the same as %\cs{glossarypreamble}, which should not be affected by changes in @@ -1139,27 +1743,36 @@ %\cs{glossaryheader} to do nothing, whereas the \glostyle{longheader} %glossary style redefines \cs{glossaryheader} to do a header row. % +%\item %\DescribeMacro{\glsgroupheading} -%\noindent\cs{glsgroupheading}\marg{label}\par\noindent +%\cs{glsgroupheading}\marg{label}\par\noindent %This macro indicates what to do at the start of each logical block -%within the main body of the glossary. The glossary is sub-divided -%into 28 logical blocks that are determined by the first character of -%the \gloskey{sort} key (or \gloskey{name} key if the \gloskey{sort} -%key is omitted.) The sub-divisions are in the following order: -%symbols, numbers, A, \ldots, Z. Note that the argument to -%\cs{glsgroupheading} is a label, \emph{not} the group title. The -%group title can be obtained via \cs{glsgetgrouptitle}\marg{label}, -%and a navigation hypertarget can be created using -%\cs{glsnavhypertarget}\marg{label}. Most of the predefined glossary -%styles redefine \cs{glsgroupheading} to simply ignore its argument. -%The \glostyle{listhypergroup} style redefines \cs{glsgroupheading} -%as follows: +%within the main body of the glossary. The glossary is sub-divided into +%twenty-eight logical blocks that are determined by the first character +%of the \gloskey{sort} key (or \gloskey{name} key if the \gloskey{sort} +%key is omitted). The sub-divisions are in the following order: symbols, +%numbers, A, \ldots, Z. Note that the argument to \cs{glsgroupheading} +%is a label \emph{not} the group title. The group title can be obtained +%via \cs{glsgetgrouptitle}\marg{label}, and a navigation hypertarget can +%be created using \cs{glsnavhypertarget}\marg{label}. Most of the +%predefined glossary styles redefine \cs{glsgroupheading} to simply +%ignore its argument. The \glostyle{listhypergroup} style redefines +%\cs{glsgroupheading} as follows: %\begin{verbatim} %\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{% %\item[\glsnavhypertarget{##1}{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}]} %\end{verbatim} -%See also \cs{glsgroupskip} below. +%See also \cs{glsgroupskip} below. (Note that command definitions within +%\cs{newglossarystyle} must use \verb|##1| etc instead of \verb|#1| etc.) % +%\item +%\DescribeMacro{\glsgroupskip} +%\cs{glsgroupskip}\par\noindent +%This macro determines what to do after one logical group but before +%the header for the next logical group. The \glostyle{list} glossary +%style simply redefines \cs{glsgroupskip} to be \cs{indexspace}. +% +%\item %\DescribeMacro{\glossaryentryfield} %\cs{glossaryentryfield}\marg{label}\marg{formatted %name}\marg{description}\marg{symbol} @@ -1171,52 +1784,101 @@ %Note that \meta{label} is the label used when the glossary entry %was defined via either \cs{newglossaryentry} or \cs{newacronym}. %Each time you use a glossary entry it creates a -%link\footnote{if the document doesn't have hyperlinks enabled, -%\cs{@glslink} ignores the label, and simply typesets the text.} +%link\footnote{if the document doesn't have hyperlinks enabled +%\cs{@glslink} ignores the label and simply typesets the text.} %using \cs{@glslink}\marg{label}\marg{text} with the label %\texttt{glo:}\meta{label}. Your %new glossary style must therefore redefine \cs{glossaryentryfield} -%so that it uses \cs{@glstarget}\{\texttt{glo:}\meta{label}\}\marg{text} -%to ensure the hyperlinks function correctly\footnote{again, if the +%so that it uses \cs{@glstarget}\verb|{|\texttt{glo:}\meta{label}\verb|}|\marg{text} +%to ensure the hyperlinks function correctly.\footnote{again, if the %document doesn't support hyperlinks, \cs{@glstarget} will ignore -%the label, and just typeset the text.}. +%the label, and just typeset the text.} For example, the +%\glostyle{list} style defines \cs{glossaryentryfield} as follows: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{% +%\item[\@glstarget{glo:##1}{##2}] ##3\glspostdescription\space ##5} +%\end{verbatim} % %Note also that \meta{number list} will always be of the form\\[10pt] %\cs{glossaryentrynumbers}\{\cs{relax}\\ %\cs{setentrycounter}\marg{counter name}\cs{glsnumberformat}\marg{number(s)}\}\\[10pt] %where \meta{number(s)} %may contain \cs{delimN} (to delimit individual numbers) and/or -%\cs{delimR} (to indicate a range of numbers.) There may be +%\cs{delimR} (to indicate a range of numbers). There may be %multiple occurrences of %\cs{setentrycounter}\marg{counter name}\cs{glsnumberformat}\marg{number(s)}, but note %that the entire number list is enclosed within the argument -%to \cs{glossaryentrynumbers}. The user can redefine this to change +%to \ics{glossaryentrynumbers}. The user can redefine this to change %the way the entire number list is formatted, regardless of -%the glossary style (although, obviously, the \gloskey{format} -%key may over-ride this.) However the most common use of +%the glossary style. However the most common use of %\cs{glossaryentrynumbers} is to provide a means of suppressing the %number list altogether. (In fact, the \pkgopt{nonumberlist} option %redefines \cs{glossaryentrynumbers} to ignore its argument.) %Therefore, when you define a new glossary style, you don't need %to worry about whether the user has specified the %\pkgopt{nonumberlist} package option. +%\end{description} +%\subsubsection{Example: creating a completely new style} +% +%If you want a completely new style, you will need to redefine all +%of the commands and environment listed above. You also need to +%take care when using internal commands (commands whose name +%contain the @ symbol). These should either be used in a \texttt{.sty} +%file or must be placed within \cs{makeatletter} and \cs{makeatother}. +% +%For example, suppose you want each entry to start with a bullet point. +%This means that the glossary should be placed in the \envname{itemize} +%environment, so \envname{theglossary} should start and end that +%environment. Let's also suppose that you don't want anything between +%the glossary groups (so \cs{glsgroupheading} and \cs{glsgroupskip} +%should do nothing) and suppose you don't want anything to appear +%immediately after \verb|\begin{theglossary}| (so \cs{glossaryheader} +%should do nothing). In addition, let's suppose the symbol should +%appear in brackets after the name, followed by the description and +%last of all the \term{number list} should appear within square brackets +%at the end. Then you can create this new glossary style, called, say, +%\texttt{mylist}, as follows: +%\begin{verbatim} +% \newglossarystyle{mylist}{% +% % put the glossary in the itemize environment: +% \renewenvironment{theglossary}{\begin{itemize}}{\end{itemize}}% +% % have nothing after \begin{theglossary}: +% \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}% +% % have nothing between glossary groups: +% \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}% +% \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{}% +% % set how each entry should appear: +% \renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{% +% \item % bullet point +% \@glstarget{glo:##1}{##2}% the entry name +% \space (##4)% the symbol in brackets +% \space ##3% the description +% \space [##5]% the number list in square brackets +% }% +% } +%\end{verbatim} % -%One more thing to remember is that when you are redefining a command -%within the argument to another command, you must use \verb|##1|, -%\verb|##2|, etc instead of \verb|#1|, \verb|#2|, etc. For examples, -%look at the way the predefined styles are defined in -%\autoref{sec:styles}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\glsgroupskip} -%\noindent\cs{glsgroupskip}\par\noindent -%This macro determines what to do after one logical group but before -%the header for the next logical group. The \glostyle{list} glossary -%style simply redefines \cs{glsgroupskip} to be \cs{indexspace}. -% -%For further details on creating or modifying glossary styles see -%\autoref{sec:printglos} and \autoref{sec:styles}. +%\subsubsection{Example: creating a new glossary style based on an +%existing style} +% +%\changes{1.11}{2008 March 1}{Fixed error in manual (glossary style +%is set using 'glossarystyle not 'setglossarystyle)}% +%If you want to define a new style that is a slightly modified +%version of an existing style, you can use \cs{glossarystyle} +%within the second argument of \cs{newglossarystyle} followed by +%whatever alterations you require. For example, suppose you want +%a style like the \glostyle{list} style but you don't want the extra +%vertical space created by \cs{indexspace} between groups, then you +%can create a new glossary style called, say, \texttt{mylist} as +%follows: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\newglossarystyle{mylist}{% +%\glossarystyle{list}% base this style on the list style +%\renewcommand{\glsgroupskip}{}% make nothing happen between groups +%} +%\end{verbatim} % -% \StopEventually{\phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Index}\PrintIndex} +% \StopEventually{\clearpage\phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Index}\PrintIndex} % % % @@ -1232,13 +1894,20 @@ % This package requires \LaTeXe. % \begin{macrocode} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} -\ProvidesPackage{glossaries}[2007/10/13 v1.08 (NLCT)] +\ProvidesPackage{glossaries}[2008/02/22 v1.11 (NLCT)] % \end{macrocode} % Required packages: % \begin{macrocode} \RequirePackage{ifthen} \RequirePackage{xkeyval}[2006/11/18] -\RequirePackage{xspace} +% \end{macrocode} +%\changes{1.1}{2008 Feb 22}{amsgen now loaded (\cs{new@ifnextchar} needed)} +% Need to use \cs{new@ifnextchar} instead of \cs{@ifnextchar} in +% commands that have a final optional argument (such as \ics{gls}) +% so require \isty{amsgen}. +% Thanks to Morten~H{\o}gholm for suggesting this. +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{amsgen} % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection{Package Options}\label{sec:pkgopt} @@ -1248,6 +1917,13 @@ % \begin{macrocode} \define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[gls]{toc}[true]{} % \end{macrocode} +%\changes{1.1}{2008 Feb 22}{numberline option added} +% The \pkgopt{numberline} package option adds \cs{numberline} to +% \cs{addcontentsline}. Note that this option only has an effect +% if used in with \pkgopt[true]{toc}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[gls]{numberline}[true]{} +% \end{macrocode} % % The sectional unit used to start the glossary is stored in % \cs{@@glossarysec}. If chapters are defined, this @@ -1264,18 +1940,44 @@ % The starred form of the named sectional unit will be used. % If you want some other way to start the glossary section (e.g.\ % a numbered section) you will have to redefined -% \icmdname{glossarysection}. +% \ics{glossarysection}. % \begin{macrocode} \define@choicekey{glossaries.sty}{section}{part,chapter,section,% subsection,subsubsection,paragraph,subparagraph}[section]{% \renewcommand*{\@@glossarysec}{#1}} % \end{macrocode} +%\changes{1.1}{2008 Feb 22}{numberedsection option added} +% Determine whether or not to use numbered sections. +%\begin{macro}{\@@glossarysecstar} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@@glossarysecstar}{*} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +%\begin{macro}{\@@glossaryseclabel} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@choicekey{glossaries.sty}{numberedsection}[\val\nr]{% +false,nolabel,autolabel}[nolabel]{% +\ifcase\nr\relax + \renewcommand*{\@@glossarysecstar}{*}% + \renewcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{}% +\or + \renewcommand*{\@@glossarysecstar}{}% + \renewcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{}% +\or + \renewcommand*{\@@glossarysecstar}{}% + \renewcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{\label{\@glo@type}}% +\fi} +% \end{macrocode} % % The default glossary style is stored in % \cs{@glossary@default@style}. This is initialised to % \texttt{list}. (The \glostyle{list} style is -% defined in the accompanying \styname{glossary-list} package -% described in \autoref{sec:styles}.) +% defined in the accompanying \isty{glossary-list} package +% described in \autoref{sec:code:styles}.) %\begin{macro}{\@glossary@default@style} % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\@glossary@default@style}{list} @@ -1287,7 +1989,7 @@ subsection,subsubsection,paragraph,subparagraph}[section]{% % of the document, so you can still use the \pkgopt{style} key to % set a style that is defined in another package. This package comes % with some predefined styles that are defined in -% \autoref{sec:styles}. +% \autoref{sec:code:styles}. % \begin{macrocode} \define@key{glossaries.sty}{style}{% \renewcommand*{\@glossary@default@style}{#1}} @@ -1321,7 +2023,7 @@ subsection,subsubsection,paragraph,subparagraph}[section]{% % as an argument (or as the value of the % \gloskey{type}\igloskey[printglossary]{type} key in %a key-value list.) This was mainly done so that -% \icmdname{loadglsentries} can temporarily change +% \ics{loadglsentries} can temporarily change % \cs{glsdefaulttype} while it loads a file containing % new glossary entries (see \autoref{sec:load}). %\begin{macro}{\glsdefaulttype} @@ -1348,7 +2050,7 @@ subsection,subsubsection,paragraph,subparagraph}[section]{% % is stored in \cs{glscounter}. This is initialised to the % page counter. This is used as the default counter when a % new glossary is defined, unless a different counter is specified -% in the optional argument to \icmdname{newglossary} (see +% in the optional argument to \ics{newglossary} (see % \autoref{sec:newglos}). %\begin{macro}{\glscounter} % \begin{macrocode} @@ -1366,15 +2068,15 @@ subsection,subsubsection,paragraph,subparagraph}[section]{% % \gloskey{sort}, \gloskey{name}, \gloskey{description} and % \gloskey{symbol}) need to be sanitized, otherwise fragile % commands would not be able to be used in -% \icmdname{newglossaryentry}. However, strange results will occur +% \ics{newglossaryentry}. However, strange results will occur % if you then use those fields in the document. As these fields % are not normally used in the document, but are by default only % used in the glossary, the default is to sanitize them. If however % you want to use these values in the document (either by redefining -% commands like \icmdname{glsdisplay} or by using commands like -% \icmdname{glsentrydesc}) you will have to switch off the +% commands like \ics{glsdisplay} or by using commands like +% \ics{glsentrydesc}) you will have to switch off the % sanitization using the \pkgopt{sanitize} package option, but -% you will then have to use \icmdname{protect} to protect fragile +% you will then have to use \ics{protect} to protect fragile % commands when defining new glossary entries. % The \pkgopt{sanitize} option % takes a key-value list as its value, which can be used to @@ -1458,6 +2160,48 @@ name=true]{% }{\setkeys[gls]{sanitize}{#1}}% } % \end{macrocode} +%\changes{1.1}{2008 Feb 22}{translate option added} +% Define \pkgopt{translate} option. If false don't set up +% multi-lingual support. +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[gls]{translate}[true]{} +% \end{macrocode} +% Set the default value: +% \begin{macrocode} +\glstranslatefalse +\@ifpackageloaded{translator}{\glstranslatetrue}{% +\@ifpackageloaded{babel}{\glstranslatetrue}{}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Set the long form of the acronym in footnote on first use. +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[glsacr]{footnote}[true]{% +\ifthenelse{\boolean{glsacrdescription}}{}% +{\renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizedesc}{}}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% Allow acronyms to have a description (needs to be set using +% the \gloskey{description} key in the optional argument of +% \ics{newacronym}). +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[glsacr]{description}[true]{% + \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizesymbol}{}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% Define \ics{newacronym} to set the short form in small capitals. +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[glsacr]{smallcaps}[true]{% + \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizesymbol}{}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% Define \ics{newacronym} to always use the long forms +% (i.e.\ don't use acronyms) +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[glsacr]{dua}[true]{% + \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizesymbol}{}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% % Process package options: % \begin{macrocode} \ProcessOptionsX @@ -1487,7 +2231,7 @@ name=true]{% %\subsection{Default values}\label{sec:predefinednames} % This section sets up default values that are used by this % package. Some of the names may already be defined (e.g.\ by -% \styname{babel}) so \cs{providecommand} is used. +% \isty{babel}) so \cs{providecommand} is used. % % Main glossary title: %\begin{macro}{\glossaryname} @@ -1544,142 +2288,25 @@ name=true]{% % babel support}. Thanks to everyone who contributed to the % translations from both comp.text.tex and via email. % \begin{macrocode} -\@ifpackageloaded{babel}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% English: -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsenglish{% -\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossary}% -\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acronyms}% -\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Notation}% -\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Description}% -\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}% -\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Page List}% -\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbols}% -\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Numbers}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% German (quite a few variations were suggested for German, -% I settled on the following): -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsgerman{% -\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossar}% -\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Akronyme}% -\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Bezeichnung}% -\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Beschreibung}% -\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}% -\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Seiten}% -\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbole}% -\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Zahlen}} -% \end{macrocode} -% ngerman is identical to German: -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsngerman{% -\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossar}% -\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Akronyme}% -\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Bezeichnung}% -\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Beschreibung}% -\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}% -\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Seiten}% -\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbole}% -\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Zahlen}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Italian: -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsitalian{% -\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossario}% -\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acronimi}% -\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Nomenclatura}% -\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Descrizione}% -\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Simbolo}% -\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Elenco delle pagine}% -\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Simboli}% -\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Numeri}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Dutch: -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsdutch{% -\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Woordenlijst}% -\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acroniemen}% -\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Benaming}% -\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Beschrijving}% -\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbool}% -\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Pagina's}% -\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbolen}% -\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Cijfers}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Spanish: -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsspanish{% -\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glosario}% -\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Siglas}% -\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Entrada}% -\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Descripci\'on}% -\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{S\'{\i}mbolo}% -\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Lista de p\'aginas}% -\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{S\'{\i}mbolos}% -\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{N\'umeros}} -% \end{macrocode} -% French: -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsfrench{% -\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossaire}% -\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acronymes}% -\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Terme}% -\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Description}% -\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbole}% -\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Pages}% -\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symboles}% -\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Nombres}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Danish: -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsdanish{% -\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Ordliste}% -\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Akronymer}% -\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Symbolforklaring}% -\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Beskrivelse}% -\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}% -\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Side}% -\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symboler}% -\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Tal}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Irish: -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsirish{% -\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Gluais}% -\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acrainmneacha}% 'Acronyms' -% \end{macrocode} -% wasn't sure whether to go for N\'ota (Note), Ciall (`Meaning', -% `sense') ot Br\'{\i} (`Meaning'). In the end I chose Ciall. -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Ciall}% -\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Tuairisc}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Again, not sure whether to use Comhartha/Comhartha\'{\i} or -% Siombail/Siombaile, so have chosen the former. -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Comhartha}% -\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Comhartha\'{\i}}%OR -\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Leathanaigh}% -\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Uimhreacha}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Hungarian: -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsmagyar{% -\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Sz\'ojegyz\'ek}% -\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Bet\H uszavak}% -\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Kifejez\'es}% -\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Magyar\'azat}% -\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Jel\"ol\'es}% -\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Oldalsz\'am}% -\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Jelek}% -\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Sz\'amjegyek}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% babel not loaded: -% \begin{macrocode} -}{} +\ifglstranslate +% \end{macrocode} +% If \isty{translator} is not install, used standard +% \isty{babel} captions, otherwise load \isty{translator} +% dictionary. +%\changes{1.1}{2008 Feb 22}{Added support for translator package} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifpackageloaded{translator}{\usedictionary{glossaries-dictionary}% +\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{\translate{Glossary}}% +\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{\translate{Acronyms}}% +\renewcommand*{\entryname}{\translate{Notation (glossaries)}}% +\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{\translate{Description (glossaries)}}% +\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{\translate{Symbol (glossaries)}}% +\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{\translate{Page List (glossaries)}}% +\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{\translate{Symbols (glossaries)}}% +\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{\translate{Numbers (glossaries)}}% +}{% +\@ifpackageloaded{babel}{\RequirePackage{glossaries-babel}}{}} +\fi % \end{macrocode} % The description terminator is given by \cs{glspostdescription} % (except for the 3 and 4 column styles). This is a full stop @@ -1692,10 +2319,10 @@ name=true]{% % % The name of the \appname{makeindex} style file is given by % \cs{istfilename}. This file is -% created by \icmdname{writeist} (which is used by -% \icmdname{makeglossaries}) so +% created by \ics{writeist} (which is used by +% \ics{makeglossaries}) so % redefining this command will only have an effect if it is -% done \emph{before} the \filetype{ist} file is created. +% done \emph{before} the \filetype{.ist} file is created. %\begin{macro}{\istfilename} % \begin{macrocode} \providecommand*{\istfilename}{\jobname.ist} @@ -1727,10 +2354,10 @@ name=true]{% % % The command \cs{glsnumberformat} indicates the default % format for the page numbers in the glossary. (Note that this -% is not the same as \icmdname{glossaryentrynumbers}, but applies +% is not the same as \ics{glossaryentrynumbers}, but applies % to individual numbers or groups of numbers within an entry's % associated number list.) If hyperlinks are defined, it will use -% \icmdname{glshypernumber}, otherwise it will simply display its +% \ics{glshypernumber}, otherwise it will simply display its % argument ``as is''. %\begin{macro}{\glsnumberformat} % \begin{macrocode} @@ -1768,9 +2395,9 @@ name=true]{% % change \cs{glossarypreamble}.) The preamble is empty by % default. If you have multiple glossaries, and you want a % different preamble for each glossary, you will need to use -% \icmdname{printglossary} for each glossary type, instead of -% \icmdname{printglossaries}, and redefine \cs{glossarypreamble} -% before each \icmdname{printglossary}. +% \ics{printglossary} for each glossary type, instead of +% \ics{printglossaries}, and redefine \cs{glossarypreamble} +% before each \ics{printglossary}. %\begin{macro}{\glossarypreamble} % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\glossarypreamble}{} @@ -1782,7 +2409,7 @@ name=true]{% % add something after the end of the \envname{theglossary} % environment (again, this shouldn't be affected by the % glossary style.) It is, of course, possible to simply add the -% text after \icmdname{printglossary}, but if you only want the +% text after \ics{printglossary}, but if you only want the % postamble to appear after the first glossary, but not after % subsequent glossaries, you can do something like: %\begin{verbatim} @@ -1798,7 +2425,7 @@ name=true]{% % The sectioning command that starts a glossary is given by % \cs{glossarysection}. (This does not form part of the % glossary style, and so should not be changed by a glossary -% style.) If \icmdname{phantomsection} +% style.) If \ics{phantomsection} % is defined, it uses \cs{\@p@glossarysection}, otherwise it % uses \cs{@glossarysection}. %\changes{1.05}{2007 Aug 10}{added '@mkboth to 'glossarysection} @@ -1815,31 +2442,52 @@ name=true]{% % % The required sectional unit is given by \cs{@@glossarysec} % which was defined by the \pkgopt{section} package option. The -% starred form of the command is chosen. If you want a numbered -% section for the glossary or if you don't want any sectional +% starred form of the command is chosen. If you don't want any sectional % command, you will need to redefine \cs{glossarysection}. +% The sectional unit can be changed, if different sectional units +% are required. +%\begin{macro}{\setglossarysection} +%\changes{1.1}{2008 Feb 22}{new} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\setglossarysection}[1]{% +\setkeys{glossaries.sty}{section=#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} % %The command \cs{@glossarysection} indicates how to start -% the glossary section if \icmdname{phantomsection} is not defined. +% the glossary section if \ics{phantomsection} is not defined. %\begin{macro}{\@glossarysection} +%\changes{1.1}{2008 Feb 22}{numbered sections and auto label added} % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\@glossarysection}[2]{% -\csname\@@glossarysec\endcsname*{#2}% -\@gls@toc{#1}{\@@glossarysec}} +\ifx\@@glossarysecstar\@empty + \csname\@@glossarysec\endcsname{#2}% +\else + \csname\@@glossarysec\endcsname*{#2}% + \@gls@toc{#1}{\@@glossarysec}% +\fi +\@@glossaryseclabel} % \end{macrocode} %\end{macro} % % As \cs{@glossarysection}, but put in -% \icmdname{phantomsection}, and swap where \cs{@gls@toc} goes. +% \ics{phantomsection}, and swap where \cs{@gls@toc} goes. % If using chapters do a \cs{clearpage}. This ensures that % the hyper link from the table of contents leads to the line above % the heading, rather than the line below it. %\begin{macro}{\@p@glossarysection} +%\changes{1.1}{2008 Feb 22}{numbered sections and auto label added} % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\@p@glossarysection}[2]{% \gls@doclearpage -\phantomsection\@gls@toc{#1}{\@@glossarysec}% -\csname\@@glossarysec\endcsname*{#2}} +\phantomsection +\ifx\@@glossarysecstar\@empty + \csname\@@glossarysec\endcsname{#2}% +\else + \@gls@toc{#1}{\@@glossarysec}% + \csname\@@glossarysec\endcsname*{#2}% +\fi +\@@glossaryseclabel} % \end{macrocode} %\end{macro} % @@ -1858,13 +2506,20 @@ name=true]{% % % The glossary is added to the table of contents if glstoc flag set. % If it is set, \cs{@gls@toc} will add a line to the -% \filetype{toc} file, otherwise it will do nothing. +% \filetype{.toc} file, otherwise it will do nothing. % (The first argument to \cs{@gls@toc} is the title for the % table of contents, the second argument is the sectioning type.) %\begin{macro}{\@gls@toc} +%\changes{1.1}{2008 Feb 22}{numberline added} % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\@gls@toc}[2]{% -\ifglstoc \addcontentsline{toc}{#2}{#1}\fi} +\ifglstoc + \ifglsnumberline + \addcontentsline{toc}{#2}{\numberline{}#1}% + \else + \addcontentsline{toc}{#2}{#1}% + \fi +\fi} % \end{macrocode} %\end{macro} % @@ -1971,7 +2626,7 @@ been defined.}{}}{#2}} % in \cs{@glo@types}. When a new glossary type % is created, its identifying name is added to this list. % This is used by commands that iterate through all glossaries -% (such as \icmdname{makeglossaries} and \icmdname{printglossaries}.) +% (such as \ics{makeglossaries} and \ics{printglossaries}.) %\begin{macro}{\@glo@types} % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\@glo@types}{,} @@ -1983,12 +2638,12 @@ been defined.}{}}{#2}} %\marg{title}\oarg{counter}\\[10pt]% % where \meta{log-ext} is the extension of the \appname{makeindex} % transcript file, \meta{in-ext} is the extension of the glossary -% input file (read in by \icmdname{printglossary} and created by +% input file (read in by \ics{printglossary} and created by % \appname{makeindex}), \meta{out-ext} is the extension of the % glossary output file which is read in by \appname{makeindex} -% (lines are written to this file by the \icmdname{glossary} command), +% (lines are written to this file by the \ics{glossary} command), % \meta{title} is the title of the glossary that is used in -% \icmdname{glossarysection} and +% \ics{glossarysection} and % \meta{counter} is the default counter to be used by entries % belonging to this glossary. The \appname{makeglossaries} Perl % script reads in the relevant extensions from the auxiliary file, @@ -2024,7 +2679,7 @@ exists}% % How to display this entry in the document text (uses % \cs{glsdisplay} and \cs{glsdisplayfirst} by % default). These can be redefined by the user later if required -% (see \icmdname{defglsdisplay} and \icmdname{defglsdisplayfirst}) +% (see \ics{defglsdisplay} and \ics{defglsdisplayfirst}) % \begin{macrocode} \expandafter\gdef\csname gls@#2@display\endcsname{% \glsdisplay}% @@ -2033,7 +2688,7 @@ exists}% % \end{macrocode} % Find out if the final optional argument has been specified, and % use it to set the counter associated with this glossary. (Uses -% \icmdname{glscounter} if no optional argument is present.) +% \ics{glscounter} if no optional argument is present.) % \begin{macrocode} \@ifnextchar[{\@gls@setcounter{#2}}{\@gls@setcounter{#2}[\glscounter]}}} % \end{macrocode} @@ -2044,7 +2699,7 @@ exists}% % \end{macrocode} %\cs{@newglossary} is used to specify the file extensions % for the \appname{makeindex} input, output and transcript files. -% It is written to the auxiliary file by \icmdname{newglossary}. +% It is written to the auxiliary file by \ics{newglossary}. % Since it is not used by \LaTeX, \cs{@newglossary} simply % ignores its arguments. %\begin{macro}{\@newglossary} @@ -2072,7 +2727,7 @@ exists}% %\end{macro} % % Define the main glossary. This will be the first glossary to -% be displayed when using \icmdname{printglossaries}. +% be displayed when using \ics{printglossaries}. % \begin{macrocode} \newglossary{main}{gls}{glo}{\glossaryname} % \end{macrocode} @@ -2100,8 +2755,8 @@ exists}% % % The \gloskey{description} key is usually only used in % the glossary, but can be made to appear in the text by redefining -% \icmdname{glsdisplay} and \icmdname{glsdisplayfirst} (or -% using \icmdname{defglsdisplay} and \icmdname{defglsdisplayfirst}), however, +% \ics{glsdisplay} and \ics{glsdisplayfirst} (or +% using \ics{defglsdisplay} and \ics{defglsdisplayfirst}), however, % you will have to disable the sanitize option (using the % \pkgopt{sanitize} package option, % "sanitize={description=false}", and protect fragile @@ -2174,12 +2829,12 @@ exists}% % It is provided for glossary styles that require an associated % symbol, as well as a name and description. To make this value % appear in the glossary, you need to redefine -% \icmdname{glossaryentryfield} so that it uses its fourth parameter. +% \ics{glossaryentryfield} so that it uses its fourth parameter. % If you want this value to appear in the text when the term is used -% by commands like \icmdname{gls}, you will need to change -% \icmdname{glsdisplay} and \icmdname{glsdisplayfirst} (either -% explicitly for all glossaries or via \icmdname{defglsdisplay} -% and \icmdname{defglsdisplayfirst} for individual glossaries.) +% by commands like \ics{gls}, you will need to change +% \ics{glsdisplay} and \ics{glsdisplayfirst} (either +% explicitly for all glossaries or via \ics{defglsdisplay} +% and \ics{defglsdisplayfirst} for individual glossaries.) % \begin{macrocode} \define@key{glossentry}{symbol}{% \def\@glo@symbol{#1}% @@ -2289,7 +2944,7 @@ in it}}{% % Each glossary entry is assigned a conditional of the form %\cs{ifglo@}\meta{label}\texttt{@flag} which determines % whether or not the entry has been used (see also -% \icmdname{ifglsused} defined below.) These flags can +% \ics{ifglsused} defined below.) These flags can % be set and unset using the following macros: % % The command \cs{glsreset}\marg{label} can be used @@ -2368,8 +3023,8 @@ in it}}{% % \subsection{Loading files containing glossary entries} %\label{sec:load} % Glossary entries can be defined in an external file. -% These external files can contain \icmdname{newglossaryentry} -% and \icmdname{newacronym} commands.\footnote{and any other valid +% These external files can contain \ics{newglossaryentry} +% and \ics{newacronym} commands.\footnote{and any other valid %\LaTeX\ code that can be used in the preamble.}\\[10pt] % \cs{loadglsentries}\oarg{type}\marg{filename}\\[10pt] % This command will input the file using \cs{input}. @@ -2377,8 +3032,8 @@ in it}}{% % entries should be assigned if they haven't used the \gloskey{type} % key. If the optional argument is not specified, the default % glossary is used. Only those entries used in the document (via -% \icmdname{glslink}, \icmdname{gls}, \icmdname{glspl} and uppercase -% variants or \icmdname{glsadd} and \icmdname{glsaddall} +% \ics{glslink}, \ics{gls}, \ics{glspl} and uppercase +% variants or \ics{glsadd} and \ics{glsaddall} % will appear in the glossary.) The mandatory argument is % the filename (with or without .tex extension.) %\begin{macro}{\loadglsentries} @@ -2397,15 +3052,15 @@ in it}}{% %\subsection{Using glossary entries in the text} %\label{sec:code:glslink} % -% Any term that has been defined using \icmdname{newglossaryentry} -% (or \icmdname{newacronym}) can be displayed in the text +% Any term that has been defined using \ics{newglossaryentry} +% (or \ics{newacronym}) can be displayed in the text % (i.e.\ outside of the glossary) using % one of the commands defined in this section. Unless you use -% \icmdname{glslink}, the way the term appears in the text is -% determined by \icmdname{glsdisplayfirst} (if it is the first -% time the term has been used) or \icmdname{glsdisplay} (for +% \ics{glslink}, the way the term appears in the text is +% determined by \ics{glsdisplayfirst} (if it is the first +% time the term has been used) or \ics{glsdisplay} (for % subsequent use.) Any formatting commands (such as \cs{textbf} -% is governed by \icmdname{glstextformat}. By default this just +% is governed by \ics{glstextformat}. By default this just % displays the \term{link text} ``as is''. %\changes{1.04}{2007 Aug 3}{Added 'glstextformat}% %\begin{macro}{\glstextformat} @@ -2421,7 +3076,7 @@ in it}}{% % \verb|#2| will be the value of the entry's \gloskey{description} % key, \verb|#3| will be the value of the entry's \gloskey{symbol} % key and \verb|#4| is additional text supplied by the final optional -% argument to commands like \icmdname{gls} and \icmdname{glspl}. +% argument to commands like \ics{gls} and \ics{glspl}. % The default is to display the first parameter followed by the % additional text. %\begin{macro}{\glsdisplayfirst} @@ -2437,7 +3092,7 @@ in it}}{% % \verb|#2| will be the value of the entry's \gloskey{description} % key, \verb|#3| will be the value of the entry's \gloskey{symbol} % key and \verb|#4| is additional text supplied by the final optional -% argument to commands like \icmdname{gls} and \icmdname{glspl}. +% argument to commands like \ics{gls} and \ics{glspl}. %\begin{macro}{\glsdisplay} % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\glsdisplay}[4]{#1#4} @@ -2448,14 +3103,14 @@ in it}}{% % and \cs{glsdisplay} as the default way of displaying its % entry in the text. This can be changed for the entries belonging % to an individual glossary using -% \icmdname{defglsdisplay} and \icmdname{defglsdisplayfirst}. +% \ics{defglsdisplay} and \ics{defglsdisplayfirst}. %\\[10pt] % \cs{defglsdisplay}\oarg{type}\marg{definition}\\[10pt]% % The glossary type is given by \meta{type} (the default glossary % if omitted) and % \meta{definition} should have at most \verb|#1|, \verb|#2|, % \verb|#3| and \verb|#4|. These represent the same arguments -% as those described for \icmdname{glsdisplay}. +% as those described for \ics{glsdisplay}. %\begin{macro}{\defglsdisplay} % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\defglsdisplay}[2][\glsdefaulttype]{% @@ -2468,7 +3123,7 @@ in it}}{% % if omitted) and % \meta{definition} should have at most \verb|#1|, \verb|#2|, % \verb|#3| and \verb|#4|. These represent the same arguments -% as those described for \icmdname{glsdisplayfirst}. +% as those described for \ics{glsdisplayfirst}. %\begin{macro}{\defglsdisplayfirst} % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\defglsdisplayfirst}[2][\glsdefaulttype]{% @@ -2483,7 +3138,7 @@ in it}}{% % the commands like \cs{gls} have a final optional % argument that can be used to insert additional text in the % link (this will usually be appended, but can be redefined using -% \icmdname{defglsdisplay} and \icmdname{defglsdisplayfirst}). +% \ics{defglsdisplay} and \ics{defglsdisplayfirst}). % It goes against the \LaTeX\ norm to have an optional % argument after the mandatory arguments, but it makes more % sense to write, say, \verb|\gls{label}['s]| rather than, say, @@ -2491,7 +3146,8 @@ in it}}{% % are defined to include the final square bracket, spaces % will be ignored after them. This is likely to lead to % confusion as most users would not expect, say, "\gls{"\meta{label}"}" -% to ignore following spaces, so \icmdname{xspace} is used. +% to ignore following spaces, so \cs{new@ifnextchar} from the +% \isty{amsgen} package is required. % % The following keys can be used in the first optional % argument. The \gloskey[glslink]{counter} key checks that the @@ -2597,7 +3253,6 @@ counter as its value}}{% % if there is nothing else), % otherwise set \cs{@glo@prefix} to nothing and % \cs{@glo@suffix} to all of it. -%\begin{macro}{\@glo@check@mkidxrangechar} % \begin{macrocode} \def\@glo@check@mkidxrangechar#1#2\@nil{% \if#1(\relax @@ -2620,7 +3275,6 @@ counter as its value}}{% \fi \fi} % \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} % Catch \appname{makeindex} special characters\mkidxspch: %\begin{macro}{\@gls@checkmkidxchars} % \begin{macrocode} @@ -2655,10 +3309,17 @@ counter as its value}}{% \def\@gls@updatechecked#1\@nil#2{\def#2{#1}} % \end{macrocode} %\end{macro} +%\begin{macro}{\@gls@tmpb} +%\changes{1.1}{2008 Feb 22}{changed \cs{toksdef} to \cs{newtoks}} +% Define temporary token +% \begin{macrocode} +\newtoks\@gls@tmpb +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +%\begin{macro}{\@gls@checkquote} % Replace \verb|"| with \verb|""| since \verb|"| is a makeindex % special character\mkidxspch. % \begin{macrocode} -\toksdef\@gls@tmpb=2 \def\@gls@checkquote#1"#2"#3\null{% \@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}% \toks@={#1}% @@ -2682,6 +3343,8 @@ counter as its value}}{% \fi \@@gls@checkquote} % \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +%\begin{macro}{\@gls@checkescquote} % Do the same for \verb|\"|: % \begin{macrocode} \def\@gls@checkescquote#1\"#2\"#3\null{% @@ -2708,6 +3371,8 @@ counter as its value}}{% \fi \@@gls@checkescquote} % \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +%\begin{macro}{\@gls@checkescactual} % Similarly for \verb|\?| (which is replaces @ as % \appname{makeindex}'s special character): % \begin{macrocode} @@ -2735,6 +3400,8 @@ counter as its value}}{% \fi \@@gls@checkescactual} % \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +%\begin{macro}{\@gls@checkescbar} % Similarly for \verb"\|": % \begin{macrocode} \def\@gls@checkescbar#1\|#2\|#3\null{% @@ -2761,6 +3428,8 @@ counter as its value}}{% \fi \@@gls@checkescbar} % \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +%\begin{macro}{\@gls@checkesclevel} % Similarly for \verb"\!": % \begin{macrocode} \def\@gls@checkesclevel#1\!#2\!#3\null{% @@ -2787,6 +3456,8 @@ counter as its value}}{% \fi \@@gls@checkesclevel} % \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +%\begin{macro}{\@gls@checkbar} % and for \verb"|": % \begin{macrocode} \def\@gls@checkbar#1|#2|#3\null{% @@ -2812,6 +3483,8 @@ counter as its value}}{% \fi \@@gls@checkbar} % \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +%\begin{macro}{\@gls@checklevel} % and for \verb"!": % \begin{macrocode} \def\@gls@checklevel#1!#2!#3\null{% @@ -2837,6 +3510,8 @@ counter as its value}}{% \fi \@@gls@checklevel} % \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +%\begin{macro}{\@gls@checkactual} % and for \verb"?": % \begin{macrocode} \def\@gls@checkactual#1?#2?#3\null{% @@ -2862,12 +3537,13 @@ counter as its value}}{% \fi \@@gls@checkactual} % \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} % -% If \icmdname{hyperlink} +% If \ics{hyperlink} % is not defined, \cs{@glslink} and \cs{@glstarget} % ignore their first argument, and just do the second argument, -% otherwise they are equivalent to \icmdname{hyperlink} and -%\icmdname{hypertarget}. +% otherwise they are equivalent to \ics{hyperlink} and +%\ics{hypertarget}. % \begin{macrocode} \@ifundefined{hyperlink}{% \gdef\@glslink#1#2{#2}\gdef\@glstarget#1#2{#2}% @@ -2901,12 +3577,12 @@ counter as its value}}{% % keys used when the entry was defined. % % The first optional argument is a key-value list, the same as -% \icmdname{glslink}\igloskey[glslink]{hyper}\igloskey[glslink]{format}\igloskey[glslink]{counter}, +% \ics{glslink}\igloskey[glslink]{hyper}\igloskey[glslink]{format}\igloskey[glslink]{counter}, % the mandatory argument is the entry label. % After the mandatory argument, there is another optional argument % to insert extra text in the link text (the location of the inserted -% text is governed by \icmdname{glsdisplay} and -% \icmdname{glsdisplayfirst}). As with \cs{glslink} +% text is governed by \ics{glsdisplay} and +% \ics{glsdisplayfirst}). As with \cs{glslink} % there is a starred version which is the same as the unstarred % version but with the \gloskey[glslink]{hyper} key set to \texttt{false}. % (Additional options can also be specified @@ -2929,7 +3605,7 @@ counter as its value}}{% %\begin{macro}{\@gls} % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\@gls}[2][]{% -\@ifnextchar[{\@gls@{#1}{#2}}{\@gls@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\new@ifnextchar[{\@gls@{#1}{#2}}{\@gls@{#1}{#2}[]}} % \end{macrocode} %\end{macro} % Read in the final optional argument: @@ -2937,6 +3613,11 @@ counter as its value}}{% \def\@gls@#1#2[#3]{% \glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% % \end{macrocode} +% Save options in \cs{@gls@link@opts} and label in \cs{@gls@link@label} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@gls@link@opts{#1}% +\def\@gls@link@label{#2}% +% \end{macrocode} % Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in % \cs{@glo@text}) % \begin{macrocode} @@ -2947,15 +3628,24 @@ counter as its value}}{% \csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname {\glsentryfirst{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}% % \end{macrocode} -% Call \cs{@gls@link} +% Call \cs{@gls@link}. +% If \pkgopt{footnote} package option has been used, suppress +% hyperlink for first use. % \begin{macrocode} -\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}% +\ifglsused{#2}{% + \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}% +}{% + \ifglsacrfootnote + \@gls@link[#1,hyper=false]{#2}{\@glo@text}% + \else + \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}% + \fi +}% % \end{macrocode} -% Indicate that this entry has now been used, and add a space if -% appropriate +% Indicate that this entry has now been used % \begin{macrocode} \glsunset{#2}}% -\xspace} +} % \end{macrocode} % % \cs{Gls} behaves like \cs{gls}, but the first letter @@ -2976,13 +3666,18 @@ counter as its value}}{% % a final optional argument % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\@Gls}[2][]{% -\@ifnextchar[{\@Gls@{#1}{#2}}{\@Gls@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\new@ifnextchar[{\@Gls@{#1}{#2}}{\@Gls@{#1}{#2}[]}} % \end{macrocode} % Read in the final optional argument: % \begin{macrocode} \def\@Gls@#1#2[#3]{% \glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% % \end{macrocode} +% Save options in \cs{@gls@link@opts} and label in \cs{@gls@link@label} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@gls@link@opts{#1}% +\def\@gls@link@label{#2}% +% \end{macrocode} % Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in % \cs{@glo@text}) % \begin{macrocode} @@ -2994,17 +3689,26 @@ counter as its value}}{% {\glsentryfirst{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}% % \end{macrocode} % Call \cs{@gls@link} +% If \pkgopt{footnote} package option has been used, suppress +% hyperlink for first use. % \begin{macrocode} -\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% +\ifglsused{#2}{% + \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% +}{% + \ifglsacrfootnote + \@gls@link[#1,hyper=false]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% + \else + \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% + \fi +}% % \end{macrocode} -% Indicate that this entry has now been used, and add a space if -% appropriate +% Indicate that this entry has now been used % \begin{macrocode} \glsunset{#2}}% -\xspace} +} % \end{macrocode} % -% \cs{GLS} behaves like \icmdname{gls}, but the link +% \cs{GLS} behaves like \ics{gls}, but the link % text is converted to uppercase: %\begin{macro}{\GLS} % \begin{macrocode} @@ -3019,13 +3723,18 @@ counter as its value}}{% % a final optional argument % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\@GLS}[2][]{% -\@ifnextchar[{\@GLS@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLS@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLS@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLS@{#1}{#2}[]}} % \end{macrocode} % Read in the final optional argument: % \begin{macrocode} \def\@GLS@#1#2[#3]{% \glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% % \end{macrocode} +% Save options in \cs{@gls@link@opts} and label in \cs{@gls@link@label} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@gls@link@opts{#1}% +\def\@gls@link@label{#2}% +% \end{macrocode} % Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in % \cs{@glo@text}) % \begin{macrocode} @@ -3037,17 +3746,26 @@ counter as its value}}{% {\glsentryfirst{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}% % \end{macrocode} % Call \cs{@gls@link} +% If \pkgopt{footnote} package option has been used, suppress +% hyperlink for first use. % \begin{macrocode} -\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% +\ifglsused{#2}{% + \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% +}{% + \ifglsacrfootnote + \@gls@link[#1,hyper=false]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% + \else + \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% + \fi +}% % \end{macrocode} -% Indicate that this entry has now been used, and add a space if -% appropriate +% Indicate that this entry has now been used % \begin{macrocode} \glsunset{#2}}% -\xspace} +} % \end{macrocode} % -% \cs{glspl} behaves in the same way as \icmdname{gls} except +% \cs{glspl} behaves in the same way as \ics{gls} except % it uses the plural form. %\begin{macro}{\glspl} % \begin{macrocode} @@ -3062,13 +3780,18 @@ counter as its value}}{% % a final optional argument % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\@glspl}[2][]{% -\@ifnextchar[{\@glspl@{#1}{#2}}{\@glspl@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\new@ifnextchar[{\@glspl@{#1}{#2}}{\@glspl@{#1}{#2}[]}} % \end{macrocode} % Read in the final optional argument: % \begin{macrocode} \def\@glspl@#1#2[#3]{% \glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% % \end{macrocode} +% Save options in \cs{@gls@link@opts} and label in \cs{@gls@link@label} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@gls@link@opts{#1}% +\def\@gls@link@label{#2}% +% \end{macrocode} % Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in % \cs{@glo@text}) % \begin{macrocode} @@ -3080,19 +3803,28 @@ counter as its value}}{% {\glsentryfirstplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}% % \end{macrocode} % Call \cs{@gls@link} +% If \pkgopt{footnote} package option has been used, suppress +% hyperlink for first use. % \begin{macrocode} -\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}% +\ifglsused{#2}{% + \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}% +}{% + \ifglsacrfootnote + \@gls@link[#1,hyper=false]{#2}{\@glo@text}% + \else + \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}% + \fi +}% % \end{macrocode} -% Indicate that this entry has now been used, and add a space if -% appropriate +% Indicate that this entry has now been used % \begin{macrocode} \glsunset{#2}}% -\xspace} +} % \end{macrocode} % -% \cs{Glspl} behaves in the same way as \icmdname{glspl}, except +% \cs{Glspl} behaves in the same way as \ics{glspl}, except % that the first letter of the link text is converted to uppercase -% (as with \icmdname{Gls}, if the first letter has an accent, it +% (as with \ics{Gls}, if the first letter has an accent, it % will need to be grouped.) %\begin{macro}{\Glspl} % \begin{macrocode} @@ -3107,13 +3839,18 @@ counter as its value}}{% % a final optional argument % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\@Glspl}[2][]{% -\@ifnextchar[{\@Glspl@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glspl@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glspl@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glspl@{#1}{#2}[]}} % \end{macrocode} % Read in the final optional argument: % \begin{macrocode} \def\@Glspl@#1#2[#3]{% \glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% % \end{macrocode} +% Save options in \cs{@gls@link@opts} and label in \cs{@gls@link@label} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@gls@link@opts{#1}% +\def\@gls@link@label{#2}% +% \end{macrocode} % Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in % \cs{@glo@text}) % \begin{macrocode} @@ -3125,17 +3862,26 @@ counter as its value}}{% {\glsentryfirstplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}% % \end{macrocode} % Call \cs{@gls@link} +% If \pkgopt{footnote} package option has been used, suppress +% hyperlink for first use. % \begin{macrocode} -\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% +\ifglsused{#2}{% + \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% +}{% + \ifglsacrfootnote + \@gls@link[#1,hyper=false]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% + \else + \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% + \fi +}% % \end{macrocode} -% Indicate that this entry has now been used, and add a space if -% appropriate +% Indicate that this entry has now been used % \begin{macrocode} \glsunset{#2}}% -\xspace} +} % \end{macrocode} % -% \cs{GLSpl} behaves like \icmdname{glspl} except that all the +% \cs{GLSpl} behaves like \ics{glspl} except that all the % link text is converted to uppercase. %\begin{macro}{\GLSpl} % \begin{macrocode} @@ -3150,13 +3896,18 @@ counter as its value}}{% % a final optional argument % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\@GLSpl}[2][]{% -\@ifnextchar[{\@GLSpl@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSpl@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSpl@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSpl@{#1}{#2}[]}} % \end{macrocode} % Read in the final optional argument: % \begin{macrocode} \def\@GLSpl@#1#2[#3]{% \glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% % \end{macrocode} +% Save options in \cs{@gls@link@opts} and label in \cs{@gls@link@label} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@gls@link@opts{#1}% +\def\@gls@link@label{#2}% +% \end{macrocode} % Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in % \cs{@glo@text}) % \begin{macrocode} @@ -3168,14 +3919,786 @@ counter as its value}}{% {\glsentryfirstplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}% % \end{macrocode} % Call \cs{@gls@link} +% If \pkgopt{footnote} package option has been used, suppress +% hyperlink for first use. % \begin{macrocode} -\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% +\ifglsused{#2}{% + \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% +}{% + \ifglsacrfootnote + \@gls@link[#1,hyper=false]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% + \else + \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% + \fi +}% % \end{macrocode} -% Indicate that this entry has now been used, and add a space if -% appropriate +% Indicate that this entry has now been used % \begin{macrocode} \glsunset{#2}}% -\xspace} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \cs{glstext} behaves like \ics{gls} except it always uses the value +% given by the \gloskey{text} key and it doesn't mark the entry as +% used. +%\begin{macro}{\glstext} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\glstext}{\@ifstar\@sglstext\@glstext} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% Define the starred form: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@sglstext}[1][]{\@glstext[hyper=false,#1]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is +% a final optional argument +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@glstext}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}}{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Read in the final optional argument: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@glstext@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in +% \cs{@glo@text}) +% \begin{macrocode} +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentrytext{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Call \cs{@gls@link} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}% +}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \cs{GLStext} behaves like \cs{glstext} except the text is converted +% to uppercase. +%\begin{macro}{\GLStext} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\GLStext}{\@ifstar\@sGLStext\@GLStext} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% Define the starred form: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@sGLStext}[1][]{\@GLStext[hyper=false,#1]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is +% a final optional argument +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@GLStext}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLStext@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLStext@{#1}{#2}[]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Read in the final optional argument: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@GLStext@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in +% \cs{@glo@text}) +% \begin{macrocode} +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentrytext{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Call \cs{@gls@link} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% +}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \cs{Glstext} behaves like \cs{glstext} except that the first letter +% of the text is converted to uppercase. +%\begin{macro}{\Glstext} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\Glstext}{\@ifstar\@sGlstext\@Glstext} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% Define the starred form: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@sGlstext}[1][]{\@Glstext[hyper=false,#1]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is +% a final optional argument +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@Glstext}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glstext@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glstext@{#1}{#2}[]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Read in the final optional argument: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@Glstext@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in +% \cs{@glo@text}) +% \begin{macrocode} +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentrytext{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Call \cs{@gls@link} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% +}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \cs{glsfirst} behaves like \ics{gls} except it always uses the value +% given by the \gloskey{first} key and it doesn't mark the entry as +% used. +%\begin{macro}{\glsfirst} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\glsfirst}{\@ifstar\@sglsfirst\@glsfirst} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% Define the starred form: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@sglsfirst}[1][]{\@glsfirst[hyper=false,#1]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is +% a final optional argument +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@glsfirst}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@glsfirst@{#1}{#2}}{\@glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Read in the final optional argument: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@glsfirst@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in +% \cs{@glo@text}) +% \begin{macrocode} +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentryfirst{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Call \cs{@gls@link} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}% +}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \cs{Glsfirst} behaves like \ics{glsfirst} except it displays the +% first letter in uppercase. +%\begin{macro}{\Glsfirst} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\Glsfirst}{\@ifstar\@sGlsfirst\@Glsfirst} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% Define the starred form: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@sGlsfirst}[1][]{\@Glsfirst[hyper=false,#1]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is +% a final optional argument +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@Glsfirst}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glsfirst@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Read in the final optional argument: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@Glsfirst@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in +% \cs{@glo@text}) +% \begin{macrocode} +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentryfirst{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Call \cs{@gls@link} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% +}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \cs{GLSfirst} behaves like \ics{Glsfirst} except it displays the +% text in uppercase. +%\begin{macro}{\GLSfirst} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\GLSfirst}{\@ifstar\@sGLSfirst\@GLSfirst} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% Define the starred form: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@sGLSfirst}[1][]{\@GLSfirst[hyper=false,#1]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is +% a final optional argument +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@GLSfirst}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSfirst@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSfirst@{#1}{#2}[]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Read in the final optional argument: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@GLSfirst@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in +% \cs{@glo@text}) +% \begin{macrocode} +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentryfirst{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Call \cs{@gls@link} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% +}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \cs{glsplural} behaves like \ics{gls} except it always uses the value +% given by the \gloskey{plural} key and it doesn't mark the entry as +% used. +%\begin{macro}{\glsplural} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\glsplural}{\@ifstar\@sglsplural\@glsplural} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% Define the starred form: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@sglsplural}[1][]{\@glsplural[hyper=false,#1]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is +% a final optional argument +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@glsplural}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@glsplural@{#1}{#2}}{\@glsplural@{#1}{#2}[]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Read in the final optional argument: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@glsplural@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in +% \cs{@glo@text}) +% \begin{macrocode} +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentryplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Call \cs{@gls@link} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}% +}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \cs{Glsplural} behaves like \ics{glsplural} except that the first +% letter is converted to uppercase. +%\begin{macro}{\Glsplural} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\Glsplural}{\@ifstar\@sGlsplural\@Glsplural} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% Define the starred form: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@sGlsplural}[1][]{\@Glsplural[hyper=false,#1]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is +% a final optional argument +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@Glsplural}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glsplural@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glsplural@{#1}{#2}[]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Read in the final optional argument: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@Glsplural@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in +% \cs{@glo@text}) +% \begin{macrocode} +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentryplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Call \cs{@gls@link} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% +}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \cs{GLSplural} behaves like \ics{glsplural} except that the +% text is converted to uppercase. +%\begin{macro}{\GLSplural} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\GLSplural}{\@ifstar\@sGLSplural\@GLSplural} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% Define the starred form: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@sGLSplural}[1][]{\@GLSplural[hyper=false,#1]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is +% a final optional argument +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@GLSplural}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSplural@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSplural@{#1}{#2}[]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Read in the final optional argument: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@GLSplural@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in +% \cs{@glo@text}) +% \begin{macrocode} +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentryplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Call \cs{@gls@link} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% +}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \cs{glsfirstplural} behaves like \ics{gls} except it always uses the value +% given by the \gloskey{firstplural} key and it doesn't mark the entry as +% used. +%\begin{macro}{\glsfirstplural} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\glsfirstplural}{\@ifstar\@sglsfirstplural\@glsfirstplural} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% Define the starred form: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@sglsfirstplural}[1][]{\@glsfirstplural[hyper=false,#1]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is +% a final optional argument +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@glsfirstplural}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@glsfirstplural@{#1}{#2}}{\@glsfirstplural@{#1}{#2}[]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Read in the final optional argument: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@glsfirstplural@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in +% \cs{@glo@text}) +% \begin{macrocode} +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentryfirstplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Call \cs{@gls@link} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}% +}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \cs{Glsfirstplural} behaves like \ics{glsfirstplural} except that the +% first letter is converted to uppercase. +%\begin{macro}{\Glsfirstplural} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\Glsfirstplural}{\@ifstar\@sGlsfirstplural\@Glsfirstplural} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% Define the starred form: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@sGlsfirstplural}[1][]{\@Glsfirstplural[hyper=false,#1]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is +% a final optional argument +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@Glsfirstplural}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glsfirstplural@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glsfirstplural@{#1}{#2}[]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Read in the final optional argument: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@Glsfirstplural@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in +% \cs{@glo@text}) +% \begin{macrocode} +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentryfirstplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Call \cs{@gls@link} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% +}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \cs{GLSfirstplural} behaves like \ics{glsfirstplural} except that the +% link text is converted to uppercase. +%\begin{macro}{\GLSfirstplural} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\GLSfirstplural}{\@ifstar\@sGLSfirstplural\@GLSfirstplural} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% Define the starred form: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@sGLSfirstplural}[1][]{\@GLSfirstplural[hyper=false,#1]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is +% a final optional argument +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@GLSfirstplural}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSfirstplural@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSfirstplural@{#1}{#2}[]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Read in the final optional argument: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@GLSfirstplural@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in +% \cs{@glo@text}) +% \begin{macrocode} +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentryfirstplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Call \cs{@gls@link} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% +}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \cs{glsname} behaves like \ics{gls} except it always uses the value +% given by the \gloskey{name} key and it doesn't mark the entry as +% used. +%\begin{macro}{\glsname} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\glsname}{\@ifstar\@sglsname\@glsname} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% Define the starred form: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@sglsname}[1][]{\@glsname[hyper=false,#1]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is +% a final optional argument +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@glsname}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@glsname@{#1}{#2}}{\@glsname@{#1}{#2}[]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Read in the final optional argument: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@glsname@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in +% \cs{@glo@text}) +% \begin{macrocode} +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentryname{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Call \cs{@gls@link} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}% +}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \cs{Glsname} behaves like \ics{glsname} except that the +% first letter is converted to uppercase. +%\begin{macro}{\Glsname} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\Glsname}{\@ifstar\@sGlsname\@Glsname} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% Define the starred form: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@sGlsname}[1][]{\@Glsname[hyper=false,#1]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is +% a final optional argument +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@Glsname}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glsname@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glsname@{#1}{#2}[]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Read in the final optional argument: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@Glsname@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in +% \cs{@glo@text}) +% \begin{macrocode} +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentryname{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Call \cs{@gls@link} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% +}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \cs{GLSname} behaves like \ics{glsname} except that the +% link text is converted to uppercase. +%\begin{macro}{\GLSname} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\GLSname}{\@ifstar\@sGLSname\@GLSname} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% Define the starred form: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@sGLSname}[1][]{\@GLSname[hyper=false,#1]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is +% a final optional argument +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@GLSname}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSname@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSname@{#1}{#2}[]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Read in the final optional argument: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@GLSname@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in +% \cs{@glo@text}) +% \begin{macrocode} +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentryname{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Call \cs{@gls@link} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% +}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \cs{glsdesc} behaves like \ics{gls} except it always uses the value +% given by the \gloskey{description} key and it doesn't mark the entry +% as used. +%\begin{macro}{\glsdesc} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\glsdesc}{\@ifstar\@sglsdesc\@glsdesc} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% Define the starred form: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@sglsdesc}[1][]{\@glsdesc[hyper=false,#1]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is +% a final optional argument +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@glsdesc}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@glsdesc@{#1}{#2}}{\@glsdesc@{#1}{#2}[]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Read in the final optional argument: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@glsdesc@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in +% \cs{@glo@text}) +% \begin{macrocode} +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Call \cs{@gls@link} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}% +}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \cs{Glsdesc} behaves like \ics{glsdesc} except that the +% first letter is converted to uppercase. +%\begin{macro}{\Glsdesc} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\Glsdesc}{\@ifstar\@sGlsdesc\@Glsdesc} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% Define the starred form: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@sGlsdesc}[1][]{\@Glsdesc[hyper=false,#1]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is +% a final optional argument +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@Glsdesc}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glsdesc@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glsdesc@{#1}{#2}[]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Read in the final optional argument: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@Glsdesc@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in +% \cs{@glo@text}) +% \begin{macrocode} +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Call \cs{@gls@link} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% +}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \cs{GLSdesc} behaves like \ics{glsdesc} except that the +% link text is converted to uppercase. +%\begin{macro}{\GLSdesc} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\GLSdesc}{\@ifstar\@sGLSdesc\@GLSdesc} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% Define the starred form: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@sGLSdesc}[1][]{\@GLSdesc[hyper=false,#1]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is +% a final optional argument +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@GLSdesc}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSdesc@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSdesc@{#1}{#2}[]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Read in the final optional argument: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@GLSdesc@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in +% \cs{@glo@text}) +% \begin{macrocode} +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Call \cs{@gls@link} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% +}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \cs{glssymbol} behaves like \ics{gls} except it always uses the value +% given by the \gloskey{symbol} key and it doesn't mark the entry as +% used. +%\begin{macro}{\glssymbol} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\glssymbol}{\@ifstar\@sglssymbol\@glssymbol} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% Define the starred form: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@sglssymbol}[1][]{\@glssymbol[hyper=false,#1]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is +% a final optional argument +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@glssymbol}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@glssymbol@{#1}{#2}}{\@glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Read in the final optional argument: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@glssymbol@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in +% \cs{@glo@text}) +% \begin{macrocode} +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Call \cs{@gls@link} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}% +}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \cs{Glssymbol} behaves like \ics{glssymbol} except that the +% first letter is converted to uppercase. +%\begin{macro}{\Glssymbol} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\Glssymbol}{\@ifstar\@sGlssymbol\@Glssymbol} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% Define the starred form: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@sGlssymbol}[1][]{\@Glssymbol[hyper=false,#1]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is +% a final optional argument +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@Glssymbol}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glssymbol@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Read in the final optional argument: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@Glssymbol@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in +% \cs{@glo@text}) +% \begin{macrocode} +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Call \cs{@gls@link} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% +}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \cs{GLSsymbol} behaves like \ics{glssymbol} except that the +% link text is converted to uppercase. +%\begin{macro}{\GLSsymbol} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\GLSsymbol}{\@ifstar\@sGLSsymbol\@GLSsymbol} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% Define the starred form: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@sGLSsymbol}[1][]{\@GLSsymbol[hyper=false,#1]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is +% a final optional argument +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@GLSsymbol}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSsymbol@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSsymbol@{#1}{#2}[]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Read in the final optional argument: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@GLSsymbol@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in +% \cs{@glo@text}) +% \begin{macrocode} +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Call \cs{@gls@link} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% +}% +} % \end{macrocode} % % \subsubsection{Displaying entry details without adding @@ -3376,10 +4899,10 @@ counter as its value}}{% % %\subsection{Creating associated files} % The \cs{writeist} command creates the associated -% customized \filetype{ist} \appname{makeindex} style file. +% customized \filetype{.ist} \appname{makeindex} style file. % While defining this command, some characters have their % catcodes temporarily changed to ensure they get written to -% the \filetype{ist} file correctly. The \appname{makeindex} +% the \filetype{.ist} file correctly. The \appname{makeindex} % actual character (usually "@") is redefined to be a "?", to allow % internal commands to be written to the glossary file output file. % @@ -3392,14 +4915,14 @@ counter as its value}}{% % needs to worry about \appname{makeindex} special characters.) % % The symbols and numbers label for group headings are hardwired into -% the \filetype{ist} file as \texttt{glssymbols} and +% the \filetype{.ist} file as \texttt{glssymbols} and % \texttt{glsnumbers}, the group titles can be translated -% (so that \icmdname{glssymbolsgroupname} replaces \texttt{glssymbols} -% and \icmdname{glsnumbersgroupname} replaces \texttt{glsnumbers}) -% using the command \icmdname{glsgetgrouptitle} which is -% defined in \styname{glossary-hypernav}. This is done to prevent -% any problem characters in \icmdname{glssymbolsgroupname} -% and \icmdname{glsnumbersgroupname} from breaking hyperlinks. +% (so that \ics{glssymbolsgroupname} replaces \texttt{glssymbols} +% and \ics{glsnumbersgroupname} replaces \texttt{glsnumbers}) +% using the command \ics{glsgetgrouptitle} which is +% defined in \isty{glossary-hypernav}. This is done to prevent +% any problem characters in \ics{glssymbolsgroupname} +% and \ics{glsnumbersgroupname} from breaking hyperlinks. % % Some of these lines are too long to fit on the page, but as I % have temporarily disabled the comment character, I can't split @@ -3449,10 +4972,10 @@ counter as its value}}{% %\end{macro} % %The command \cs{noist} will suppress the creation of -% the \filetype{ist} file (it simply redefines +% the \filetype{.ist} file (it simply redefines % \cs{writeist} to do nothing.) Obviously you need to use this % command before \cs{writeist} to have any effect. Since -% the \filetype{ist} file should only be created once, \cs{noist} +% the \filetype{.ist} file should only be created once, \cs{noist} % is called at the end of \cs{writeist}. %\begin{macro}{\noist} % \begin{macrocode} @@ -3464,9 +4987,9 @@ counter as its value}}{% % argument indicating the glossary type. This command will % create the glossary file required by \appname{makeindex} for the % given glossary type, using the extension supplied by the -% \meta{out-ext} parameter used in \icmdname{newglossary} -% (and it will also activate the \icmdname{glossary} command, -% and create the customized \filetype{ist} \appname{makeindex} +% \meta{out-ext} parameter used in \ics{newglossary} +% (and it will also activate the \ics{glossary} command, +% and create the customized \filetype{.ist} \appname{makeindex} % style file.) % % Note that you can't use \cs{@makeglossary} for only some of the @@ -3611,13 +5134,13 @@ to move \string\makeglossaries\space after all your % \end{macrocode} %\end{macro} % The keys that can be used in the optional argument to -% \icmdname{printglossary} are as follows: +% \ics{printglossary} are as follows: % The \gloskey[printglossary]{type} key sets the glossary type. % \begin{macrocode} \define@key{printgloss}{type}{\def\@glo@type{#1}} % \end{macrocode} % The \gloskey[printglossary]{title} key sets the title used in the glossary section -% header. This overrides the title used in \icmdname{newglossary}. +% header. This overrides the title used in \ics{newglossary}. % \begin{macrocode} \define@key{printgloss}{title}{\def\glossarytitle{#1}} % \end{macrocode} @@ -3715,8 +5238,8 @@ style `#1' undefined}{}}{% % This command produces the title for the glossary group % whose label is given by \meta{label}. By default, the group % labelled \texttt{glssymbols} produces -% \icmdname{glssymbolsgroupname}, the group labelled -% \texttt{glsnumbers} produces \icmdname{glsnumbersgroupname} +% \ics{glssymbolsgroupname}, the group labelled +% \texttt{glsnumbers} produces \ics{glsnumbersgroupname} % and all the other groups simply produce their label. % As mentioned above, the group labels are: \texttt{glssymbols}, \texttt{glsnumbers}, % \texttt{A}, \ldots, \texttt{Z}\@. If you want to redefine @@ -3743,9 +5266,9 @@ style `#1' undefined}{}}{% % % The command \cs{setentrycounter} sets the entry's % associated counter (required by -% \cs{glshypernumber} etc.) \icmdname{glslink} and -% \icmdname{glsadd} encode the -% \icmdname{glossary} argument so that the relevant counter is +% \cs{glshypernumber} etc.) \ics{glslink} and +% \ics{glsadd} encode the +% \ics{glossary} argument so that the relevant counter is % set prior to the formatting command. %\begin{macro}{\setentrycounter} % \begin{macrocode} @@ -3767,12 +5290,12 @@ style `#1' undefined}{}}{% % New glossary styles can be defined using:\\[10pt] % \cs{newglossarystyle}\marg{name}\marg{definition}\\[10pt] % The \meta{definition} argument should redefine -% \envname{theglossary}, \icmdname{glossaryheader}, -% \icmdname{glsgroupheading}, \icmdname{glossaryentryfield} and -% \icmdname{glsgroupskip} (see \autoref{sec:styles} for the +% \envname{theglossary}, \ics{glossaryheader}, +% \ics{glsgroupheading}, \ics{glossaryentryfield} and +% \ics{glsgroupskip} (see \autoref{sec:code:styles} for the % definitions of predefined styles.) Glossary styles should not -% redefine \icmdname{glossarypreamble} and -% \icmdname{glossarypostamble}, as +% redefine \ics{glossarypreamble} and +% \ics{glossarypostamble}, as % the user should be able to switch between styles without affecting % the pre- and postambles. %\begin{macro}{\newglossarystyle} @@ -3785,13 +5308,13 @@ style `#1' undefined}{}}{% %\end{macro} % % Glossary entries are encoded so that the second argument -% to \icmdname{glossaryentryfield} is always specified as +% to \ics{glossaryentryfield} is always specified as % \cs{glsnamefont}\marg{name}. This allows the % user to change the font used to display the name term -% without having to redefine \icmdname{glossaryentryfield}. +% without having to redefine \ics{glossaryentryfield}. % The default uses the surrounding font, so in the list type % styles (which place the name in the optional argument to -% \icmdname{item}) the name will appear in bold. +% \ics{item}) the name will appear in bold. %\begin{macro}{\glsnamefont} % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\glsnamefont}[1]{#1} @@ -3801,22 +5324,22 @@ style `#1' undefined}{}}{% % Each glossary entry has an associated number list (usually page % numbers) that indicate where in the document the entry has been % used. The format for these number lists can be changed using the -% \gloskey[glslink]{format}\igloskey[glsadd]{format} key in commands like \icmdname{glslink}. +% \gloskey[glslink]{format}\igloskey[glsadd]{format} key in commands like \ics{glslink}. % The default format is given by \cs{glshypernumber}. This takes % a single argument which may be a single number, a number range % or a number list. The number ranges are delimited with -% \icmdname{delimR}, the number lists are delimited with -% \icmdname{delimN}. +% \ics{delimR}, the number lists are delimited with +% \ics{delimN}. % % If the document doesn't have hyperlinks, the numbers can be % displayed just as they are, but if the document supports % hyperlinks, the numbers should link to the relevant location. % This means extracting the individual numbers from the list or -% ranges. The \styname{hyperref} package does this with the -% \icmdname{hyperpage} command, but this is encoded for comma and +% ranges. The \isty{hyperref} package does this with the +% \ics{hyperpage} command, but this is encoded for comma and % dash delimiters and only for the page counter, but this code needs % to be more general. So I have adapted the code used in the -% \styname{hyperref} package. +% \isty{hyperref} package. %\begin{macro}{\glshypernumber} % \begin{macrocode} \@ifundefined{hyperlink}{% @@ -3942,31 +5465,32 @@ style `#1' undefined}{}}{% % new glossary called "acronym" is created % \begin{macrocode} \ifglsacronym -\newglossary[alg]{acronym}{acr}{acn}{\acronymname} + \newglossary[alg]{acronym}{acr}{acn}{\acronymname} % \end{macrocode} -%and \icmdname{acronymtype} is set to the name of this new glossary. +%and \ics{acronymtype} is set to the name of this new glossary. % \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand{\acronymtype}{acronym} + \renewcommand{\acronymtype}{acronym} % \end{macrocode} -% In the event that the user redefines \icmdname{glsdisplay} -% and \icmdname{glsdisplayfirst}, the relevant commands for +% In the event that the user redefines \ics{glsdisplay} +% and \ics{glsdisplayfirst}, the relevant commands for % the new acronym glossary are set to match the format -% given by \icmdname{newacronym}. If you redefine -% \icmdname{newacronym} you may need to set these to something +% given by \ics{newacronym}. If you redefine +% \ics{newacronym} you may need to set these to something % else. % \begin{macrocode} -\defglsdisplay[acronym]{#1#4}\defglsdisplayfirst[acronym]{#1#4} + \defglsdisplay[acronym]{#1#4} + \defglsdisplayfirst[acronym]{#1#4} \fi % \end{macrocode} %\vskip5pt % \cs{newacronym}\oarg{key-val list}\marg{label}\marg{abbrev}\marg{long}\\[10pt] % This is a quick way of defining acronyms, all it does -% is call \icmdname{newglossaryentry} with the appropriate +% is call \ics{newglossaryentry} with the appropriate % values. It sets the -% glossary type to \icmdname{acronymtype} which will be +% glossary type to \ics{acronymtype} which will be % "acronym" if the package option \pkgopt{acronym} has % been used, otherwise it will be the default glossary. -% Since \cs{newacronym} merely calls \icmdname{newglossaryentry}, +% Since \cs{newacronym} merely calls \ics{newglossaryentry}, % the acronym is treated like any other glossary entry. % % If you prefer a different format, you @@ -3984,9 +5508,391 @@ first={#4 (#3)},plural={#3s},firstplural={#4s (#3s)},#1}} % \begin{macrocode} \@onlypreamble{\newacronym} % \end{macrocode} +% Set up some convenient short cuts. These need to be changed if +% \cs{newacronym} is changed (or if the \gloskey{description} key +% is changed). +% +% Using the default definitions, \ics{acrshort} is the same as +% \ics{glstext}, which means that it will print the abbreviation. +%\begin{macro}{\acrshort} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\acrshort}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@acrshort{#1}{#2}}{\@acrshort{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@acrshort#1#2[#3]{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +%\begin{macro}{\Acrshort} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\Acrshort}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@Acrshort{#1}{#2}}{\@Acrshort{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@Acrshort#1#2[#3]{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +%\begin{macro}{\ACRshort} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\ACRshort}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@ACRshort{#1}{#2}}{\@ACRshort{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@ACRshort#1#2[#3]{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% \ics{acrlong} is set to \ics{glsdesc}, so it will print the long +% form, unless the description key has been set to something else. +%\begin{macro}{\acrlong} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\acrlong}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@acrlong{#1}{#2}}{\@acrlong{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@glsdesc@{#1}{#2}[#3]} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +%\begin{macro}{\Acrlong} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\Acrlong}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@Acrlong{#1}{#2}}{\@Acrlong{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@Acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@glsdesc@{#1}{#2}[#3]} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +%\begin{macro}{\ACRlong} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\ACRlong}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@ACRlong{#1}{#2}}{\@ACRlong{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@ACRlong#1#2[#3]{\@glsdesc@{#1}{#2}[#3]} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% +% \ics{acrfull} is set to \ics{glsfirst}, so it should display the +% full form. +%\begin{macro}{\acrfull} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\acrfull}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@acrfull{#1}{#2}}{\@acrfull{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3]} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +%\begin{macro}{\Acrfull} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\Acrfull}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@Acrfull{#1}{#2}}{\@Acrfull{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@Acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@Glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3]} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +%\begin{macro}{\ACRfull} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\ACRfull}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@ACRfull{#1}{#2}}{\@ACRfull{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@ACRfull#1#2[#3]{\@GLSfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3]} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% +%\subsection{Additional predefined acronym styles} +%\begin{macro}{\acronymfont} +%This is only used with the additional acronym styles: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\acronymfont}[1]{#1} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifglsacrdescription +% \end{macrocode} +% +% If a description and footnote are both required, store the long form +% in the \gloskey{symbol} key. Store the short form in \gloskey{text} +% key. +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifglsacrfootnote + \renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{% + \newglossaryentry{#2}{type=\acronymtype,% + name={#3},% + symbol={#4},% + #1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Set up short cuts. Short form: +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\@acrshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} + \def\@Acrshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@Glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} + \def\@ACRshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@GLStext@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Long form: +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\@acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@Acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@Glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@ACRlong#1#2[#3]{\@GLSsymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Full form: +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\@acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} + \def\@Acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@Glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} + \def\@ACRfull#1#2[#3]{\@GLSsymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@GLStext@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% If \pkgopt{footnote} package option is specified, set the first +% use to append the long form (stored in \gloskey{symbol}) as a +% footnote. +% \begin{macrocode} + \defglsdisplayfirst[\acronymtype]{% + \acronymfont{#1}#4\noexpand\footnote{% + \noexpand\glslink[\@gls@link@opts]{\@gls@link@label}{#3}}}% + \defglsdisplay[\acronymtype]{\acronymfont{#1}#4}% + \ifglsacrsmallcaps + \renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{\textsc{#1}} + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% Check for package option clash +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifglsacrdua + \PackageError{glossaries}{Option clash: `footnote' and `dua' + can't both be set}{}% + \fi + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% Footnote not required. Should the acronym always be expanded? +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifglsacrdua + \ifglsacrsmallcaps + \PackageError{glossaries}{Option clash: `smallcaps' and `dua' + can't both be set}{}% + \fi + \renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{% + \newglossaryentry{#2}{type=\acronymtype,% + name={#4},% + first={#4},% + symbol={#3},% + #1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Set up short cuts. Short form: +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\@acrshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} + \def\@Acrshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@Glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} + \def\@ACRshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@GLSsymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Long form: +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\@acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@Acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@Glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@ACRlong#1#2[#3]{\@GLSfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Full form: +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\@acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} + \def\@Acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@Glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} + \def\@ACRfull#1#2[#3]{\@GLSfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@GLSsymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} +% \end{macrocode} +% Set display. +% \begin{macrocode} + \defglsdisplayfirst[\acronymtype]{#1#4} + \defglsdisplay[\acronymtype]{#1#4} + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% Store long form in \gloskey{first} key +% and short form in \gloskey{text} and \gloskey{symbol} key. +% \begin{macrocode} + \renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{% + \newglossaryentry{#2}{type=\acronymtype,% + name={#3},% + first={#4},% + symbol={#3},% + #1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Set up short cuts. Short form: +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\@acrshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} + \def\@Acrshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@Glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} + \def\@ACRshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@GLStext@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Long form: +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\@acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@Acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@Glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@ACRlong#1#2[#3]{\@GLSfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Full form: +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\@acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} + \def\@Acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@Glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} + \def\@ACRfull#1#2[#3]{\@GLSfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@GLSsymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} +% \end{macrocode} +% Set display. +% \begin{macrocode} + \defglsdisplayfirst[\acronymtype]{#1#4 (\acronymfont{#3})} + \defglsdisplay[\acronymtype]{\acronymfont{#1}#4} +% \end{macrocode} +% Set small caps and check for option clash +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifglsacrsmallcaps + \renewcommand{\acronymfont}[1]{\textsc{#1}} + \fi + \fi + \fi +\else +% \end{macrocode} +% If here, acronyms do not require additional description. +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifglsacrfootnote +% \end{macrocode} +% +% If \pkgopt{footnote} package option is specified, set the first +% use to append the long form (stored in \gloskey{description}) as a +% footnote. +% Use the \gloskey{description} key to store the long form. +% \begin{macrocode} + \renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{% + \newglossaryentry{#2}{type=\acronymtype,% + name={#3},% + description={#4},% + #1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Set display +% \begin{macrocode} + \defglsdisplayfirst[\acronymtype]{% + \acronymfont{#1}#4\noexpand\footnote{% + \noexpand\glslink[\@gls@link@opts]{\@gls@link@label}{#2}}}% + \defglsdisplay[\acronymtype]{\acronymfont{#1}#4}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Set up short cuts. Short form: +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\@acrshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} + \def\@Acrshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@Glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} + \def\@ACRshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@GLStext@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Long form: +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\@acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@glsdesc@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@Acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@Glsdesc@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@ACRlong#1#2[#3]{\@GLSdesc@{#1}{#2}[#3]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Full form: +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\@acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@glsdesc@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3])} + \def\@Acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@Glsdesc@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3])} + \def\@ACRfull#1#2[#3]{\@GLSdesc@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\@GLStext@{#1}{#2}[#3])} +% \end{macrocode} +% Redefine \ics{acronymfont} is small caps required +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifglsacrsmallcaps + \renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{\textsc{#1}}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% Check for option clash +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifglsacrdua + \PackageError{glossaries}{Option clash: `footnote' and `dua' + can't both be set}{}% + \fi + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% No footnotes required. +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifglsacrsmallcaps +% \end{macrocode} % -% \subsection{Predefined Styles}\label{sec:styles} -% The \styname{glossaries} bundle comes with some predefined glossary styles which +% Neither footnote nor description required. +% Use the \gloskey{symbol} key to store the short form and +% \gloskey{first} to store the description. +% Note that this way makes the first use plural form +% appear as \dq{\meta{long}s (\meta{short})} instead of +% \dq{\meta{long}s (\meta{short}s)}. +% \begin{macrocode} + \renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{% + \newglossaryentry{#2}{type=\acronymtype,% + name={#3},% + first={#4},% + description={#4},% + symbol={#3},% + #1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Change the display since \gloskey{first} only contains long form. +% \begin{macrocode} + \defglsdisplayfirst[\acronymtype]{#1#4 (\acronymfont{#3})} + \defglsdisplay[\acronymtype]{\acronymfont{#1}#4} +% \end{macrocode} +% Change \ics{acronymfont} to small caps: +% \begin{macrocode} + \renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{\textsc{#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Set up short cuts. Short form: +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\@acrshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} + \def\@Acrshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@Glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} + \def\@ACRshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@GLStext@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Long form: +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\@acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@Acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@Glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@ACRlong#1#2[#3]{\@GLSfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Full form: +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\@acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} + \def\@Acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@Glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} + \def\@ACRfull#1#2[#3]{\@GLSfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@GLStext@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} +% \end{macrocode} +% check for option clash +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifglsacrdua + \PackageError{glossaries}{Option clash: `smallcaps' and `dua' + can't both be set}{}% + \fi + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% Should acronyms always be expanded? +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifglsacrdua + \renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{% + \newglossaryentry{#2}{type=\acronymtype,% + name={#3},% + description={#4},% + text={#4},% + symbol={#3},% + #1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Set the display +% \begin{macrocode} + \defglsdisplayfirst[\acronymtype]{#1#4} + \defglsdisplay[\acronymtype]{#1#4} +% \end{macrocode} +% Set up short cuts. Short form: +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\@acrshort#1#2[#3]{\@glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@Acrshort#1#2[#3]{\@Glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@ACRshort#1#2[#3]{\@GLSsymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Long form: +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\@acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@Acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@Glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@ACRlong#1#2[#3]{\@GLStext@{#1}{#2}[#3]} +% \end{macrocode} +% Full form: +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\@acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} + \def\@Acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@Glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} + \def\@ACRfull#1#2[#3]{\@GLStext@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@GLSsymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} + \fi + \fi + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Predefined Glossary Styles}\label{sec:code:styles} +% The \sty{glossaries} bundle comes with some predefined glossary styles which % are defined in the following packages: % \begin{macrocode} \RequirePackage{glossary-hypernav} @@ -3995,7 +5901,7 @@ first={#4 (#3)},plural={#3s},firstplural={#4s (#3s)},#1}} \RequirePackage{glossary-super} % \end{macrocode} % The default glossary style is set according to the \pkgopt{style} package -% option, but can be overridden by \icmdname{glossarystyle}. +% option, but can be overridden by \ics{glossarystyle}. % \begin{macrocode} \glossarystyle{\@glossary@default@style} % \end{macrocode} @@ -4018,7 +5924,7 @@ first={#4 (#3)},plural={#3s},firstplural={#4s (#3s)},#1}} % The commands defined in this package are provided to % help navigate around the groups within a glossary % (see \autoref{sec:printglos}.) -% \icmdname{printglossary} (and \icmdname{printglossaries}) +% \ics{printglossary} (and \ics{printglossaries}) % set \cs{@glo@type} to the label of the current % glossary. This is used to create a unique hypertarget in % the event of multiple glossaries. @@ -4114,20 +6020,20 @@ first={#4 (#3)},plural={#3s},firstplural={#4s (#3s)},#1}} % \end{macrocode} %\fi % \subsubsection{List Style (glossary-list package)} -% The \styname{glossary-list} package defines glossary styles +% The \isty{glossary-list} package defines glossary styles % that use the \envname{description} environment. Note that since % the entry name is placed in the optional argument to the -% \icmdname{item} command, it will appear in a bold font by +% \ics{item} command, it will appear in a bold font by % default. % \begin{macrocode} -\ProvidesPackage{glossary-list}[2007/10/04 v1.02 (NLCT)] +\ProvidesPackage{glossary-list}[2008/02/16 v1.03 (NLCT)] % \end{macrocode} % The \glostyle{list} glossary style % uses the \envname{description} environment. The group separator -% \icmdname{glsgroupskip} is redefined as \cs{indexspace} +% \ics{glsgroupskip} is redefined as \cs{indexspace} % which produces a gap between groups. The glossary heading % and the group headings do nothing. This is used as the default -% style for the \styname{glossaries} package. +% style for the \sty{glossaries} package. % \begin{macrocode} \newglossarystyle{list}{% \renewenvironment{theglossary}{\begin{description}}{\end{description}}% @@ -4184,6 +6090,25 @@ first={#4 (#3)},plural={#3s},firstplural={#4s (#3s)},#1}} \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{% \item[\glsnavhypertarget{##1}{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}]}} % \end{macrocode} +% The \glostyle{listdotted} glossary style was supplied by +% Axel~Menzel. I've modified it slightly so that the distance from +% the start of the name to the end of the dotted line is specified by +% \cs{glslistdottedwidth}. +%\begin{macro}{\glslistdottedwidth} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newlength\glslistdottedwidth +\setlength{\glslistdottedwidth}{.5\linewidth} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% Note that this style ignores the page numbers as well as the +% symbol. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newglossarystyle{listdotted}{% +\glossarystyle{list}% +\renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{% +\item[]\makebox[\glslistdottedwidth][l]{\@glstarget{glo:##1}{##2}% +\unskip\leaders\hbox to 2.9mm{\hss.}\hfill\strut}##3}} +% \end{macrocode} %\iffalse % \begin{macrocode} %</glossary-list.sty> @@ -4196,12 +6121,12 @@ first={#4 (#3)},plural={#3s},firstplural={#4s (#3s)},#1}} %\fi % \subsubsection{Glossary Styles using longtable (the glossary-long % package)} -% The glossary styles defined in the \styname{glossary-long} package +% The glossary styles defined in the \isty{glossary-long} package % used the \envname{longtable} environment in the glossary. % \begin{macrocode} \ProvidesPackage{glossary-long}[2007/07/04 v1.01 (NLCT)] % \end{macrocode} -% Requires the \styname{longtable} package: +% Requires the \isty{longtable} package: % \begin{macrocode} \RequirePackage{longtable} % \end{macrocode} @@ -4362,18 +6287,18 @@ first={#4 (#3)},plural={#3s},firstplural={#4s (#3s)},#1}} % \end{macrocode} %\fi % \subsubsection{Glossary Styles using supertabular environment (glossary-super package)} -% The glossary styles defined in the \styname{glossary-super} package +% The glossary styles defined in the \isty{glossary-super} package % use the \envname{supertabular} environment. % \begin{macrocode} \ProvidesPackage{glossary-super}[2007/07/04 v1.01 (NLCT)] % \end{macrocode} -% Requires the \styname{supertabular} package: +% Requires the \isty{supertabular} package: % \begin{macrocode} \RequirePackage{supertabular} % \end{macrocode} % The \glostyle{super} glossary style uses the % \envname{supertabular} environment -% (it uses lengths defined in the \styname{glossary-long} package.) +% (it uses lengths defined in the \isty{glossary-long} package.) % \begin{macrocode} \newglossarystyle{super}{% \renewenvironment{theglossary}{% @@ -4528,6 +6453,1525 @@ first={#4 (#3)},plural={#3s},firstplural={#4s (#3s)},#1}} %\fi %\iffalse % \begin{macrocode} +%<*glossaries-babel.sty> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\subsection{Multi-Lingual Support} +%\subsubsection{Babel Captions} +% Define \isty{babel} captions if multi-lingual +% support is required, but the \isty{translator} package is not loaded. +% \begin{macrocode} +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} +\ProvidesPackage{glossaries-babel}[2008/02/22 v1.0 (NLCT)] +% \end{macrocode} +% English: +% \begin{macrocode} +\addto\captionsenglish{% +\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossary}% +\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acronyms}% +\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Notation}% +\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Description}% +\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}% +\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Page List}% +\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbols}% +\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Numbers}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% German (quite a few variations were suggested for German; +% I settled on the following): +% \begin{macrocode} +\addto\captionsgerman{% +\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossar}% +\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Akronyme}% +\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Bezeichnung}% +\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Beschreibung}% +\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}% +\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Seiten}% +\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbole}% +\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Zahlen}} +% \end{macrocode} +% ngerman is identical to German: +% \begin{macrocode} +\addto\captionsngerman{% +\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossar}% +\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Akronyme}% +\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Bezeichnung}% +\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Beschreibung}% +\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}% +\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Seiten}% +\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbole}% +\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Zahlen}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Italian: +% \begin{macrocode} +\addto\captionsitalian{% +\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossario}% +\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acronimi}% +\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Nomenclatura}% +\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Descrizione}% +\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Simbolo}% +\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Elenco delle pagine}% +\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Simboli}% +\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Numeri}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Dutch: +% \begin{macrocode} +\addto\captionsdutch{% +\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Woordenlijst}% +\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acroniemen}% +\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Benaming}% +\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Beschrijving}% +\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbool}% +\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Pagina's}% +\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbolen}% +\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Cijfers}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Spanish: +% \begin{macrocode} +\addto\captionsspanish{% +\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glosario}% +\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Siglas}% +\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Entrada}% +\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Descripci\'on}% +\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{S\'{\i}mbolo}% +\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Lista de p\'aginas}% +\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{S\'{\i}mbolos}% +\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{N\'umeros}} +% \end{macrocode} +% French: +% \begin{macrocode} +\addto\captionsfrench{% +\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossaire}% +\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acronymes}% +\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Terme}% +\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Description}% +\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbole}% +\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Pages}% +\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symboles}% +\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Nombres}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Danish: +% \begin{macrocode} +\addto\captionsdanish{% +\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Ordliste}% +\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Akronymer}% +\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Symbolforklaring}% +\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Beskrivelse}% +\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}% +\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Side}% +\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symboler}% +\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Tal}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Irish: +% \begin{macrocode} +\addto\captionsirish{% +\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Gluais}% +\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acrainmneacha}% +% \end{macrocode} +% wasn't sure whether to go for N\'ota (Note), Ciall (`Meaning', +% `sense') or Br\'{\i} (`Meaning'). In the end I chose Ciall. +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Ciall}% +\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Tuairisc}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Again, not sure whether to use Comhartha/Comhartha\'{\i} or +% Siombail/Siombaile, so have chosen the former. +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Comhartha}% +\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Comhartha\'{\i}}% +\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Leathanaigh}% +\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Uimhreacha}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Hungarian: +% \begin{macrocode} +\addto\captionsmagyar{% +\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Sz\'ojegyz\'ek}% +\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Bet\H uszavak}% +\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Kifejez\'es}% +\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Magyar\'azat}% +\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Jel\"ol\'es}% +\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Oldalsz\'am}% +\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Jelek}% +\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Sz\'amjegyek}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%</glossaries-babel.sty> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\subsubsection{Danish Dictionary} +% This is a dictonary file provided for use with the \isty{translator} +% package. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{Danish} +% \end{macrocode} +% Provide Danish translations: +% \begin{macrocode} +\providetranslation{Glossary}{Ordliste} +\providetranslation{Acronyms}{Akronymer} +\providetranslation{Notation (glossaries)}{Symbolforklaring} +\providetranslation{Description (glossaries)}{Beskrivelse} +\providetranslation{Symbol (glossaries)}{Symbol} +\providetranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Side} +\providetranslation{Symbols (glossaries)}{Symboler} +\providetranslation{Numbers (glossaries)}{Tal} +% \end{macrocode} +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%</glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\subsubsection{Dutch Dictionary} +% This is a dictonary file provided for use with the \isty{translator} +% package. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{Dutch} +% \end{macrocode} +% Provide Dutch translations: +% \begin{macrocode} +\providetranslation{Glossary}{Woordenlijst} +\providetranslation{Acronyms}{Acroniemen} +\providetranslation{Notation (glossaries)}{Benaming} +\providetranslation{Description (glossaries)}{Beschrijving} +\providetranslation{Symbol (glossaries)}{Symbool} +\providetranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Pagina's} +\providetranslation{Symbols (glossaries)}{Symbolen} +\providetranslation{Numbers (glossaries)}{Cijfers} +% \end{macrocode} +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%</glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*glossaries-dictionary-English.dict> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\subsubsection{English Dictionary} +% This is a dictonary file provided for use with the \isty{translator} +% package. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{English} +% \end{macrocode} +% Provide English translations: +% \begin{macrocode} +\providetranslation{Glossary}{Glossary} +\providetranslation{Acronyms}{Acronyms} +\providetranslation{Notation (glossaries)}{Notation} +\providetranslation{Description (glossaries)}{Description} +\providetranslation{Symbol (glossaries)}{Symbol} +\providetranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Page List} +\providetranslation{Symbols (glossaries)}{Symbols} +\providetranslation{Numbers (glossaries)}{Numbers} +% \end{macrocode} +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%</glossaries-dictionary-English.dict> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*glossaries-dictionary-French.dict> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\subsubsection{French Dictionary} +% This is a dictonary file provided for use with the \isty{translator} +% package. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{French} +% \end{macrocode} +% Provide French translations: +% \begin{macrocode} +\providetranslation{Glossary}{Glossaire} +\providetranslation{Acronyms}{Acronymes} +\providetranslation{Notation (glossaries)}{Terme} +\providetranslation{Description (glossaries)}{Description} +\providetranslation{Symbol (glossaries)}{Symbole} +\providetranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Pages} +\providetranslation{Symbols (glossaries)}{Symboles} +\providetranslation{Numbers (glossaries)}{Nombres} +% \end{macrocode} +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%</glossaries-dictionary-French.dict> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*glossaries-dictionary-German.dict> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\subsubsection{German Dictionary} +% This is a dictonary file provided for use with the \isty{translator} +% package. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{German} +% \end{macrocode} +% Provide German translations (quite a few variations were suggested +% for German; I settled on the following): +% \begin{macrocode} +\providetranslation{Glossary}{Glossar} +\providetranslation{Acronyms}{Akronyme} +\providetranslation{Notation (glossaries)}{Bezeichnung} +\providetranslation{Description (glossaries)}{Beschreibung} +\providetranslation{Symbol (glossaries)}{Symbol} +\providetranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Seiten} +\providetranslation{Symbols (glossaries)}{Symbole} +\providetranslation{Numbers (glossaries)}{Zahlen} +% \end{macrocode} +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%</glossaries-dictionary-German.dict> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\subsubsection{Irish Dictionary} +% This is a dictonary file provided for use with the \isty{translator} +% package. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{Irish} +% \end{macrocode} +% Provide Irish translations: +% \begin{macrocode} +\providetranslation{Glossary}{Gluais} +\providetranslation{Acronyms}{Acrainmneacha} +\providetranslation{Notation (glossaries)}{Ciall} +\providetranslation{Description (glossaries)}{Tuairisc} +\providetranslation{Symbol (glossaries)}{Comhartha} +\providetranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Leathanaigh} +\providetranslation{Symbols (glossaries)}{Comhartha\'{\i}} +\providetranslation{Numbers (glossaries)}{Uimhreacha} +% \end{macrocode} +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%</glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\subsubsection{Italian Dictionary} +% This is a dictonary file provided for use with the \isty{translator} +% package. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{Italian} +% \end{macrocode} +% Provide Italian translations: +% \begin{macrocode} +\providetranslation{Glossary}{Glossario} +\providetranslation{Acronyms}{Acronimi} +\providetranslation{Notation (glossaries)}{Nomenclatura} +\providetranslation{Description (glossaries)}{Descrizione} +\providetranslation{Symbol (glossaries)}{Simbolo} +\providetranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Elenco delle pagine} +\providetranslation{Symbols (glossaries)}{Simboli} +\providetranslation{Numbers (glossaries)}{Numeri} +% \end{macrocode} +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%</glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\subsubsection{Magyar Dictionary} +% This is a dictonary file provided for use with the \isty{translator} +% package. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{Magyar} +% \end{macrocode} +% Provide translations: +% \begin{macrocode} +\providetranslation{Glossary}{Sz\'ojegyz\'ek} +\providetranslation{Acronyms}{Bet\H uszavak} +\providetranslation{Notation (glossaries)}{Kifejez\'es} +\providetranslation{Description (glossaries)}{Magyar\'azat} +\providetranslation{Symbol (glossaries)}{Jel\"ol\'es} +\providetranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Oldalsz\'am} +\providetranslation{Symbols (glossaries)}{Jelek} +\providetranslation{Numbers (glossaries)}{Sz\'amjegyek} +% \end{macrocode} +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%</glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\subsubsection{Spanish Dictionary} +% This is a dictonary file provided for use with the \isty{translator} +% package. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{Spanish} +% \end{macrocode} +% Provide Spanish translations: +% \begin{macrocode} +\providetranslation{Glossary}{Glosario} +\providetranslation{Acronyms}{Siglas} +\providetranslation{Notation (glossaries)}{Entrada} +\providetranslation{Description (glossaries)}{Descripci\'on} +\providetranslation{Symbol (glossaries)}{S\'{\i}mbolo} +\providetranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Lista de p\'aginas} +\providetranslation{Symbols (glossaries)}{S\'{\i}mbolos} +\providetranslation{Numbers (glossaries)}{N\'umeros} +% \end{macrocode} +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%</glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*minimalgls.tex> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} + % This is a minimal file for testing and debugging + % the glossaries package. Change the class file as + % desired, and add the relevant package options to + % both the class file and the glossaries package. + % Change the sample glossary entry and acronym if + % required. + % + % Only add extra packages or commands if they + % contribute to whatever problem you are trying to + % test. + % + % Remember that the document will not be complete + % until you have successfully completed all of the + % following steps: + % 1. latex minimalgls + % 2. makeglossaries minimalgls (note no extension) + % 3. latex minimalgls + % A further run through LaTeX will be required to ensure that + % the table of contents is up to date if the toc option + % is used. +\documentclass{article} +\listfiles + + %\usepackage{glossaries} % acronym will go in main glossary +\usepackage[acronym]{glossaries} % make a separate list of acronyms + +\makeglossaries + +\newglossaryentry{sample}{name={sample}, +description={a sample entry}} + +\newacronym{aca}{aca}{a contrived acronym} + +\begin{document} + +A \gls{sample} entry and \gls{aca}. + +\printglossaries +\end{document} +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%</minimalgls.tex> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*sample.tex> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +\documentclass[a4paper]{report} + +\usepackage[plainpages=false,colorlinks]{hyperref} +\usepackage[style=altlist]{glossaries} + +\makeglossaries + +\newglossaryentry{glossary}{name=glossary, +description={1) list of technical words, 2) collection of +glosses}, +plural={glossaries}} + +\newglossaryentry{Perl}{name=\texttt{Perl}, +sort=Perl, % need a sort key because name contains a command +description=A scripting language} + +\newglossaryentry{pagelist}{name=page list, + % description value has to be enclosed in braces + % because it contains commas +description={a list of individual pages or page ranges +(e.g.\ 1,2,4,7-9)}} + +\newglossaryentry{mtrx}{name=matrix, +description={rectangular array of quantities}, + % plural is not simply obtained by appending an s, so specify +plural=matrices} + +\newcommand{\pardescription}{distinct section of piece of +writing.\par Beginning on new, usually indented, line} +\newglossaryentry{par}{name=paragraph, +description=\pardescription} + +\begin{document} + +\title{Sample Document Using glossary Package} +\author{Nicola Talbot} +\pagenumbering{alph}% prevent duplicate page link names if using PDF +\maketitle + +\pagenumbering{roman} +\tableofcontents + +\chapter{Introduction} +\pagenumbering{arabic} + +A \gls{glossary} is a very useful addition to any +technical document, although a \gls{glossary} can +also simply be a collection of glosses, which is +another thing entirely. Some documents have +multiple \glspl{glossary}. + +Once you have run your document through \LaTeX, you +will then need to run the \texttt{.glo} file through +\texttt{makeindex}. You will need to set the output +file so that it creates a \texttt{.gls} file instead +of an \texttt{.ind} file, and change the name of +the log file so that it doesn't overwrite the index +log file (if you have an index for your document). +Rather than having to remember all the command line +switches, you can call the \gls{Perl} script +\texttt{makeglossaries} which provides a convenient +wrapper. + +If a comma appears within the name or description, grouping +must be used, e.g.\ in the description of \gls{pagelist}. + +Plurals are assumed to have the letter s appended, but if +this is not the case, as in \glspl{mtrx}, then you need +to specify the plural when you define the entry. + +\Glspl{par} can cause a problem in commands. + +\printglossaries + +\end{document} +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%</sample.tex> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*sample4col.tex> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +\documentclass[a4paper]{article} + +\usepackage[style=long4colheader]{glossaries} + +\makeglossaries + +\newglossaryentry{w}{name={$w$}, +sort=w, +description={width}, +symbol=m} + +\newglossaryentry{M}{name={$M$}, +sort=M, +description={mass}, +symbol={kg}} + +\begin{document} + +\printglossaries + +The width, \gls{w}, is measured in meters. The mass, \gls{M} is +measured in kilograms. + +\end{document} +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%</sample4col.tex> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*sampleAcr.tex> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +\documentclass[a4paper]{report} + +\usepackage[colorlinks,plainpages=false]{hyperref} +\usepackage[style=long,toc]{glossaries} + +\makeglossaries + +\renewcommand*{\glstextformat}[1]{\textsf{#1}} + +\newacronym{svm}% label +{svm}% abbreviation +{support vector machine}% long form + +\newacronym{ksvm}{ksvm}{kernel support vector machine} + +\newacronym{rna}{rna}{ribonukleins\"aure} + +\begin{document} +\tableofcontents + +\chapter{Support Vector Machines} + +\Glspl{svm} are used widely in the area of pattern recognition. + +This is the text produced without a link: \glsentrytext{svm}. +This is the text produced on first use without a link: +\glsentryfirst{svm}. This is the entry's description without +a link: \glsentrydesc{svm}. + +This is the entry in uppercase: \GLS{svm}. + +\chapter{Kernel Support Vector Machines} + +The \gls{ksvm} is \ifglsused{svm}{an}{a} \gls{svm} that uses +the so called ``kernel trick''. Plural: \glspl{ksvm}. + +\glsresetall +Possessive: \gls{ksvm}['s]. +Make the glossary entry number bold for this +one \gls[format=hyperbf]{svm}. + +\chapter{Another chapter} + +You don't need to worry about makeindex's special characters: +\gls{rna}. + +\printglossary[title={Acronyms}] + +\end{document} +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%</sampleAcr.tex> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*sampleAcrDesc.tex> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +\documentclass[a4paper]{report} + +\usepackage[colorlinks,plainpages=false]{hyperref} + +\usepackage[style=altlist, % use altlist style + toc, % add the glossary to the table of contents + sanitize={description=false}% don't sanitize description + ]{glossaries} + +\makeglossaries + +\newglossaryentry{svm}{ + % how the entry name should appear in the glossary +name={Support vector machine (SVM)}, + % how the description should appear in the glossary + % since I have used sanitize={description=false} + % I have to protect fragile commands +description={Statistical pattern recognition +technique~\protect\cite{svm}}, + % how the entry should appear in the document text +text={svm}, + % how the entry should appear the first time it is + % used in the document text +first={support vector machine (svm)}} + +\newglossaryentry{ksvm}{ +name={Kernel support vector machine (KSVM)}, +description={Statistical pattern recognition technique +using the ``kernel trick'' (see also SVM)}, +text={ksvm}, +first={kernel support vector machine}} + +\begin{document} +\tableofcontents + +\chapter{Support Vector Machines} + +The \gls{svm} is used widely in the area of pattern recognition. + % plural form with initial letter in uppercase: +\Glspl{svm} are \ldots + +This is the text produced without a link: \glsentrytext{svm}. +This is the text produced on first use without a link: +\glsentryfirst{svm}. This is the entry's description without +a link: \glsentrydesc{svm}. + +This is the entry in uppercase: \GLS{svm}. + +\chapter{Kernel Support Vector Machines} + +The \gls{ksvm} is \ifglsused{svm}{an}{a} \gls{svm} that uses +the so called ``kernel trick''. + +\glsresetall +Possessive: \gls{ksvm}['s]. +Make the glossary entry number bold for this +one \gls[format=hyperbf]{svm}. + +\begin{thebibliography}{1} +\bibitem{svm} \ldots +\end{thebibliography} + +\printglossary[title={Acronyms}] + +\end{document} +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%</sampleAcrDesc.tex> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*sampleDB.tex> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +\documentclass{article} + +\usepackage[colorlinks,plainpages=false]{hyperref} +\usepackage[nonumberlist]{glossaries} + +\newglossary[nlg]{symbols}{not}{ntn}{Symbols} + +\makeglossaries + +\loadglsentries{database1} +\loadglsentries[symbols]{database2} + +\begin{document} + +Adding all entries\glsaddall. + +\printglossaries + +\end{document} +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%</sampleDB.tex> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*sampleEq.tex> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +\documentclass[a4paper,12pt]{report} + +\usepackage{amsmath} +\usepackage[colorlinks]{hyperref} +\usepackage[style=long3colheader,counter=equation]{glossaries} + +\newcommand{\erf}{\operatorname{erf}} +\newcommand{\erfc}{\operatorname{erfc}} + +\makeglossaries + + % Change the glossary headings + +\renewcommand{\entryname}{Notation} +\renewcommand{\descriptionname}{Function Name} +\renewcommand{\pagelistname}{Number of Formula} + + % define glossary entries + +\newglossaryentry{Gamma}{name=\ensuremath{\Gamma(z)}, +description=Gamma function, +sort=Gamma} + +\newglossaryentry{gamma}{name={\ensuremath{\gamma(\alpha,x)}}, +description=Incomplete gamma function, +sort=gamma} + +\newglossaryentry{iGamma}{name={\ensuremath{\Gamma(\alpha,x)}}, +description=Incomplete gamma function, +sort=Gamma} + +\newglossaryentry{psi}{name=\ensuremath{\psi(x)}, +description=Psi function,sort=psi} + +\newglossaryentry{erf}{name=\ensuremath{\erf(x)}, +description=Error function,sort=erf} + +\newglossaryentry{erfc}{name=\ensuremath{\erfc}, +description=Complementary error function,sort=erfc} + +\newglossaryentry{B}{name={\ensuremath{B(x,y)}}, +description=Beta function,sort=B} + +\newglossaryentry{Bx}{name={\ensuremath{B_x(p,q)}}, +description=Incomplete beta function,sort=Bx} + +\newglossaryentry{Tn}{name=\ensuremath{T_n(x)}, +description=Chebyshev's polynomials of the first kind,sort=Tn} + +\newglossaryentry{Un}{name=\ensuremath{U_n(x)}, +description=Chebyshev's polynomials of the second kind,sort=Un} + +\newglossaryentry{Hn}{name=\ensuremath{H_n(x)}, +description=Hermite polynomials,sort=Hn} + +\newglossaryentry{Ln}{name=\ensuremath{L_n^\alpha(x)}, +description=Laguerre polynomials,sort=Lna} + +\newglossaryentry{Znu}{name=\ensuremath{Z_\nu(z)}, +description=Bessel functions,sort=Z} + +\newglossaryentry{Phi}{name={\ensuremath{\Phi(\alpha,\gamma;z)}}, +description=confluent hypergeometric function,sort=Pagz} + +\newglossaryentry{knu}{name=\ensuremath{k_\nu(x)}, +description=Bateman's function,sort=kv} + +\newglossaryentry{Dp}{name=\ensuremath{D_p(z)}, +description=Parabolic cylinder functions,sort=Dp} + +\newglossaryentry{F}{name={\ensuremath{F(\phi,k)}}, +description=Elliptical integral of the first kind,sort=Fpk} + +\newglossaryentry{C}{name=\ensuremath{C}, +description=Euler's constant,sort=C} + +\newglossaryentry{G}{name=\ensuremath{G}, +description=Catalan's constant,sort=G} + +\begin{document} +\title{A Sample Document Using glossaries.sty} +\author{Nicola Talbot} +\maketitle + +\begin{abstract} +This is a sample document illustrating the use of the \textsf{glossaries} +package. The functions here have been taken from ``Tables of +Integrals, Series, and Products'' by I.S.~Gradshteyn and I.M~Ryzhik. +The glossary is a list of special functions, so +the equation number has been used rather than the page number. This +can be done using the \texttt{counter=equation} package +option. +\end{abstract} + +\printglossary[title={Index of Special Functions and Notations}] + +\chapter{Gamma Functions} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{Gamma} = \int_{0}^{\infty}e^{-t}t^{z-1}\,dt +\end{equation} + +\verb|\ensuremath| is only required here if using +hyperlinks. +\begin{equation} +\glslink{Gamma}{\ensuremath{\Gamma(x+1)}} = x\Gamma(x) +\end{equation} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{gamma} = \int_0^x e^{-t}t^{\alpha-1}\,dt +\end{equation} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{iGamma} = \int_x^\infty e^{-t}t^{\alpha-1}\,dt +\end{equation} + +\newpage + +\begin{equation} +\gls{Gamma} = \Gamma(\alpha, x) + \gamma(\alpha, x) +\end{equation} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{psi} = \frac{d}{dx}\ln\Gamma(x) +\end{equation} + +\chapter{Error Functions} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{erf} = \frac{2}{\surd\pi}\int_0^x e^{-t^2}\,dt +\end{equation} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{erfc} = 1 - \erf(x) +\end{equation} + +\chapter{Beta Function} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{B} = 2\int_0^1 t^{x-1}(1-t^2)^{y-1}\,dt +\end{equation} +Alternatively: +\begin{equation} +\gls{B} = 2\int_0^{\frac\pi2}\sin^{2x-1}\phi\cos^{2y-1}\phi\,d\phi +\end{equation} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{B} = \frac{\Gamma(x)\Gamma(y)}{\Gamma(x+y)} = B(y,x) +\end{equation} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{Bx} = \int_0^x t^{p-1}(1-t)^{q-1}\,dt +\end{equation} + +\chapter{Polynomials} + +\section{Chebyshev's polynomials} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{Tn} = \cos(n\arccos x) +\end{equation} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{Un} = \frac{\sin[(n+1)\arccos x]}{\sin[\arccos x]} +\end{equation} + +\section{Hermite polynomials} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{Hn} = (-1)^n e^{x^2} \frac{d^n}{dx^n}(e^{-x^2}) +\end{equation} + +\section{Laguerre polynomials} + +\begin{equation} +L_n^{\alpha} (x) = \frac{1}{n!}e^x x^{-\alpha} +\frac{d^n}{dx^n}(e^{-x}x^{n+\alpha}) +\end{equation} + +\chapter{Bessel Functions} + +Bessel functions $Z_\nu$ are solutions of +\begin{equation} +\frac{d^2\glslink{Znu}{Z_\nu}}{dz^2} ++ \frac{1}{z}\,\frac{dZ_\nu}{dz} + +\left( 1-\frac{\nu^2}{z^2}Z_\nu = 0 \right) +\end{equation} + +\chapter{Confluent hypergeometric function} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{Phi} = 1 + \frac{\alpha}{\gamma}\,\frac{z}{1!} ++ \frac{\alpha(\alpha+1)}{\gamma(\gamma+1)}\,\frac{z^2}{2!} ++\frac{\alpha(\alpha+1)(\alpha+2)}{\gamma(\gamma+1)(\gamma+2)}\, +\frac{z^3}{3!} + \cdots +\end{equation} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{knu} = \frac{2}{\pi}\int_0^{\pi/2} +\cos(x \tan\theta - \nu\theta)\,d\theta +\end{equation} + +\chapter{Parabolic cylinder functions} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{Dp} = 2^{\frac{p}{2}}e^{-\frac{z^2}{4}} +\left\{ +\frac{\surd\pi}{\Gamma\left(\frac{1-p}{2}\right)} +\Phi\left(-\frac{p}{2},\frac{1}{2};\frac{z^2}{2}\right) +-\frac{\sqrt{2\pi}z}{\Gamma\left(-\frac{p}{2}\right)} +\Phi\left(\frac{1-p}{2},\frac{3}{2};\frac{z^2}{2}\right) +\right\} +\end{equation} + +\chapter{Elliptical Integral of the First Kind} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{F} = \int_0^\phi \frac{d\alpha}{\sqrt{1-k^2\sin^2\alpha}} +\end{equation} + +\chapter{Constants} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{C} = 0.577\,215\,664\,901\ldots +\end{equation} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{G} = 0.915\,965\,594\ldots +\end{equation} + +\end{document} +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%</sampleEq.tex> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*sampleEqPg.tex> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +\documentclass[a4paper,12pt]{report} + +\usepackage{amsmath} +\usepackage[colorlinks]{hyperref} +\usepackage[style=long3colheader,toc, + counter=equation]{glossaries} + +\newcommand{\erf}{\operatorname{erf}} +\newcommand{\erfc}{\operatorname{erfc}} + +\renewcommand{\glossaryname}{Index of Special Functions and Notations} + +\renewcommand{\glossarypreamble}{Numbers in italic indicate the equation number, +numbers in bold indicate page numbers where the main definition occurs.\par} + + % set the glossary number style to italic + % hyperit is used instead of textit because + % the hyperref package is being used. +\renewcommand{\glsnumberformat}[1]{\hyperit{#1}} + + % 1st column heading +\renewcommand{\entryname}{Notation} + + % 2nd column heading +\renewcommand{\descriptionname}{Function Name} + + % 3rd column heading +\renewcommand{\pagelistname}{} + + % Redefine header row so that it + % adds a blank row after the title row +\renewcommand{\glossaryheader}{\bfseries\entryname & +\bfseries\descriptionname&\bfseries\pagelistname\\ +& & \\\endhead} + + % Define glossary entries + +\newglossaryentry{Gamma}{name=\ensuremath{\Gamma(z)}, +description=Gamma function,sort=Gamma} + +\newglossaryentry{gamma}{name=\ensuremath{\gamma(\alpha,x)}, +description=Incomplete gamma function,sort=gamma} + +\newglossaryentry{iGamma}{name=\ensuremath{\Gamma(\alpha,x)}, +description=Incomplete gamma function,sort=Gamma} + +\newglossaryentry{psi}{name=\ensuremath{\psi(x)}, +description=Psi function,sort=psi} + +\newglossaryentry{erf}{name=\ensuremath{\erf(x)}, +description=Error function,sort=erf} + +\newglossaryentry{erfc}{name=\ensuremath{\erfc(x)}, +description=Complementary error function,sort=erfc} + +\newglossaryentry{beta}{name=\ensuremath{B(x,y)}, +description=Beta function,sort=B} + +\newglossaryentry{Bx}{name=\ensuremath{B_x(p,q)}, +description=Incomplete beta function,sort=Bx} + +\newglossaryentry{Tn}{name=\ensuremath{T_n(x)}, +description=Chebyshev's polynomials of the first kind, +sort=Tn} + +\newglossaryentry{Un}{name=\ensuremath{U_n(x)}, +description=Chebyshev's polynomials of the second kind, +sort=Un} + +\newglossaryentry{Hn}{name=\ensuremath{H_n(x)}, +description=Hermite polynomials,sort=Hn} + +\newglossaryentry{Lna}{name=\ensuremath{L_n^\alpha(x)}, +description=Laguerre polynomials,sort=Lna} + +\newglossaryentry{Znu}{name=\ensuremath{Z_\nu(z)}, +description=Bessel functions,sort=Z} + +\newglossaryentry{Pagz}{name=\ensuremath{\Phi(\alpha,\gamma;z)}, +description=confluent hypergeometric function,sort=Pagz} + +\newglossaryentry{kv}{name=\ensuremath{k_\nu(x)}, +description=Bateman's function,sort=kv} + +\newglossaryentry{Dp}{name=\ensuremath{D_p(z)}, +description=Parabolic cylinder functions,sort=Dp} + +\newglossaryentry{Fpk}{name=\ensuremath{F(\phi,k)}, +description=Elliptical integral of the first kind,sort=Fpk} + +\newglossaryentry{C}{name=\ensuremath{C}, +description=Euler's constant,sort=C} + +\newglossaryentry{G}{name=\ensuremath{G}, +description=Catalan's constant,sort=G} + +\makeglossaries + +\pagestyle{headings} + +\begin{document} + +\title{Sample Document Using Interchangable Numbering} +\author{Nicola Talbot} +\maketitle + +\begin{abstract} +This is a sample document illustrating the use of the \textsf{glossaries} +package. The functions here have been taken from ``Tables of +Integrals, Series, and Products'' by I.S.~Gradshteyn and I.M~Ryzhik. + +The glossary lists both page numbers and equation numbers. +Since the majority of the entries use the equation number, +\texttt{counter=equation} was used as a package option. +Note that this example will only work where the +page number and equation number compositor is the same. So +it won't work if, say, the page numbers are of the form +2-4 and the equation numbers are of the form 4.6. +As most of the glossary entries should have an italic +format, it is easiest to set the default format to +italic. + +\end{abstract} + +\tableofcontents + +\printglossary[toctitle={Special Functions}] + +\chapter{Gamma Functions} + +The \glslink[format=hyperbf,counter=page]{Gamma}{gamma function} is +defined as +\begin{equation} +\gls{Gamma} = \int_{0}^{\infty}e^{-t}t^{z-1}\,dt +\end{equation} + +\begin{equation} +\glslink{Gamma}{\ensuremath{\Gamma(x+1)}} = x\Gamma(x) +\end{equation} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{gamma} = \int_0^x e^{-t}t^{\alpha-1}\,dt +\end{equation} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{iGamma} = \int_x^\infty e^{-t}t^{\alpha-1}\,dt +\end{equation} + +\newpage + +\begin{equation} +\glslink{Gamma}{\ensuremath{\Gamma(\alpha)}} = +\Gamma(\alpha, x) + \gamma(\alpha, x) +\end{equation} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{psi} = \frac{d}{dx}\ln\Gamma(x) +\end{equation} + +\chapter{Error Functions} + +The \glslink[format=hyperbf,counter=page]{erf}{error function} is defined as: +\begin{equation} +\gls{erf} = \frac{2}{\surd\pi}\int_0^x e^{-t^2}\,dt +\end{equation} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{erfc} = 1 - \erf(x) +\end{equation} + +\chapter{Beta Function} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{beta} = 2\int_0^1 t^{x-1}(1-t^2)^{y-1}\,dt +\end{equation} +Alternatively: +\begin{equation} +\gls{beta} = 2\int_0^{\frac\pi2}\sin^{2x-1}\phi\cos^{2y-1}\phi\,d\phi +\end{equation} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{beta} = \frac{\Gamma(x)\Gamma(y)}{\Gamma(x+y)} = B(y,x) +\end{equation} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{Bx} = \int_0^x t^{p-1}(1-t)^{q-1}\,dt +\end{equation} + +\chapter{Chebyshev's polynomials} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{Tn} = \cos(n\arccos x) +\end{equation} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{Un} = \frac{\sin[(n+1)\arccos x]}{\sin[\arccos x]} +\end{equation} + +\chapter{Hermite polynomials} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{Hn} = (-1)^n e^{x^2} \frac{d^n}{dx^n}(e^{-x^2}) +\end{equation} + +\chapter{Laguerre polynomials} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{Lna} = \frac{1}{n!}e^x x^{-\alpha} +\frac{d^n}{dx^n}(e^{-x}x^{n+\alpha}) +\end{equation} + +\chapter{Bessel Functions} + +Bessel functions $Z_\nu(z)$ are solutions of +\begin{equation} +\frac{d^2\glslink{Znu}{Z_\nu}}{dz^2} + \frac{1}{z}\,\frac{dZ_\nu}{dz} + +\left( +1-\frac{\nu^2}{z^2}Z_\nu = 0 +\right) +\end{equation} + +\chapter{Confluent hypergeometric function} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{Pagz} = 1 + \frac{\alpha}{\gamma}\,\frac{z}{1!} ++ \frac{\alpha(\alpha+1)}{\gamma(\gamma+1)}\,\frac{z^2}{2!} ++\frac{\alpha(\alpha+1)(\alpha+2)} + {\gamma(\gamma+1)(\gamma+2)} +\,\frac{z^3}{3!} ++ \cdots +\end{equation} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{kv} = \frac{2}{\pi}\int_0^{\pi/2} +\cos(x \tan\theta - \nu\theta)\,d\theta +\end{equation} + +\chapter{Parabolic cylinder functions} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{Dp} = 2^{\frac{p}{2}}e^{-\frac{z^2}{4}} +\left\{ +\frac{\surd\pi}{\Gamma\left(\frac{1-p}{2}\right)} +\Phi\left(-\frac{p}{2},\frac{1}{2};\frac{z^2}{2}\right) +-\frac{\sqrt{2\pi}z}{\Gamma\left(-\frac{p}{2}\right)} +\Phi\left(\frac{1-p}{2},\frac{3}{2};\frac{z^2}{2}\right) +\right\} +\end{equation} + +\chapter{Elliptical Integral of the First Kind} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{Fpk} = \int_0^\phi +\frac{d\alpha}{\sqrt{1-k^2\sin^2\alpha}} +\end{equation} + +\chapter{Constants} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{C} = 0.577\,215\,664\,901\ldots +\end{equation} + +\begin{equation} +\gls{G} = 0.915\,965\,594\ldots +\end{equation} + +\end{document} +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%</sampleEqPg.tex> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*sampleNtn.tex> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +\documentclass{report} + +\usepackage[plainpages=false,colorlinks]{hyperref} +\usepackage{html} +\usepackage[toc]{glossaries} + + % Define a new glossary type called notation +\newglossary[nlg]{notation}{not}{ntn}{Notation} + +\makeglossaries + + % Notation definitions + +\newglossaryentry{not:set}{type=notation, % glossary type +name={$\mathcal{S}$}, +description={A set}, +sort={S}} + +\newglossaryentry{not:U}{type=notation, +name={$\mathcal{U}$}, +description={The universal set}, +sort=U} + +\newglossaryentry{not:card}{type=notation, +name={$|\mathcal{S}|$}, +description={cardinality of $\mathcal{S}$}, +sort=cardinality} + +\newglossaryentry{not:fact}{type=notation, +name={$!$}, +description={factorial}, +sort=factorial} + + % Main glossary definitions + +\newglossaryentry{gls:set}{name=set, +description={A collection of distinct objects}} + +\newglossaryentry{gls:card}{name=cardinality, +description={The number of elements in the specified set}} + +\begin{document} +\title{Sample Document using the glossaries Package} +\author{Nicola Talbot} +\pagenumbering{alph} +\maketitle + +\begin{abstract} + %stop hyperref complaining about duplicate page identifiers: +\pagenumbering{Alph} +This is a sample document illustrating the use of the +\textsf{glossaries} package. In this example, a new glossary type +called \texttt{notation} is defined, so that the document can have a +separate glossary of terms and index of notation. The index of notation +doesn't have associated numbers. +\end{abstract} + + +\pagenumbering{roman} +\tableofcontents + +\printglossaries + %\printglossary + %\setglossarysection{section} + %\printglossary[type=notation] + +\chapter{Introduction} +\pagenumbering{arabic} + +\glslink{gls:set}{Sets} +are denoted by a caligraphic font +e.g.\ \gls{not:set}. + +Let \gls[format=hyperit]{not:U} denote the universal set. + +The \gls{gls:card} of a set $\mathcal{S}$ is denoted +\gls{not:card}. + +\chapter{Another Chapter} + +Another mention of the universal set \gls{not:U}. + +The factorial symbol: \gls{not:fact}. + +\end{document} +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%</sampleNtn.tex> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*sampleSec.tex> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +\documentclass{report} + +\usepackage[plainpages=false,colorlinks]{hyperref} +\usepackage[style=altlist,toc,counter=section]{glossaries} + +\makeglossaries + +\newglossaryentry{ident}{name=identity matrix, +description=diagonal matrix with 1s along the leading diagonal, +plural=identity matrices} + +\newglossaryentry{diag}{name=diagonal matrix, +description=matrix whose only non-zero entries are along +the leading diagonal, +plural=diagonal matrices} + +\newglossaryentry{sing}{name=singular matrix, +description=matrix with zero determinant, +plural=singular matrices} + +\begin{document} + +\pagenumbering{roman} +\tableofcontents + +\printglossaries + +\chapter{Introduction} +\pagenumbering{arabic} +This is a sample document illustrating the use of the +\textsf{glossaries} package. + +\chapter{Diagonal matrices} + +A \gls[format=hyperit]{diag} is a matrix where all elements not on the +leading diagonal are zero. This is the +primary definition, so an italic font is used for the page number. + +\newpage +\section{Identity matrix} +The \gls[format=hyperit]{ident} is a \gls{diag} whose leading +diagonal elements are all equal to 1. + +Here is another entry for a \gls{diag}. And this is the +plural: \glspl{ident}. + +This adds an entry into the glossary with a bold number, but +it doesn't create a hyperlink: \gls*[format=hyperbf]{ident}. + +\chapter{Singular Matrices} + +A \gls{sing} is a matrix with zero determinant. +\Glspl{sing} are non-invertible. Possessive: +a \gls{sing}['s] dimensions are not necessarily equal. + +Another \gls{ident} entry. + +\end{document} +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%</sampleSec.tex> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*database1.tex> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} + % This is a sample database of glossary entries + % Only those entries used in the document with \glslink, \gls, + % \glspl, and uppercase variants will have entries in the + % glossary. Note that the type key is not used, as the + % glossary type can be specified in \loadglsentries + +\newglossaryentry{array}{name=array, +description={A list of values identified by a numeric value}} + +\newglossaryentry{binary}{name=binary, +description={Pertaining to numbers represented in base 2}} + +\newglossaryentry{comment}{name=comment, +description={A remark that doesn't affect the meaning of the +code}} + +\newglossaryentry{global}{name=global, +description={Something that maintains its state when it leaves +the current group}} + +\newglossaryentry{local}{name=local, +description={Something that only maintains its state until +it leaves the group in which it was defined/changed}} + +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%</database1.tex> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*database2.tex> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} + % This is a sample database of glossary entries + % Only those entries used in the document with \glslink, \gls, + % \glspl, and uppercase variants will have entries in the + % glossary. Note that the type key is not used, as the + % glossary type can be specified in \loadglsentries + + % Don't need to worry about makeindex special characters +\newglossaryentry{quote}{name={"}, +description={the double quote symbol}} + +\newglossaryentry{at}{name={@}, +description={the ``at'' symbol}} + +\newglossaryentry{excl}{name={!}, +description={the exclamation mark symbol}} + +\newglossaryentry{bar}{name={$|$}, +description={the vertical bar symbol}} + +\newglossaryentry{hash}{name={\#}, +description={the hash symbol}} + +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} +%</database2.tex> +% \end{macrocode} +%\fi +%\iffalse +% \begin{macrocode} %<*glossaries.perl> % \end{macrocode} %\fi @@ -4536,8 +7980,8 @@ first={#4 (#3)},plural={#3s},firstplural={#4s (#3s)},#1}} # File : glossaries.perl # Author : Nicola L.C. Talbot # Date : 14th June 2007 -# Last Modified : 21st Aug 2007 -# Version : 1.02 +# Last Modified : 22 February 2008 +# Version : 1.03 # Description : LaTeX2HTML (limited!) implementation of glossaries # package. Note that not all the glossaries.sty # macros have been implemented. @@ -5566,9 +9010,14 @@ sub gls_add_entry{ local($oldfmt) = $GLSCURRENTFORMAT; - if (defined($format) and $format) + if (defined($format)) { - $GLSCURRENTFORMAT=$format; + $format=~s/[\(\)]//; + + if ($format) + { + $GLSCURRENTFORMAT=$format; + } } $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; @@ -6206,6 +9655,609 @@ sub do_cmd_GLSpl{ &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, uc($link_text)).$space . $_; } +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_glstext{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_text($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, $text) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_Glstext{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_text($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, ucfirst($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_GLStext{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_text($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, uc($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_glsname{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_name($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, $text) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_Glsname{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_name($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, ucfirst($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_GLSname{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_name($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, uc($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_glsfirst{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_first($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, $text) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_Glsfirst{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_first($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, ucfirst($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_GLSfirst{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_first($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, uc($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_glsfirstplural{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_firstplural($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, $text) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_Glsfirstplural{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_firstplural($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, ucfirst($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_GLSfirstplural{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_firstplural($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, uc($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_glsplural{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_plural($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, $text) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_Glsplural{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_plural($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, ucfirst($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_GLSplural{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_plural($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, uc($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_glsdesc{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_description($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, $text) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_Glsdesc{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_description($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, ucfirst($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_GLSdesc{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_description($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, uc($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_glssymbol{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_symbol($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, $text) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_Glssymbol{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_symbol($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, ucfirst($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_GLSsymbol{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_symbol($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, uc($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +sub do_cmd_acrshort{ + &do_cmd_glstext(@_) +} + +sub do_cmd_Acrshort{ + &do_cmd_Glstext(@_) +} + +sub do_cmd_ACRshort{ + &do_cmd_GLStext(@_) +} + +sub do_cmd_acrlong{ + &do_cmd_glsdesc(@_) +} + +sub do_cmd_Acrlong{ + &do_cmd_Glsdesc(@_) +} + +sub do_cmd_ACRlong{ + &do_cmd_GLSdesc(@_) +} + +sub do_cmd_acrfull{ + &do_cmd_glsfirst(@_) +} + +sub do_cmd_Acrfull{ + &do_cmd_Glsfirst(@_) +} + +sub do_cmd_ACRfull{ + &do_cmd_GLSfirst(@_) +} + sub do_cmd_glossarypreamble{ local($_) = @_; $_[0]; @@ -6245,6 +10297,7 @@ sub do_cmd_hyperbf{ &ignore_commands( <<_IGNORED_CMDS_ ); makeglossary makeglossaries +glossarystyle {} _IGNORED_CMDS_ 1; diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries/glossaries.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries/glossaries.ins index 170da75cd4e..9efa72599bc 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries/glossaries.ins +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries/glossaries.ins @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ -% glossaries.ins generated using makedtx version 0.94b 2007/10/13 15:35 +% glossaries.ins generated using makedtx version 0.94b 2008/3/4 12:06 \input docstrip \preamble glossaries.dtx - Copyright 2007 Nicola Talbot + Copyright 2008 Nicola Talbot This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ The Current Maintainer of this work is Nicola Talbot. - This work consists of the files glossaries.dtx and glossaries.ins and the derived files glossaries.sty, glossary-hypernav.sty, glossary-list.sty, glossary-long.sty, glossary-super.sty, glossaries.perl. + This work consists of the files glossaries.dtx and glossaries.ins and the derived files glossaries.sty, glossary-hypernav.sty, glossary-list.sty, glossary-long.sty, glossary-super.sty, glossaries-babel.sty, glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict, glossaries-dictionary-English.dict, glossaries-dictionary-French.dict, glossaries-dictionary-German.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict, minimalgls.tex, sample.tex, sample4col.tex, sampleAcr.tex, sampleAcrDesc.tex, sampleDB.tex, sampleEq.tex, sampleEqPg.tex, sampleNtn.tex, sampleSec.tex, database1.tex, database2.tex, glossaries.perl. \endpreamble @@ -34,6 +34,50 @@ \usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{glossary-long.sty,package}} \file{glossary-super.sty}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble \usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{glossary-super.sty,package}} +\file{glossaries-babel.sty}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble +\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{glossaries-babel.sty,package}} +\file{glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble +\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict,package}} +\file{glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble +\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict,package}} +\file{glossaries-dictionary-English.dict}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble +\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{glossaries-dictionary-English.dict,package}} +\file{glossaries-dictionary-French.dict}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble +\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{glossaries-dictionary-French.dict,package}} +\file{glossaries-dictionary-German.dict}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble +\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{glossaries-dictionary-German.dict,package}} +\file{glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble +\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict,package}} +\file{glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble +\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict,package}} +\file{glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble +\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict,package}} +\file{glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble +\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict,package}} +\file{minimalgls.tex}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble +\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{minimalgls.tex,package}} +\file{sample.tex}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble +\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sample.tex,package}} +\file{sample4col.tex}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble +\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sample4col.tex,package}} +\file{sampleAcr.tex}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble +\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sampleAcr.tex,package}} +\file{sampleAcrDesc.tex}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble +\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sampleAcrDesc.tex,package}} +\file{sampleDB.tex}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble +\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sampleDB.tex,package}} +\file{sampleEq.tex}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble +\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sampleEq.tex,package}} +\file{sampleEqPg.tex}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble +\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sampleEqPg.tex,package}} +\file{sampleNtn.tex}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble +\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sampleNtn.tex,package}} +\file{sampleSec.tex}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble +\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sampleSec.tex,package}} +\file{database1.tex}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble +\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{database1.tex,package}} +\file{database2.tex}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble +\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{database2.tex,package}} \file{glossaries.perl}{\nopreamble\nopostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{glossaries.perl}} } diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries.perl b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries/glossaries.perl index 22ad50f784c..8a64fbe3aca 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries.perl +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries/glossaries.perl @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ # File : glossaries.perl # Author : Nicola L.C. Talbot # Date : 14th June 2007 -# Last Modified : 21st Aug 2007 -# Version : 1.02 +# Last Modified : 22 February 2008 +# Version : 1.03 # Description : LaTeX2HTML (limited!) implementation of glossaries # package. Note that not all the glossaries.sty # macros have been implemented. @@ -1029,9 +1029,14 @@ sub gls_add_entry{ local($oldfmt) = $GLSCURRENTFORMAT; - if (defined($format) and $format) + if (defined($format)) { - $GLSCURRENTFORMAT=$format; + $format=~s/[\(\)]//; + + if ($format) + { + $GLSCURRENTFORMAT=$format; + } } $id = ++$global{'max_id'}; @@ -1669,6 +1674,609 @@ sub do_cmd_GLSpl{ &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, uc($link_text)).$space . $_; } +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_glstext{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_text($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, $text) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_Glstext{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_text($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, ucfirst($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_GLStext{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_text($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, uc($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_glsname{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_name($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, $text) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_Glsname{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_name($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, ucfirst($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_GLSname{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_name($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, uc($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_glsfirst{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_first($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, $text) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_Glsfirst{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_first($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, ucfirst($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_GLSfirst{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_first($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, uc($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_glsfirstplural{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_firstplural($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, $text) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_Glsfirstplural{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_firstplural($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, ucfirst($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_GLSfirstplural{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_firstplural($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, uc($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_glsplural{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_plural($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, $text) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_Glsplural{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_plural($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, ucfirst($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_GLSplural{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_plural($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, uc($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_glsdesc{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_description($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, $text) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_Glsdesc{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_description($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, ucfirst($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_GLSdesc{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_description($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, uc($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_glssymbol{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_symbol($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, $text) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_Glssymbol{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_symbol($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, ucfirst($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +# added 22 Feb 2008 +sub do_cmd_GLSsymbol{ + local($_) = @_; + local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert); + + ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg); + + $label = &missing_braces unless + (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo); + + local ($space) = ''; + if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';} + + $insert = ''; + ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument; + + local($display) = ''; + + local($type) = &gls_get_type($label); + + $text = &gls_get_symbol($label); + + &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, uc($text)) .$space . $_; +} + +sub do_cmd_acrshort{ + &do_cmd_glstext(@_) +} + +sub do_cmd_Acrshort{ + &do_cmd_Glstext(@_) +} + +sub do_cmd_ACRshort{ + &do_cmd_GLStext(@_) +} + +sub do_cmd_acrlong{ + &do_cmd_glsdesc(@_) +} + +sub do_cmd_Acrlong{ + &do_cmd_Glsdesc(@_) +} + +sub do_cmd_ACRlong{ + &do_cmd_GLSdesc(@_) +} + +sub do_cmd_acrfull{ + &do_cmd_glsfirst(@_) +} + +sub do_cmd_Acrfull{ + &do_cmd_Glsfirst(@_) +} + +sub do_cmd_ACRfull{ + &do_cmd_GLSfirst(@_) +} + sub do_cmd_glossarypreamble{ local($_) = @_; $_[0]; @@ -1708,6 +2316,7 @@ sub do_cmd_hyperbf{ &ignore_commands( <<_IGNORED_CMDS_ ); makeglossary makeglossaries +glossarystyle {} _IGNORED_CMDS_ 1; diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..11ebed0f117 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +%% +%% This is file `glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% glossaries.dtx (with options: `glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict,package') +%% +%% glossaries.dtx +%% Copyright 2008 Nicola Talbot +%% +%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +%% of this license of (at your option) any later version. +%% The latest version of this license is in +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +%% version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Nicola Talbot. +%% +%% This work consists of the files glossaries.dtx and glossaries.ins and the derived files glossaries.sty, glossary-hypernav.sty, glossary-list.sty, glossary-long.sty, glossary-super.sty, glossaries-babel.sty, glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict, glossaries-dictionary-English.dict, glossaries-dictionary-French.dict, glossaries-dictionary-German.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict, minimalgls.tex, sample.tex, sample4col.tex, sampleAcr.tex, sampleAcrDesc.tex, sampleDB.tex, sampleEq.tex, sampleEqPg.tex, sampleNtn.tex, sampleSec.tex, database1.tex, database2.tex, glossaries.perl. +%% +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{Danish} +\providetranslation{Glossary}{Ordliste} +\providetranslation{Acronyms}{Akronymer} +\providetranslation{Notation (glossaries)}{Symbolforklaring} +\providetranslation{Description (glossaries)}{Beskrivelse} +\providetranslation{Symbol (glossaries)}{Symbol} +\providetranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Side} +\providetranslation{Symbols (glossaries)}{Symboler} +\providetranslation{Numbers (glossaries)}{Tal} +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..abfff1740e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +%% +%% This is file `glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% glossaries.dtx (with options: `glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict,package') +%% +%% glossaries.dtx +%% Copyright 2008 Nicola Talbot +%% +%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +%% of this license of (at your option) any later version. +%% The latest version of this license is in +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +%% version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Nicola Talbot. +%% +%% This work consists of the files glossaries.dtx and glossaries.ins and the derived files glossaries.sty, glossary-hypernav.sty, glossary-list.sty, glossary-long.sty, glossary-super.sty, glossaries-babel.sty, glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict, glossaries-dictionary-English.dict, glossaries-dictionary-French.dict, glossaries-dictionary-German.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict, minimalgls.tex, sample.tex, sample4col.tex, sampleAcr.tex, sampleAcrDesc.tex, sampleDB.tex, sampleEq.tex, sampleEqPg.tex, sampleNtn.tex, sampleSec.tex, database1.tex, database2.tex, glossaries.perl. +%% +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{Dutch} +\providetranslation{Glossary}{Woordenlijst} +\providetranslation{Acronyms}{Acroniemen} +\providetranslation{Notation (glossaries)}{Benaming} +\providetranslation{Description (glossaries)}{Beschrijving} +\providetranslation{Symbol (glossaries)}{Symbool} +\providetranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Pagina's} +\providetranslation{Symbols (glossaries)}{Symbolen} +\providetranslation{Numbers (glossaries)}{Cijfers} +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-English.dict b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-English.dict new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..64140682399 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-English.dict @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +%% +%% This is file `glossaries-dictionary-English.dict', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% glossaries.dtx (with options: `glossaries-dictionary-English.dict,package') +%% +%% glossaries.dtx +%% Copyright 2008 Nicola Talbot +%% +%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +%% of this license of (at your option) any later version. +%% The latest version of this license is in +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +%% version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Nicola Talbot. +%% +%% This work consists of the files glossaries.dtx and glossaries.ins and the derived files glossaries.sty, glossary-hypernav.sty, glossary-list.sty, glossary-long.sty, glossary-super.sty, glossaries-babel.sty, glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict, glossaries-dictionary-English.dict, glossaries-dictionary-French.dict, glossaries-dictionary-German.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict, minimalgls.tex, sample.tex, sample4col.tex, sampleAcr.tex, sampleAcrDesc.tex, sampleDB.tex, sampleEq.tex, sampleEqPg.tex, sampleNtn.tex, sampleSec.tex, database1.tex, database2.tex, glossaries.perl. +%% +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{English} +\providetranslation{Glossary}{Glossary} +\providetranslation{Acronyms}{Acronyms} +\providetranslation{Notation (glossaries)}{Notation} +\providetranslation{Description (glossaries)}{Description} +\providetranslation{Symbol (glossaries)}{Symbol} +\providetranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Page List} +\providetranslation{Symbols (glossaries)}{Symbols} +\providetranslation{Numbers (glossaries)}{Numbers} +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `glossaries-dictionary-English.dict'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-French.dict b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-French.dict new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..41e36266967 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-French.dict @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +%% +%% This is file `glossaries-dictionary-French.dict', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% glossaries.dtx (with options: `glossaries-dictionary-French.dict,package') +%% +%% glossaries.dtx +%% Copyright 2008 Nicola Talbot +%% +%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +%% of this license of (at your option) any later version. +%% The latest version of this license is in +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +%% version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Nicola Talbot. +%% +%% This work consists of the files glossaries.dtx and glossaries.ins and the derived files glossaries.sty, glossary-hypernav.sty, glossary-list.sty, glossary-long.sty, glossary-super.sty, glossaries-babel.sty, glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict, glossaries-dictionary-English.dict, glossaries-dictionary-French.dict, glossaries-dictionary-German.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict, minimalgls.tex, sample.tex, sample4col.tex, sampleAcr.tex, sampleAcrDesc.tex, sampleDB.tex, sampleEq.tex, sampleEqPg.tex, sampleNtn.tex, sampleSec.tex, database1.tex, database2.tex, glossaries.perl. +%% +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{French} +\providetranslation{Glossary}{Glossaire} +\providetranslation{Acronyms}{Acronymes} +\providetranslation{Notation (glossaries)}{Terme} +\providetranslation{Description (glossaries)}{Description} +\providetranslation{Symbol (glossaries)}{Symbole} +\providetranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Pages} +\providetranslation{Symbols (glossaries)}{Symboles} +\providetranslation{Numbers (glossaries)}{Nombres} +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `glossaries-dictionary-French.dict'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-German.dict b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-German.dict new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..03ce4a53d80 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-German.dict @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +%% +%% This is file `glossaries-dictionary-German.dict', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% glossaries.dtx (with options: `glossaries-dictionary-German.dict,package') +%% +%% glossaries.dtx +%% Copyright 2008 Nicola Talbot +%% +%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +%% of this license of (at your option) any later version. +%% The latest version of this license is in +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +%% version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Nicola Talbot. +%% +%% This work consists of the files glossaries.dtx and glossaries.ins and the derived files glossaries.sty, glossary-hypernav.sty, glossary-list.sty, glossary-long.sty, glossary-super.sty, glossaries-babel.sty, glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict, glossaries-dictionary-English.dict, glossaries-dictionary-French.dict, glossaries-dictionary-German.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict, minimalgls.tex, sample.tex, sample4col.tex, sampleAcr.tex, sampleAcrDesc.tex, sampleDB.tex, sampleEq.tex, sampleEqPg.tex, sampleNtn.tex, sampleSec.tex, database1.tex, database2.tex, glossaries.perl. +%% +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{German} +\providetranslation{Glossary}{Glossar} +\providetranslation{Acronyms}{Akronyme} +\providetranslation{Notation (glossaries)}{Bezeichnung} +\providetranslation{Description (glossaries)}{Beschreibung} +\providetranslation{Symbol (glossaries)}{Symbol} +\providetranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Seiten} +\providetranslation{Symbols (glossaries)}{Symbole} +\providetranslation{Numbers (glossaries)}{Zahlen} +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `glossaries-dictionary-German.dict'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..72f5e8f3e2c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +%% +%% This is file `glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% glossaries.dtx (with options: `glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict,package') +%% +%% glossaries.dtx +%% Copyright 2008 Nicola Talbot +%% +%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +%% of this license of (at your option) any later version. +%% The latest version of this license is in +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +%% version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Nicola Talbot. +%% +%% This work consists of the files glossaries.dtx and glossaries.ins and the derived files glossaries.sty, glossary-hypernav.sty, glossary-list.sty, glossary-long.sty, glossary-super.sty, glossaries-babel.sty, glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict, glossaries-dictionary-English.dict, glossaries-dictionary-French.dict, glossaries-dictionary-German.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict, minimalgls.tex, sample.tex, sample4col.tex, sampleAcr.tex, sampleAcrDesc.tex, sampleDB.tex, sampleEq.tex, sampleEqPg.tex, sampleNtn.tex, sampleSec.tex, database1.tex, database2.tex, glossaries.perl. +%% +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{Irish} +\providetranslation{Glossary}{Gluais} +\providetranslation{Acronyms}{Acrainmneacha} +\providetranslation{Notation (glossaries)}{Ciall} +\providetranslation{Description (glossaries)}{Tuairisc} +\providetranslation{Symbol (glossaries)}{Comhartha} +\providetranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Leathanaigh} +\providetranslation{Symbols (glossaries)}{Comhartha\'{\i}} +\providetranslation{Numbers (glossaries)}{Uimhreacha} +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f12f26816ce --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +%% +%% This is file `glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% glossaries.dtx (with options: `glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict,package') +%% +%% glossaries.dtx +%% Copyright 2008 Nicola Talbot +%% +%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +%% of this license of (at your option) any later version. +%% The latest version of this license is in +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +%% version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Nicola Talbot. +%% +%% This work consists of the files glossaries.dtx and glossaries.ins and the derived files glossaries.sty, glossary-hypernav.sty, glossary-list.sty, glossary-long.sty, glossary-super.sty, glossaries-babel.sty, glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict, glossaries-dictionary-English.dict, glossaries-dictionary-French.dict, glossaries-dictionary-German.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict, minimalgls.tex, sample.tex, sample4col.tex, sampleAcr.tex, sampleAcrDesc.tex, sampleDB.tex, sampleEq.tex, sampleEqPg.tex, sampleNtn.tex, sampleSec.tex, database1.tex, database2.tex, glossaries.perl. +%% +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{Italian} +\providetranslation{Glossary}{Glossario} +\providetranslation{Acronyms}{Acronimi} +\providetranslation{Notation (glossaries)}{Nomenclatura} +\providetranslation{Description (glossaries)}{Descrizione} +\providetranslation{Symbol (glossaries)}{Simbolo} +\providetranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Elenco delle pagine} +\providetranslation{Symbols (glossaries)}{Simboli} +\providetranslation{Numbers (glossaries)}{Numeri} +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b364df126b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +%% +%% This is file `glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% glossaries.dtx (with options: `glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict,package') +%% +%% glossaries.dtx +%% Copyright 2008 Nicola Talbot +%% +%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +%% of this license of (at your option) any later version. +%% The latest version of this license is in +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +%% version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Nicola Talbot. +%% +%% This work consists of the files glossaries.dtx and glossaries.ins and the derived files glossaries.sty, glossary-hypernav.sty, glossary-list.sty, glossary-long.sty, glossary-super.sty, glossaries-babel.sty, glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict, glossaries-dictionary-English.dict, glossaries-dictionary-French.dict, glossaries-dictionary-German.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict, minimalgls.tex, sample.tex, sample4col.tex, sampleAcr.tex, sampleAcrDesc.tex, sampleDB.tex, sampleEq.tex, sampleEqPg.tex, sampleNtn.tex, sampleSec.tex, database1.tex, database2.tex, glossaries.perl. +%% +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{Magyar} +\providetranslation{Glossary}{Sz\'ojegyz\'ek} +\providetranslation{Acronyms}{Bet\H uszavak} +\providetranslation{Notation (glossaries)}{Kifejez\'es} +\providetranslation{Description (glossaries)}{Magyar\'azat} +\providetranslation{Symbol (glossaries)}{Jel\"ol\'es} +\providetranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Oldalsz\'am} +\providetranslation{Symbols (glossaries)}{Jelek} +\providetranslation{Numbers (glossaries)}{Sz\'amjegyek} +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1579534bbed --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/dict/glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +%% +%% This is file `glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% glossaries.dtx (with options: `glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict,package') +%% +%% glossaries.dtx +%% Copyright 2008 Nicola Talbot +%% +%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +%% of this license of (at your option) any later version. +%% The latest version of this license is in +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +%% version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Nicola Talbot. +%% +%% This work consists of the files glossaries.dtx and glossaries.ins and the derived files glossaries.sty, glossary-hypernav.sty, glossary-list.sty, glossary-long.sty, glossary-super.sty, glossaries-babel.sty, glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict, glossaries-dictionary-English.dict, glossaries-dictionary-French.dict, glossaries-dictionary-German.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict, minimalgls.tex, sample.tex, sample4col.tex, sampleAcr.tex, sampleAcrDesc.tex, sampleDB.tex, sampleEq.tex, sampleEqPg.tex, sampleNtn.tex, sampleSec.tex, database1.tex, database2.tex, glossaries.perl. +%% +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{Spanish} +\providetranslation{Glossary}{Glosario} +\providetranslation{Acronyms}{Siglas} +\providetranslation{Notation (glossaries)}{Entrada} +\providetranslation{Description (glossaries)}{Descripci\'on} +\providetranslation{Symbol (glossaries)}{S\'{\i}mbolo} +\providetranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Lista de p\'aginas} +\providetranslation{Symbols (glossaries)}{S\'{\i}mbolos} +\providetranslation{Numbers (glossaries)}{N\'umeros} +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossaries-babel.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossaries-babel.sty new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..695e13dc5a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossaries-babel.sty @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ +%% +%% This is file `glossaries-babel.sty', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% glossaries.dtx (with options: `glossaries-babel.sty,package') +%% +%% glossaries.dtx +%% Copyright 2008 Nicola Talbot +%% +%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +%% of this license of (at your option) any later version. +%% The latest version of this license is in +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +%% version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Nicola Talbot. +%% +%% This work consists of the files glossaries.dtx and glossaries.ins and the derived files glossaries.sty, glossary-hypernav.sty, glossary-list.sty, glossary-long.sty, glossary-super.sty, glossaries-babel.sty, glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict, glossaries-dictionary-English.dict, glossaries-dictionary-French.dict, glossaries-dictionary-German.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict, minimalgls.tex, sample.tex, sample4col.tex, sampleAcr.tex, sampleAcrDesc.tex, sampleDB.tex, sampleEq.tex, sampleEqPg.tex, sampleNtn.tex, sampleSec.tex, database1.tex, database2.tex, glossaries.perl. +%% +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} +\ProvidesPackage{glossaries-babel}[2008/02/22 v1.0 (NLCT)] +\addto\captionsenglish{% +\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossary}% +\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acronyms}% +\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Notation}% +\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Description}% +\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}% +\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Page List}% +\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbols}% +\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Numbers}% +}% +\addto\captionsgerman{% +\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossar}% +\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Akronyme}% +\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Bezeichnung}% +\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Beschreibung}% +\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}% +\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Seiten}% +\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbole}% +\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Zahlen}} +\addto\captionsngerman{% +\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossar}% +\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Akronyme}% +\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Bezeichnung}% +\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Beschreibung}% +\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}% +\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Seiten}% +\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbole}% +\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Zahlen}} +\addto\captionsitalian{% +\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossario}% +\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acronimi}% +\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Nomenclatura}% +\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Descrizione}% +\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Simbolo}% +\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Elenco delle pagine}% +\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Simboli}% +\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Numeri}} +\addto\captionsdutch{% +\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Woordenlijst}% +\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acroniemen}% +\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Benaming}% +\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Beschrijving}% +\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbool}% +\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Pagina's}% +\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbolen}% +\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Cijfers}} +\addto\captionsspanish{% +\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glosario}% +\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Siglas}% +\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Entrada}% +\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Descripci\'on}% +\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{S\'{\i}mbolo}% +\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Lista de p\'aginas}% +\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{S\'{\i}mbolos}% +\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{N\'umeros}} +\addto\captionsfrench{% +\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossaire}% +\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acronymes}% +\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Terme}% +\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Description}% +\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbole}% +\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Pages}% +\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symboles}% +\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Nombres}} +\addto\captionsdanish{% +\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Ordliste}% +\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Akronymer}% +\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Symbolforklaring}% +\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Beskrivelse}% +\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}% +\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Side}% +\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symboler}% +\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Tal}} +\addto\captionsirish{% +\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Gluais}% +\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acrainmneacha}% +\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Ciall}% +\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Tuairisc}% +\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Comhartha}% +\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Comhartha\'{\i}}% +\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Leathanaigh}% +\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Uimhreacha}} +\addto\captionsmagyar{% +\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Sz\'ojegyz\'ek}% +\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Bet\H uszavak}% +\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Kifejez\'es}% +\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Magyar\'azat}% +\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Jel\"ol\'es}% +\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Oldalsz\'am}% +\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Jelek}% +\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Sz\'amjegyek}% +} +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `glossaries-babel.sty'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossaries.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossaries.sty index 2e390251c1c..e75d00d56eb 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossaries.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossaries.sty @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ %% glossaries.dtx (with options: `glossaries.sty,package') %% %% glossaries.dtx -%% Copyright 2007 Nicola Talbot +%% Copyright 2008 Nicola Talbot %% %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the %% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ %% %% The Current Maintainer of this work is Nicola Talbot. %% -%% This work consists of the files glossaries.dtx and glossaries.ins and the derived files glossaries.sty, glossary-hypernav.sty, glossary-list.sty, glossary-long.sty, glossary-super.sty, glossaries.perl. +%% This work consists of the files glossaries.dtx and glossaries.ins and the derived files glossaries.sty, glossary-hypernav.sty, glossary-list.sty, glossary-long.sty, glossary-super.sty, glossaries-babel.sty, glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict, glossaries-dictionary-English.dict, glossaries-dictionary-French.dict, glossaries-dictionary-German.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict, minimalgls.tex, sample.tex, sample4col.tex, sampleAcr.tex, sampleAcrDesc.tex, sampleDB.tex, sampleEq.tex, sampleEqPg.tex, sampleNtn.tex, sampleSec.tex, database1.tex, database2.tex, glossaries.perl. %% %% \CharacterTable %% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z @@ -39,16 +39,31 @@ %% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| %% Right brace \} Tilde \~} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} -\ProvidesPackage{glossaries}[2007/10/13 v1.08 (NLCT)] +\ProvidesPackage{glossaries}[2008/02/22 v1.11 (NLCT)] \RequirePackage{ifthen} \RequirePackage{xkeyval}[2006/11/18] -\RequirePackage{xspace} +\RequirePackage{amsgen} \define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[gls]{toc}[true]{} +\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[gls]{numberline}[true]{} \@ifundefined{chapter}{\newcommand*{\@@glossarysec}{section}}{% \newcommand*{\@@glossarysec}{chapter}} \define@choicekey{glossaries.sty}{section}{part,chapter,section,% subsection,subsubsection,paragraph,subparagraph}[section]{% \renewcommand*{\@@glossarysec}{#1}} +\newcommand*{\@@glossarysecstar}{*} +\newcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{} +\define@choicekey{glossaries.sty}{numberedsection}[\val\nr]{% +false,nolabel,autolabel}[nolabel]{% +\ifcase\nr\relax + \renewcommand*{\@@glossarysecstar}{*}% + \renewcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{}% +\or + \renewcommand*{\@@glossarysecstar}{}% + \renewcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{}% +\or + \renewcommand*{\@@glossarysecstar}{}% + \renewcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{\label{\@glo@type}}% +\fi} \newcommand*{\@glossary@default@style}{list} \define@key{glossaries.sty}{style}{% \renewcommand*{\@glossary@default@style}{#1}} @@ -92,6 +107,23 @@ name=true]{% \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizesymbol}{}% }{\setkeys[gls]{sanitize}{#1}}% } +\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[gls]{translate}[true]{} +\glstranslatefalse +\@ifpackageloaded{translator}{\glstranslatetrue}{% +\@ifpackageloaded{babel}{\glstranslatetrue}{}} +\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[glsacr]{footnote}[true]{% +\ifthenelse{\boolean{glsacrdescription}}{}% +{\renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizedesc}{}}% +} +\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[glsacr]{description}[true]{% + \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizesymbol}{}% +} +\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[glsacr]{smallcaps}[true]{% + \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizesymbol}{}% +} +\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[glsacr]{dua}[true]{% + \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizesymbol}{}% +} \ProcessOptionsX \ifthenelse{\equal{\glscounter}{section}}{% \@ifundefined{chapter}{}{% @@ -106,100 +138,19 @@ name=true]{% \providecommand*{\pagelistname}{Page List} \providecommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbols} \providecommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Numbers} -\@ifpackageloaded{babel}{% -\addto\captionsenglish{% -\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossary}% -\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acronyms}% -\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Notation}% -\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Description}% -\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}% -\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Page List}% -\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbols}% -\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Numbers}% -}% -\addto\captionsgerman{% -\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossar}% -\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Akronyme}% -\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Bezeichnung}% -\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Beschreibung}% -\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}% -\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Seiten}% -\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbole}% -\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Zahlen}} -\addto\captionsngerman{% -\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossar}% -\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Akronyme}% -\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Bezeichnung}% -\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Beschreibung}% -\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}% -\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Seiten}% -\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbole}% -\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Zahlen}} -\addto\captionsitalian{% -\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossario}% -\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acronimi}% -\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Nomenclatura}% -\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Descrizione}% -\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Simbolo}% -\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Elenco delle pagine}% -\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Simboli}% -\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Numeri}} -\addto\captionsdutch{% -\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Woordenlijst}% -\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acroniemen}% -\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Benaming}% -\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Beschrijving}% -\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbool}% -\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Pagina's}% -\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbolen}% -\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Cijfers}} -\addto\captionsspanish{% -\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glosario}% -\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Siglas}% -\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Entrada}% -\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Descripci\'on}% -\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{S\'{\i}mbolo}% -\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Lista de p\'aginas}% -\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{S\'{\i}mbolos}% -\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{N\'umeros}} -\addto\captionsfrench{% -\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossaire}% -\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acronymes}% -\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Terme}% -\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Description}% -\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbole}% -\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Pages}% -\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symboles}% -\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Nombres}} -\addto\captionsdanish{% -\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Ordliste}% -\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Akronymer}% -\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Symbolforklaring}% -\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Beskrivelse}% -\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}% -\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Side}% -\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symboler}% -\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Tal}} -\addto\captionsirish{% -\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Gluais}% -\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acrainmneacha}% 'Acronyms' -\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Ciall}% -\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Tuairisc}% -\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Comhartha}% -\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Comhartha\'{\i}}%OR -\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Leathanaigh}% -\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Uimhreacha}} -\addto\captionsmagyar{% -\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Sz\'ojegyz\'ek}% -\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Bet\H uszavak}% -\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Kifejez\'es}% -\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Magyar\'azat}% -\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Jel\"ol\'es}% -\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Oldalsz\'am}% -\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Jelek}% -\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Sz\'amjegyek}% -} -}{} +\ifglstranslate +\@ifpackageloaded{translator}{\usedictionary{glossaries-dictionary}% +\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{\translate{Glossary}}% +\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{\translate{Acronyms}}% +\renewcommand*{\entryname}{\translate{Notation (glossaries)}}% +\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{\translate{Description (glossaries)}}% +\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{\translate{Symbol (glossaries)}}% +\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{\translate{Page List (glossaries)}}% +\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{\translate{Symbols (glossaries)}}% +\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{\translate{Numbers (glossaries)}}% +}{% +\@ifpackageloaded{babel}{\RequirePackage{glossaries-babel}}{}} +\fi \newcommand*{\glspostdescription}{.} \providecommand*{\istfilename}{\jobname.ist} \newcommand*{\@istfilename}[1]{} @@ -217,19 +168,38 @@ name=true]{% \@glossarysection{#1}{#2}}{\@p@glossarysection{#1}{#2}}% \@mkboth{\glossarytoctitle}{\glossarytoctitle}% } +\newcommand*{\setglossarysection}[1]{% +\setkeys{glossaries.sty}{section=#1}} \newcommand*{\@glossarysection}[2]{% -\csname\@@glossarysec\endcsname*{#2}% -\@gls@toc{#1}{\@@glossarysec}} +\ifx\@@glossarysecstar\@empty + \csname\@@glossarysec\endcsname{#2}% +\else + \csname\@@glossarysec\endcsname*{#2}% + \@gls@toc{#1}{\@@glossarysec}% +\fi +\@@glossaryseclabel} \newcommand*{\@p@glossarysection}[2]{% \gls@doclearpage -\phantomsection\@gls@toc{#1}{\@@glossarysec}% -\csname\@@glossarysec\endcsname*{#2}} +\phantomsection +\ifx\@@glossarysecstar\@empty + \csname\@@glossarysec\endcsname{#2}% +\else + \@gls@toc{#1}{\@@glossarysec}% + \csname\@@glossarysec\endcsname*{#2}% +\fi +\@@glossaryseclabel} \newcommand{\gls@doclearpage}{% \ifthenelse{\equal{\@@glossarysec}{chapter}}{% \@ifundefined{cleardoublepage}{\clearpage}{\cleardoublepage}}{}% } \newcommand*{\@gls@toc}[2]{% -\ifglstoc \addcontentsline{toc}{#2}{#1}\fi} +\ifglstoc + \ifglsnumberline + \addcontentsline{toc}{#2}{\numberline{}#1}% + \else + \addcontentsline{toc}{#2}{#1}% + \fi +\fi} \newcommand*{\forallglossaries}[3][\@glo@types]{% \@for#2:=#1\do{\ifthenelse{\equal{#2}{}}{}{#3}}} \newcommand*{\forglsentries}[3][\glsdefaulttype]{% @@ -475,7 +445,7 @@ counter as its value}}{% \expandafter\@gls@updatechecked\@gls@checkedmkidx{#1}% } \def\@gls@updatechecked#1\@nil#2{\def#2{#1}} -\toksdef\@gls@tmpb=2 +\newtoks\@gls@tmpb \def\@gls@checkquote#1"#2"#3\null{% \@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}% \toks@={#1}% @@ -669,93 +639,405 @@ counter as its value}}{% \newcommand*{\gls}{\@ifstar\@sgls\@gls} \newcommand*{\@sgls}[1][]{\@gls[hyper=false,#1]} \newcommand*{\@gls}[2][]{% -\@ifnextchar[{\@gls@{#1}{#2}}{\@gls@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\new@ifnextchar[{\@gls@{#1}{#2}}{\@gls@{#1}{#2}[]}} \def\@gls@#1#2[#3]{% \glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\def\@gls@link@opts{#1}% +\def\@gls@link@label{#2}% \ifglsused{#2}{\protected@edef\@glo@text{% \csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname {\glsentrytext{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}{% \protected@edef\@glo@text{% \csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname {\glsentryfirst{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}% -\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}% +\ifglsused{#2}{% + \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}% +}{% + \ifglsacrfootnote + \@gls@link[#1,hyper=false]{#2}{\@glo@text}% + \else + \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}% + \fi +}% \glsunset{#2}}% -\xspace} +} \newcommand*{\Gls}{\@ifstar\@sGls\@Gls} \newcommand*{\@sGls}[1][]{\@Gls[hyper=false,#1]} \newcommand*{\@Gls}[2][]{% -\@ifnextchar[{\@Gls@{#1}{#2}}{\@Gls@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\new@ifnextchar[{\@Gls@{#1}{#2}}{\@Gls@{#1}{#2}[]}} \def\@Gls@#1#2[#3]{% \glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\def\@gls@link@opts{#1}% +\def\@gls@link@label{#2}% \ifglsused{#2}{\protected@edef\@glo@text{% \csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname {\glsentrytext{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}{% \protected@edef\@glo@text{% \csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname {\glsentryfirst{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}% -\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% +\ifglsused{#2}{% + \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% +}{% + \ifglsacrfootnote + \@gls@link[#1,hyper=false]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% + \else + \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% + \fi +}% \glsunset{#2}}% -\xspace} +} \newcommand*{\GLS}{\@ifstar\@sGLS\@GLS} \newcommand*{\@sGLS}[1][]{\@GLS[hyper=false,#1]} \newcommand*{\@GLS}[2][]{% -\@ifnextchar[{\@GLS@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLS@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLS@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLS@{#1}{#2}[]}} \def\@GLS@#1#2[#3]{% \glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\def\@gls@link@opts{#1}% +\def\@gls@link@label{#2}% \ifglsused{#2}{\protected@edef\@glo@text{% \csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname {\glsentrytext{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}{% \protected@edef\@glo@text{% \csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname {\glsentryfirst{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}% -\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% +\ifglsused{#2}{% + \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% +}{% + \ifglsacrfootnote + \@gls@link[#1,hyper=false]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% + \else + \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% + \fi +}% \glsunset{#2}}% -\xspace} +} \newcommand*{\glspl}{\@ifstar\@sglspl\@glspl} \newcommand*{\@sglspl}[1][]{\@glspl[hyper=false,#1]} \newcommand*{\@glspl}[2][]{% -\@ifnextchar[{\@glspl@{#1}{#2}}{\@glspl@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\new@ifnextchar[{\@glspl@{#1}{#2}}{\@glspl@{#1}{#2}[]}} \def\@glspl@#1#2[#3]{% \glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\def\@gls@link@opts{#1}% +\def\@gls@link@label{#2}% \ifglsused{#2}{\protected@edef\@glo@text{% \csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname {\glsentryplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}{% \protected@edef\@glo@text{% \csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname {\glsentryfirstplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}% -\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}% +\ifglsused{#2}{% + \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}% +}{% + \ifglsacrfootnote + \@gls@link[#1,hyper=false]{#2}{\@glo@text}% + \else + \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}% + \fi +}% \glsunset{#2}}% -\xspace} +} \newcommand*{\Glspl}{\@ifstar\@sGlspl\@Glspl} \newcommand*{\@sGlspl}[1][]{\@Glspl[hyper=false,#1]} \newcommand*{\@Glspl}[2][]{% -\@ifnextchar[{\@Glspl@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glspl@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glspl@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glspl@{#1}{#2}[]}} \def\@Glspl@#1#2[#3]{% \glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\def\@gls@link@opts{#1}% +\def\@gls@link@label{#2}% \ifglsused{#2}{\protected@edef\@glo@text{% \csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname {\glsentryplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}{% \protected@edef\@glo@text{% \csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname {\glsentryfirstplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}% -\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% +\ifglsused{#2}{% + \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% +}{% + \ifglsacrfootnote + \@gls@link[#1,hyper=false]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% + \else + \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% + \fi +}% \glsunset{#2}}% -\xspace} +} \newcommand*{\GLSpl}{\@ifstar\@sGLSpl\@GLSpl} \newcommand*{\@sGLSpl}[1][]{\@GLSpl[hyper=false,#1]} \newcommand*{\@GLSpl}[2][]{% -\@ifnextchar[{\@GLSpl@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSpl@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSpl@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSpl@{#1}{#2}[]}} \def\@GLSpl@#1#2[#3]{% \glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\def\@gls@link@opts{#1}% +\def\@gls@link@label{#2}% \ifglsused{#2}{\protected@edef\@glo@text{% \csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname {\glsentryplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}{% \protected@edef\@glo@text{% \csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname {\glsentryfirstplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}% -\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% +\ifglsused{#2}{% + \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% +}{% + \ifglsacrfootnote + \@gls@link[#1,hyper=false]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% + \else + \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% + \fi +}% \glsunset{#2}}% -\xspace} +} +\newcommand*{\glstext}{\@ifstar\@sglstext\@glstext} +\newcommand*{\@sglstext}[1][]{\@glstext[hyper=false,#1]} +\newcommand*{\@glstext}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}}{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@glstext@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentrytext{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}% +}% +} +\newcommand*{\GLStext}{\@ifstar\@sGLStext\@GLStext} +\newcommand*{\@sGLStext}[1][]{\@GLStext[hyper=false,#1]} +\newcommand*{\@GLStext}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLStext@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLStext@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@GLStext@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentrytext{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% +}% +} +\newcommand*{\Glstext}{\@ifstar\@sGlstext\@Glstext} +\newcommand*{\@sGlstext}[1][]{\@Glstext[hyper=false,#1]} +\newcommand*{\@Glstext}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glstext@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glstext@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@Glstext@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentrytext{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% +}% +} +\newcommand*{\glsfirst}{\@ifstar\@sglsfirst\@glsfirst} +\newcommand*{\@sglsfirst}[1][]{\@glsfirst[hyper=false,#1]} +\newcommand*{\@glsfirst}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@glsfirst@{#1}{#2}}{\@glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@glsfirst@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentryfirst{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}% +}% +} +\newcommand*{\Glsfirst}{\@ifstar\@sGlsfirst\@Glsfirst} +\newcommand*{\@sGlsfirst}[1][]{\@Glsfirst[hyper=false,#1]} +\newcommand*{\@Glsfirst}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glsfirst@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@Glsfirst@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentryfirst{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% +}% +} +\newcommand*{\GLSfirst}{\@ifstar\@sGLSfirst\@GLSfirst} +\newcommand*{\@sGLSfirst}[1][]{\@GLSfirst[hyper=false,#1]} +\newcommand*{\@GLSfirst}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSfirst@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSfirst@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@GLSfirst@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentryfirst{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% +}% +} +\newcommand*{\glsplural}{\@ifstar\@sglsplural\@glsplural} +\newcommand*{\@sglsplural}[1][]{\@glsplural[hyper=false,#1]} +\newcommand*{\@glsplural}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@glsplural@{#1}{#2}}{\@glsplural@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@glsplural@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentryplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}% +}% +} +\newcommand*{\Glsplural}{\@ifstar\@sGlsplural\@Glsplural} +\newcommand*{\@sGlsplural}[1][]{\@Glsplural[hyper=false,#1]} +\newcommand*{\@Glsplural}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glsplural@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glsplural@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@Glsplural@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentryplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% +}% +} +\newcommand*{\GLSplural}{\@ifstar\@sGLSplural\@GLSplural} +\newcommand*{\@sGLSplural}[1][]{\@GLSplural[hyper=false,#1]} +\newcommand*{\@GLSplural}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSplural@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSplural@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@GLSplural@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentryplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% +}% +} +\newcommand*{\glsfirstplural}{\@ifstar\@sglsfirstplural\@glsfirstplural} +\newcommand*{\@sglsfirstplural}[1][]{\@glsfirstplural[hyper=false,#1]} +\newcommand*{\@glsfirstplural}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@glsfirstplural@{#1}{#2}}{\@glsfirstplural@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@glsfirstplural@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentryfirstplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}% +}% +} +\newcommand*{\Glsfirstplural}{\@ifstar\@sGlsfirstplural\@Glsfirstplural} +\newcommand*{\@sGlsfirstplural}[1][]{\@Glsfirstplural[hyper=false,#1]} +\newcommand*{\@Glsfirstplural}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glsfirstplural@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glsfirstplural@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@Glsfirstplural@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentryfirstplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% +}% +} +\newcommand*{\GLSfirstplural}{\@ifstar\@sGLSfirstplural\@GLSfirstplural} +\newcommand*{\@sGLSfirstplural}[1][]{\@GLSfirstplural[hyper=false,#1]} +\newcommand*{\@GLSfirstplural}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSfirstplural@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSfirstplural@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@GLSfirstplural@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentryfirstplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% +}% +} +\newcommand*{\glsname}{\@ifstar\@sglsname\@glsname} +\newcommand*{\@sglsname}[1][]{\@glsname[hyper=false,#1]} +\newcommand*{\@glsname}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@glsname@{#1}{#2}}{\@glsname@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@glsname@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentryname{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}% +}% +} +\newcommand*{\Glsname}{\@ifstar\@sGlsname\@Glsname} +\newcommand*{\@sGlsname}[1][]{\@Glsname[hyper=false,#1]} +\newcommand*{\@Glsname}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glsname@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glsname@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@Glsname@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentryname{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% +}% +} +\newcommand*{\GLSname}{\@ifstar\@sGLSname\@GLSname} +\newcommand*{\@sGLSname}[1][]{\@GLSname[hyper=false,#1]} +\newcommand*{\@GLSname}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSname@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSname@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@GLSname@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentryname{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% +}% +} +\newcommand*{\glsdesc}{\@ifstar\@sglsdesc\@glsdesc} +\newcommand*{\@sglsdesc}[1][]{\@glsdesc[hyper=false,#1]} +\newcommand*{\@glsdesc}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@glsdesc@{#1}{#2}}{\@glsdesc@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@glsdesc@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}% +}% +} +\newcommand*{\Glsdesc}{\@ifstar\@sGlsdesc\@Glsdesc} +\newcommand*{\@sGlsdesc}[1][]{\@Glsdesc[hyper=false,#1]} +\newcommand*{\@Glsdesc}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glsdesc@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glsdesc@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@Glsdesc@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% +}% +} +\newcommand*{\GLSdesc}{\@ifstar\@sGLSdesc\@GLSdesc} +\newcommand*{\@sGLSdesc}[1][]{\@GLSdesc[hyper=false,#1]} +\newcommand*{\@GLSdesc}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSdesc@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSdesc@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@GLSdesc@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% +}% +} +\newcommand*{\glssymbol}{\@ifstar\@sglssymbol\@glssymbol} +\newcommand*{\@sglssymbol}[1][]{\@glssymbol[hyper=false,#1]} +\newcommand*{\@glssymbol}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@glssymbol@{#1}{#2}}{\@glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@glssymbol@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}% +}% +} +\newcommand*{\Glssymbol}{\@ifstar\@sGlssymbol\@Glssymbol} +\newcommand*{\@sGlssymbol}[1][]{\@Glssymbol[hyper=false,#1]} +\newcommand*{\@Glssymbol}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glssymbol@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@Glssymbol@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}% +}% +} +\newcommand*{\GLSsymbol}{\@ifstar\@sGLSsymbol\@GLSsymbol} +\newcommand*{\@sGLSsymbol}[1][]{\@GLSsymbol[hyper=false,#1]} +\newcommand*{\@GLSsymbol}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSsymbol@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSsymbol@{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@GLSsymbol@#1#2[#3]{% +\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}% +\protected@edef\@glo@text{% +\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname +{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}% +\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}% +}% +} \newcommand*{\glsentryname}[1]{\csname glo@#1@name\endcsname} \newcommand*{\Glsentryname}[1]{\expandafter \MakeUppercase\csname glo@#1@name\endcsname} @@ -976,15 +1258,211 @@ style `#1' undefined}{}}{% \newcommand*{\hypersc}[1]{\textsc{\glshypernumber{#1}}} \newcommand*{\hyperemph}[1]{\emph{\glshypernumber{#1}}} \ifglsacronym -\newglossary[alg]{acronym}{acr}{acn}{\acronymname} -\renewcommand{\acronymtype}{acronym} -\defglsdisplay[acronym]{#1#4}\defglsdisplayfirst[acronym]{#1#4} + \newglossary[alg]{acronym}{acr}{acn}{\acronymname} + \renewcommand{\acronymtype}{acronym} + \defglsdisplay[acronym]{#1#4} + \defglsdisplayfirst[acronym]{#1#4} \fi \newcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{% \newglossaryentry{#2}{type=\acronymtype,% name={#3},description={#4},text={#3},% first={#4 (#3)},plural={#3s},firstplural={#4s (#3s)},#1}} \@onlypreamble{\newacronym} +\newcommand*{\acrshort}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@acrshort{#1}{#2}}{\@acrshort{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@acrshort#1#2[#3]{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]} +\newcommand*{\Acrshort}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@Acrshort{#1}{#2}}{\@Acrshort{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@Acrshort#1#2[#3]{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]} +\newcommand*{\ACRshort}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@ACRshort{#1}{#2}}{\@ACRshort{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@ACRshort#1#2[#3]{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]} +\newcommand*{\acrlong}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@acrlong{#1}{#2}}{\@acrlong{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@glsdesc@{#1}{#2}[#3]} +\newcommand*{\Acrlong}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@Acrlong{#1}{#2}}{\@Acrlong{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@Acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@glsdesc@{#1}{#2}[#3]} +\newcommand*{\ACRlong}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@ACRlong{#1}{#2}}{\@ACRlong{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@ACRlong#1#2[#3]{\@glsdesc@{#1}{#2}[#3]} +\newcommand*{\acrfull}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@acrfull{#1}{#2}}{\@acrfull{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3]} +\newcommand*{\Acrfull}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@Acrfull{#1}{#2}}{\@Acrfull{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@Acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@Glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3]} +\newcommand*{\ACRfull}[2][]{% +\new@ifnextchar[{\@ACRfull{#1}{#2}}{\@ACRfull{#1}{#2}[]}} +\def\@ACRfull#1#2[#3]{\@GLSfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3]} +\newcommand{\acronymfont}[1]{#1} +\ifglsacrdescription + \ifglsacrfootnote + \renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{% + \newglossaryentry{#2}{type=\acronymtype,% + name={#3},% + symbol={#4},% + #1}} + \def\@acrshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} + \def\@Acrshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@Glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} + \def\@ACRshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@GLStext@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} + \def\@acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@Acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@Glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@ACRlong#1#2[#3]{\@GLSsymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} + \def\@Acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@Glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} + \def\@ACRfull#1#2[#3]{\@GLSsymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@GLStext@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} + \defglsdisplayfirst[\acronymtype]{% + \acronymfont{#1}#4\noexpand\footnote{% + \noexpand\glslink[\@gls@link@opts]{\@gls@link@label}{#3}}}% + \defglsdisplay[\acronymtype]{\acronymfont{#1}#4}% + \ifglsacrsmallcaps + \renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{\textsc{#1}} + \fi + \ifglsacrdua + \PackageError{glossaries}{Option clash: `footnote' and `dua' + can't both be set}{}% + \fi + \else + \ifglsacrdua + \ifglsacrsmallcaps + \PackageError{glossaries}{Option clash: `smallcaps' and `dua' + can't both be set}{}% + \fi + \renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{% + \newglossaryentry{#2}{type=\acronymtype,% + name={#4},% + first={#4},% + symbol={#3},% + #1}} + \def\@acrshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} + \def\@Acrshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@Glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} + \def\@ACRshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@GLSsymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} + \def\@acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@Acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@Glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@ACRlong#1#2[#3]{\@GLSfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} + \def\@Acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@Glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} + \def\@ACRfull#1#2[#3]{\@GLSfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@GLSsymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} + \defglsdisplayfirst[\acronymtype]{#1#4} + \defglsdisplay[\acronymtype]{#1#4} + \else + \renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{% + \newglossaryentry{#2}{type=\acronymtype,% + name={#3},% + first={#4},% + symbol={#3},% + #1}} + \def\@acrshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} + \def\@Acrshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@Glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} + \def\@ACRshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@GLStext@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} + \def\@acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@Acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@Glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@ACRlong#1#2[#3]{\@GLSfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} + \def\@Acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@Glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} + \def\@ACRfull#1#2[#3]{\@GLSfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@GLSsymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} + \defglsdisplayfirst[\acronymtype]{#1#4 (\acronymfont{#3})} + \defglsdisplay[\acronymtype]{\acronymfont{#1}#4} + \ifglsacrsmallcaps + \renewcommand{\acronymfont}[1]{\textsc{#1}} + \fi + \fi + \fi +\else + \ifglsacrfootnote + \renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{% + \newglossaryentry{#2}{type=\acronymtype,% + name={#3},% + description={#4},% + #1}} + \defglsdisplayfirst[\acronymtype]{% + \acronymfont{#1}#4\noexpand\footnote{% + \noexpand\glslink[\@gls@link@opts]{\@gls@link@label}{#2}}}% + \defglsdisplay[\acronymtype]{\acronymfont{#1}#4}% + \def\@acrshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} + \def\@Acrshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@Glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} + \def\@ACRshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@GLStext@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} + \def\@acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@glsdesc@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@Acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@Glsdesc@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@ACRlong#1#2[#3]{\@GLSdesc@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@glsdesc@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3])} + \def\@Acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@Glsdesc@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3])} + \def\@ACRfull#1#2[#3]{\@GLSdesc@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\@GLStext@{#1}{#2}[#3])} + \ifglsacrsmallcaps + \renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{\textsc{#1}}% + \fi + \ifglsacrdua + \PackageError{glossaries}{Option clash: `footnote' and `dua' + can't both be set}{}% + \fi + \else + \ifglsacrsmallcaps + \renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{% + \newglossaryentry{#2}{type=\acronymtype,% + name={#3},% + first={#4},% + description={#4},% + symbol={#3},% + #1}} + \defglsdisplayfirst[\acronymtype]{#1#4 (\acronymfont{#3})} + \defglsdisplay[\acronymtype]{\acronymfont{#1}#4} + \renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{\textsc{#1}} + \def\@acrshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} + \def\@Acrshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@Glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} + \def\@ACRshort#1#2[#3]{\acronymfont{\@GLStext@{#1}{#2}[#3]}} + \def\@acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@Acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@Glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@ACRlong#1#2[#3]{\@GLSfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} + \def\@Acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@Glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} + \def\@ACRfull#1#2[#3]{\@GLSfirst@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@GLStext@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} + \ifglsacrdua + \PackageError{glossaries}{Option clash: `smallcaps' and `dua' + can't both be set}{}% + \fi + \else + \ifglsacrdua + \renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{% + \newglossaryentry{#2}{type=\acronymtype,% + name={#3},% + description={#4},% + text={#4},% + symbol={#3},% + #1}} + \defglsdisplayfirst[\acronymtype]{#1#4} + \defglsdisplay[\acronymtype]{#1#4} + \def\@acrshort#1#2[#3]{\@glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@Acrshort#1#2[#3]{\@Glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@ACRshort#1#2[#3]{\@GLSsymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@Acrlong#1#2[#3]{\@Glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@ACRlong#1#2[#3]{\@GLStext@{#1}{#2}[#3]} + \def\@acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} + \def\@Acrfull#1#2[#3]{\@Glstext@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} + \def\@ACRfull#1#2[#3]{\@GLStext@{#1}{#2}[#3] + (\acronymfont{\@GLSsymbol@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} + \fi + \fi + \fi +\fi \RequirePackage{glossary-hypernav} \RequirePackage{glossary-list} \RequirePackage{glossary-long} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-hypernav.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-hypernav.sty index 8e7e9b6d670..0b165f3f5c2 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-hypernav.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-hypernav.sty @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ %% glossaries.dtx (with options: `glossary-hypernav.sty,package') %% %% glossaries.dtx -%% Copyright 2007 Nicola Talbot +%% Copyright 2008 Nicola Talbot %% %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the %% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ %% %% The Current Maintainer of this work is Nicola Talbot. %% -%% This work consists of the files glossaries.dtx and glossaries.ins and the derived files glossaries.sty, glossary-hypernav.sty, glossary-list.sty, glossary-long.sty, glossary-super.sty, glossaries.perl. +%% This work consists of the files glossaries.dtx and glossaries.ins and the derived files glossaries.sty, glossary-hypernav.sty, glossary-list.sty, glossary-long.sty, glossary-super.sty, glossaries-babel.sty, glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict, glossaries-dictionary-English.dict, glossaries-dictionary-French.dict, glossaries-dictionary-German.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict, minimalgls.tex, sample.tex, sample4col.tex, sampleAcr.tex, sampleAcrDesc.tex, sampleDB.tex, sampleEq.tex, sampleEqPg.tex, sampleNtn.tex, sampleSec.tex, database1.tex, database2.tex, glossaries.perl. %% %% \CharacterTable %% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-list.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-list.sty index fe07f6ae2ab..66bc2e17350 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-list.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-list.sty @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ %% glossaries.dtx (with options: `glossary-list.sty,package') %% %% glossaries.dtx -%% Copyright 2007 Nicola Talbot +%% Copyright 2008 Nicola Talbot %% %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the %% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ %% %% The Current Maintainer of this work is Nicola Talbot. %% -%% This work consists of the files glossaries.dtx and glossaries.ins and the derived files glossaries.sty, glossary-hypernav.sty, glossary-list.sty, glossary-long.sty, glossary-super.sty, glossaries.perl. +%% This work consists of the files glossaries.dtx and glossaries.ins and the derived files glossaries.sty, glossary-hypernav.sty, glossary-list.sty, glossary-long.sty, glossary-super.sty, glossaries-babel.sty, glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict, glossaries-dictionary-English.dict, glossaries-dictionary-French.dict, glossaries-dictionary-German.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict, minimalgls.tex, sample.tex, sample4col.tex, sampleAcr.tex, sampleAcrDesc.tex, sampleDB.tex, sampleEq.tex, sampleEqPg.tex, sampleNtn.tex, sampleSec.tex, database1.tex, database2.tex, glossaries.perl. %% %% \CharacterTable %% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ %% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ %% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| %% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -\ProvidesPackage{glossary-list}[2007/10/04 v1.02 (NLCT)] +\ProvidesPackage{glossary-list}[2008/02/16 v1.03 (NLCT)] \newglossarystyle{list}{% \renewenvironment{theglossary}{\begin{description}}{\end{description}}% \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}% @@ -69,6 +69,13 @@ \item[]\glsnavigation}% \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{% \item[\glsnavhypertarget{##1}{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}]}} +\newlength\glslistdottedwidth +\setlength{\glslistdottedwidth}{.5\linewidth} +\newglossarystyle{listdotted}{% +\glossarystyle{list}% +\renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{% +\item[]\makebox[\glslistdottedwidth][l]{\@glstarget{glo:##1}{##2}% +\unskip\leaders\hbox to 2.9mm{\hss.}\hfill\strut}##3}} \endinput %% %% End of file `glossary-list.sty'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-long.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-long.sty index b74e44fe426..c17680f813c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-long.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-long.sty @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ %% glossaries.dtx (with options: `glossary-long.sty,package') %% %% glossaries.dtx -%% Copyright 2007 Nicola Talbot +%% Copyright 2008 Nicola Talbot %% %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the %% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ %% %% The Current Maintainer of this work is Nicola Talbot. %% -%% This work consists of the files glossaries.dtx and glossaries.ins and the derived files glossaries.sty, glossary-hypernav.sty, glossary-list.sty, glossary-long.sty, glossary-super.sty, glossaries.perl. +%% This work consists of the files glossaries.dtx and glossaries.ins and the derived files glossaries.sty, glossary-hypernav.sty, glossary-list.sty, glossary-long.sty, glossary-super.sty, glossaries-babel.sty, glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict, glossaries-dictionary-English.dict, glossaries-dictionary-French.dict, glossaries-dictionary-German.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict, minimalgls.tex, sample.tex, sample4col.tex, sampleAcr.tex, sampleAcrDesc.tex, sampleDB.tex, sampleEq.tex, sampleEqPg.tex, sampleNtn.tex, sampleSec.tex, database1.tex, database2.tex, glossaries.perl. %% %% \CharacterTable %% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-super.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-super.sty index 80deb72b175..b05bbd1cf8a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-super.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-super.sty @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ %% glossaries.dtx (with options: `glossary-super.sty,package') %% %% glossaries.dtx -%% Copyright 2007 Nicola Talbot +%% Copyright 2008 Nicola Talbot %% %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the %% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ %% %% The Current Maintainer of this work is Nicola Talbot. %% -%% This work consists of the files glossaries.dtx and glossaries.ins and the derived files glossaries.sty, glossary-hypernav.sty, glossary-list.sty, glossary-long.sty, glossary-super.sty, glossaries.perl. +%% This work consists of the files glossaries.dtx and glossaries.ins and the derived files glossaries.sty, glossary-hypernav.sty, glossary-list.sty, glossary-long.sty, glossary-super.sty, glossaries-babel.sty, glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict, glossaries-dictionary-English.dict, glossaries-dictionary-French.dict, glossaries-dictionary-German.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict, glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict, minimalgls.tex, sample.tex, sample4col.tex, sampleAcr.tex, sampleAcrDesc.tex, sampleDB.tex, sampleEq.tex, sampleEqPg.tex, sampleNtn.tex, sampleSec.tex, database1.tex, database2.tex, glossaries.perl. %% %% \CharacterTable %% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/bin/ctan2tds b/Master/tlpkg/bin/ctan2tds index adda207427a..22d0c4253e9 100755 --- a/Master/tlpkg/bin/ctan2tds +++ b/Master/tlpkg/bin/ctan2tds @@ -180,6 +180,7 @@ chdir $startdir || die "chdir($startdir) failed: $!"; # back to raw 'gfsneohellenic', "&MAKEflatten", 'gfsporson', "&MAKEflatten", 'gfssolomos', "&MAKEflatten", + 'glossaries', "&MAKEcopy", 'glhyph', "die 'hyphenation madness needs work, sorry'", 'graphics', "&MAKEcopy", # we use latex-tds/graphics.zip 'graphicxsp', "die 'skipping, requires adobe distiller'", @@ -419,6 +420,7 @@ chdir $startdir || die "chdir($startdir) failed: $!"; # back to raw %specialpostaction = ( 'babel' => '&POSTbabel', 'fpl' => '&POSTfpl', + 'glossaries' => '&POSTglossaries', 'ibygrk' => '&POSTibygrk', 'interactiveworkbook' => '&POSTinteractiveworkbook', 'pgf' => '&POSTpgf', @@ -3278,6 +3280,13 @@ sub POSTfpl &SYSTEM ("$MV README.source $DEST/source/fonts/fpl/README"); } +sub POSTglossaries +{ + my $wdir = "$TOPDEST/bin/win32"; + &SYSTEM ("mkdir -p $wdir"); + &SYSTEM ("$CP $DEST/scripts/glossaries/makeglossaries.bat $wdir"); +} + sub FLATTEN_PREHOOK_ibygrk { print "\t FLATTEN_PREHOOK_$package - handle ibycus4.map\n"; diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/glossaries.tlpsrc b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/glossaries.tlpsrc index 80dc2a297b7..4e3605b725f 100644 --- a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/glossaries.tlpsrc +++ b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/glossaries.tlpsrc @@ -1,2 +1,3 @@ name glossaries category Package +binpattern f bin/${ARCH}/makeglossaries |